HomeMy WebLinkAboutPROJECT MANUAL - 04-00246 - Melaleuca - RemodelPROJECT MANUAL
For the Construction of -
Remodel
Rexburg Call Center
Rexburg, Idaho
for
Melaleuca, Inc.
Idaho Falls, Idaho
May 2004
Set No. R-3
NIELSON BODILY u ASSOCIATES, P.A.
990 JOHN ADAMS PARKWAY, P.O. BOX 2212, IDAHO FALLS, IDAHO 83403-2212
TELEPHONE: (208) 522-8779 FAX: (208) 522-8785 E-MAIL: NBARCH@IDA.NET
AD
Project Manual
for
Remodel
Rexburg Call Center
Rexburg, Idaho
for
Melaleuca, Inc.
Idaho Falls, Idaho
May 2004
ARCHITECTS:
MECHANICAL ENGINEERS:
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS:
Nielson Bodily & Associates, P.A.
990 John Adams Parkway
P.O.Box 2212
Idaho Falls, Idaho 83403
Telephone: (208) 522-8779
Fax: (208) 522-8785
Engineered Systems Associates, Inc.
315 West Center Street
Pocatello, Idaho 83201
Telephone: (208) 233-0501
Fax: (208)233-0529
Payne Engineering, Inc.
107 South 18th Avenue
Pocatello, Idaho 83201
Telephone: (208) 2324439
Fax: (208) 232-1435
TABLE OF CONTENTS
BIDDING DOCUMENTS
BIDDING DOCUMENTS:
PERFORMANCE BOND FORM
LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND FORM
CONTRACT AGREEMENT
GENERAL CONDITIONS
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
SPECIFICATIONS:
Division Subject
1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
2 SITE WORK
3 CONCRETE
4 MASONRY (Not Used)
5 METALS
6 WOOD AND PLASTICS
7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
8 DOORS AND WINDOWS
9 FINISHES
l0 SPECIALTIES
11 EQUIPMENT (Not Used)
12 FURNISHINGS (Nor Used)
13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (Not Used)
14 CONVEYING SYSTEM (Not Used)
15 MECHANICAL
16 ELECTRICAL
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Table of Contents TC
0376.72-989 1 May 2004
BIDDING DOCUMENTS
PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND
The printed Performance Bond and Payment Bond, Standard Form ofthe American Institute of Architects, Form A312, 1984 Edition,
is hereby made part of the Contract Documents, by reference, to the same extent as if herein written out in full. Copies of this
Document are available for examination at the office of the Architect and will be furnished for the execution of this Contract.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Performance and Paymem Bond
0376-72-989 1 May 2004
1 9 9 7 E D I T I O N
AIA DOCUMENT
A101-1997
Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor
where the basis of payment is a STIPULATED SUM
AGREEMENT madeasofthe
in the year
(In words, indicate day, month and year)
BETWEEN the Owner:
(Name, address and other information)
and the Contractor:
The Project is:
(Name and location)
The Architect is:
(Name, address and other information)
The Owner and Contractor agree as follows.
This document has impor-
tant legal consequences.
day of Consultation with an
attorney is encouraged
with respect to its
completion or modification.
Copyright 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987,(D 1997 by The American Institute of
Architects. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission
of the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
WARNING: unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
AIA Document A201-1997,
General Conditions of the
Contract for Construction, is
adopted in this document by
reference. Do not use with
other general conditions
unless this document is
moalnea.
This document has been
approved and endorsed by
The Associated General
Contractors of America.
01997 AIA®
AIA DOCUMENT A101-1997
OWNER -CONTRACTOR
AGREEMENT
The American Institute
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
ARTICLE 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The Contract Documents consist of this Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General,
Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to
execution of this Agreement, other documents listed in this Agreement and Modifications issued
after execution of this Agreement; these form the Contract, and are as fully a part of the Contract
as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein. The Contract represents the entire and
integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representa-
tions or agreements, either written or oral. An enumeration of the Contract Documents, other
than Modifications, appears in Article 8.
ARTICLE 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT
The Contractor shall fully execute the Work described in the Contract Documents, except to the
extent specifically indicated in the Contract Documents to be the responsibility of others.
ARTICLE 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
3.1 The date of commencement of the Work shall be the date of this Agreement unless a
different date is stated below or provision is made for the date to be fixed in a notice to proceed
issued by the Owner.
(Insert the date of commencement if l differs from the date of this Agreement or, if applicable, state that the
date will be fixed in a notice to proceed.)
If, prior to the commencement of the Work, the Owner requires time to file mortgages, mechan-
ic's liens and other security interests, the Owner's time requirement shall be as follows:
3.2 The Contract Time shall be measured from the date of commencement.
3.3 The Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work not later than
days from the date of commencement, or as follows:
(Insert number of calendar days. Alternatively, a calendar date may be used when coordinated with the date of
commencement. Unless stated elsewhere in the Contract Documents, insert any requirements for earlier
Substantial Completion of certain portions of the Work.)
, subject to adjustments of this Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents.
(Insert provisions, if my,, for liquidated damages relating to failure to complete on time or for bonus payments
for early completion of the Work.)
01997 AIA®
AIA DOCUMENT AIOI-1997
OWNER -CONTRACTOR
AGREEMENT
The American Institute
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006.5292
WARNING: Unlicensed phorccopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
ARTICLE 4 CONTRACT SUM
4.1 The Owner shall pay the Contractor the Contract Sum in current funds for the Contractor's
performance of the Contract. The Contract Sum shall be
Dollars (s ),
subject to additions and deductions as provided in the Contract Documents.
4.2 The Contract Sum is based upon the following alternates, if any, which are described in the
Contract Documents and are hereby accepted by the Owner:
(State the numbers or other identification of accepted alternates. If decisions on other alternates are to be made
by the Owner subsequent to the execution of this Agreement, attach a schedule of such other alternates showing
the amount for each and the date when that amount expires.)
4.3 Unit prices, if any, are as follows:
ARTICLE 5 PAYMENTS
5.1 PROGRESS PAYMENTS
5.1.1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to the Architect by the Contractor and
Certificates for Payment issued by the Architect, the Owner shall make progress payments on
account of the Contract Sum to the Contractor as provided below and elsewhere in the Contract
Documents.
5.1.2 The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one calendar month
ending on the last day of the month, or as follows:
5.1.3 Provided that an Application for Payment is received by the Architect not later than the
day of a month, the Owner shall make payment to the Contractor not
later than the day of the month. If an
Application for Payment, is received by the Architect after the application date fixed above, pay-
ment shall be made by the Owner not later than days after the Architect
receives the Application for Payment.
5.1.4 Each Application for Payment shall be based on the most recent schedule of values submit-
ted by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. The schedule of values shall
allocate the entire Contract Sum among the various portions of the Work. The schedule of values
shall be prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the
Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis
for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment.
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
01997 AIA®
AIA DOCUMENT AIOI.1997
OWNER -CONTRACTOR
AGREEMENT
The American Institute
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
5.1.5 Applications for Payment shall indicate the percentage of completion of each portion of the
Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment.
5.1.6 Subject to other provisions of the Contract Documents, the amount of each progress pay-
ment shall be computed as follows:
.1 Take that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to completed Work as deter-
mined by multiplying the percentage completion of each portion of the Work by the
share of the Contract Sum allocated to that portion of the Work in the schedule of val-
ues, less retainage of percent( %). Pending final determi-
nation of cost to the Owner of changes in the Work, amounts not in dispute shall be
included as provided in Subparagraph 7.3.8 of AIA Document A2o1-1997;
.2 Add that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials and equipment
delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the completed
construction (or, if approved in advance by the Owner, suitably stored off the site at a
location agreed upon in writing), less retainage of percent( %);
.3 Subtract the aggregate of previous payments made by the Owner; and
.a Subtract amounts, if any, for which the Architect has withheld or nullified a Certificate
for Payment as provided in Paragraph 9.5 of AIA Document A2o1-1997.
5.1.7 The progress payment amount determined in accordance with Subparagraph 5.1.6 shall be
further modified under the following circumstances:
.1 Add, upon Substantial Completion of the Work, a sum sufficient to increase the total pay-
ments to the full amount of the Contract Sum, less such amounts as the Architect shall
determine for incomplete Work, retainage applicable to such work and unsettled claims;
and (Subparagraph 9.8.5 of AIA Document Aeon -1997 requires release of applicable retainage upon
Substantial Completion of Work with consent of surety, if any.)
1.4,1 :G c7--1 ..... nl,rf„n ,G,hr. \>rn.4 N,v�s�Fr�� �,.,r...;,lh. r{,,L,,.�,1 rhrn,_Inh no Fault of
the Contractor, any additional amounts payable in accordance with Subparagraph 9.10.3
of AIA Document A2ol-1997•
5.1.8 Reduction or limitation of retainage, if any, shall be as follows:
(If it is intended, prior to Substantial Completion of the entire Work, to reduce or linnit the retainage resulting
front the percentages inserted in Clauses 5,1.6.1 and 5.1.6.2 above, and this is not explained elsewhere in the
Contract Documents, insert here provisions for such reduction or limitation.)
5.1.9 Except with the Owner's prior approval, the Contractor shall not make advance payments
to suppliers for materials or equipment which have not been delivered and stored at the site.
5.2 FINAL PAYMENT
5.2.1 Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, shall be made
by the Owner to the Contractor when:
.1 the Contractor has fully performed the Contract except for the Contractor's responsibil-
ity to correct Work as provided in Subparagraph 12.2.2 of AIA Document A201-1997, and
to salisfv other requirements, if any, which extend beyond final pavment; and
.2 a final (:ertiticate for Payment has been issued by the Architect.
WARNING: Unllcensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
01997 AIA®
AIA DOCUMENT A101-1997
OWNER -CONTRACTOR
AGREEMENT
The American Institute
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.'.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5291
5.2.2 The Owner's final payment to the Contractor shall be made no later than 3o days after the
issuance of the Architect's final Certificate for Payment, or as follows:
ARTICLE 6 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION
6.1 The Contract may be terminated by the Owner or the Contractor as provided in Article 14
of AIA Document A2o1-1997
6.2 The Work may be suspended by the Owner as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document
A2o1-1997•
ARTICLE 7 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
7.1 Where reference is made in this Agreement to a provision of AIA Document A201-1997 or
another Contract Document, the reference refers to that provision as amended or supplemented
by other provisions of the Contract Documents.
7.2 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract shall bear interest from the date payment is
due at the rate stated below, or in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time
at the place where the Project is located.
(Insert rate of interest agreed upon, if any.)
(Usury laws and requiremems under the Federal Truth in Lending Act, similar state and local consumer credit
laws and other regulations at the Owner's and Contractor's principal places of business, the location of the
Project and elsewhere may affect the validity of this provision. Legal advice should be obtained with respect to
deletions or modifications, and also regarding requirements such as written disclosures or waivers.)
7.3 The Owner's representative is:
(:Name, address and other information)
7.4 The Contractor's representative is:
(Name, address and other information)
7.5 Neither the Owner's nor the Contractor's representative shall be changed without ten days'
written notice to the other party.
7.6 Other provisions:
IARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violate$ U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
IIIA
s.0
0
00 �.00
0
01997 AIA®
AIA DOCUMENT AI01-1997
OWNER -CONTRACTOR
AGREEMENT
The American Institute
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
ARTICLE 8 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
8.1 The Contract Documents, except for Modifications issued after execution of this
Agreement, are enumerated as follows:
8.1.1 The Agreement is this executed 1997 edition of the Standard Form of Agreement Between
Owner and Contractor, AIA Document Asol-1997.
8.1.2 The General Conditions are the 1997 edition of the General Conditions of the Contract for
Construction, AIA Document A2o1-1997•
8.1.3 The Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract are those contained in the Project
Manual dated and are as follows:
Document Title Pages
8.1.4 The Specifications are those contained in the Project Manual dated as in Subparagraph 5.1.3,
and are as follows:
(Either list the Specifications here or refer to an exhibit attached to this Agreement.)
Section
Title
Pages
8.1.5 The Drawings are as follows, and are dated unless a
different date is shown below:
(Either list the Drawings here or refer to an exhibit attached to this Agreement.)
Number Title Date
01997 AIA®
AIA DOCUMENT A101-1997
OWNER -CONTRACTOR
AGREEMENT
The American Institute
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
WARNING: Unllconsed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
8.1.6 The Addenda, if any, are as follows:
Number
Date
Pages
Portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements are not part of the Contract Documents
unless the bidding requirements are also enumerated in this Article 8.
8.1.7 Other documents, if any, forming pari of the Contract Documents are as follows:
(List here any additional documents that are intended to form part of the Contract Documents. AIA Document
A2ot-t997 provides that bidding requirements such as advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders,
sample forms and the Contractors bid are not part of the Contract Documents unless enumerated in this
Agreement. They should be listed here only if intended to be part of the Contract Documents.)
This Agreement is entered into as of the day and year first written above and is executed in at least
three original copies, of which one is to be delivered to the Contractor, one to the Architect for use
in the administration of the Contract, and the remainder to the Owner.
O W N E R (signature)
(Printed name and title)
CON T R A C T O R(Signature)
(Printed name and title)
CAUTIOWYou should sign an original AIA document or a licensed reproduction. Originals contain the ArA logo
printed in red; licensed reproductions are those produced in accordance with the Instructions to this document.
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates US. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
01997 AIA®
AIA DOCUMENT A1014997
OWNER -CONTRACTOR
AGREEMENT
The American Institute
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
1 9 9 7 E D I T I O N
AIA DOCUMENT
General Conditions of the Contract for Construction
TABLE OF ARTICLES
1. GENERAL PROVISIONS
2. OWNER
CONTRACTOR
4. ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
5. SUBCONTRACTORS
CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS
CHANGES IN THE WORK
TIME
9. PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
10. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
11. INSURANCE AND BONDS
12. UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
13. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
14. TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT
CAUTION: 1-ou s{muld Ude au or{ginal AL1 document with i logo printed in red..ju original assures that
d7un;,rs mill con 1,I. nh"vr; d us nor ornn when donuncnG are reproduced.
Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1967, 1970, 1976, 1987, 01997 by The American Institute of Architects.
Fifteenth Edition. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written permission of
the AIA violates the copyright laws of the United Slates and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
A201-1997
This document has impor-
tant legal consequences.
Consultation with an
attorney is encouraged
with respect to its
completion or modification.
This document has been
approved and endorsed by
The Associated General
Contractors of America.
01997 A I A 0
AIA DOCUMENT A201.1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
CONSTRUCTION
The American Institute
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
0
INDEX
Acceptance of Nonconforming Work
9.6-6,9.9.3,12.3
Acceptance of Work
9.6.6,9.8.2,9.9.3,9 10.1, 9.10.3, 12.3
Access to Work
3.16, 6.2.1, 12.1
Accident Prevention
4.2.3,10
Acts and Omissions
3.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.8, 3.18, 4.2.3, 4.3.8, 4.4.1, 8.3.1, 9.5.1,
10.2.5, 13-4.2, 13.7, 14.1
Addenda
1.1-1,31-11
Additional Costs, Claims for
4.3-4,4.3.5,4.3.6, 6.1.1, 10.3
Additional Inspections and Testing
9.8.3, 12.2.1, 13.5
Additional Time, Claims for
4.3.4, 4.3.7, 8.3.2
ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
3.1-3,41, 949.5
Advertisement or Invitation to Bid
1.1.1
Aesthetic Effect
42.13, 4.5.1
Allowances
3.8
All-risk Insurance
1141.1
Applications for Payment
4.2.5,7-349.2,93,94,9-5.1, 9.6-3,9.7.1, 9.8.5,
910, 11.1.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3
Approvals
2-4,3-1.3,3.5,3.10.2,3.12,4.2-7,9.3.2,13,4.2,13.5
Arbitration
4.3-3,4.4, 4.5-1,4.5.2,4.6, 8.3.1, 9.7.1,11.4.9, 11.4.10
01997 AIA®
AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
CONSTRUCTION
The American Institute
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006.5292
Architect's Additional Services and Expenses
2.4, 11.4.11, 12.2.1, 13.5.2, 13.5.3, 14.2.4
Architect's Administration of the Contract
3.13, 4.2, 43 4, 4.4, 94, 9.5
Architect's Approvals
2.4, 3-1-3,3-5.1, 3.10.2, 4.2.7
Architect's Authority to Reject Work
3.5.1, 42.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1
Architect's Copyright
1.6
Architect's Decisions
4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.3.4, 4.4.1, 4.4.5,
4.4.6, 4 5, 6.3, 7.3.6, 7.3.8, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9 2, 9.4, 9.5.1,
9.8.4, 9.9-1,13-5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4
Architect's Inspections
4.2.2, 4.2.9, 4.3.4 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5
Architect's Instructions
3.23, 3.3.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2-8,741, 12.1, 13.5.2
Architect's Interpretations
4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.3.6
Architect's Project Representative
4.2.10
Architect's Relationship with Contractor
1.1.2, 1.6, 3.1.3, 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3-3-1,3-4.2, 3.5.11
3.7.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2, 4.3.4,
4.4.1, 4.4-7,5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 93, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7,
9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 11.47,12,13.4.2, 13.5
Architect's Relationship with Subcontractors
1.1.2, 4.23, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 9.6.3, 9.6-4,11-4.7
Architect's Representations
9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1
Architect's Site Visits
42.2, 42.5, 4.2.9, 4.3.4, 9 4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1,
13.5
Asbestos
10.3.1
Attornevs' Fees
3.18.1, 9.10.2,10-3.3
Award of Separate Contracts
6.1.1, 6.12
Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts
for Portions of the Work
5.2
Basic Definitions
1.1
Bidding Requirements
111, 11-7, 5.2.1,11.5.1
Boiler and Machinery Insurance
11.4.2
Bonds, Lien
9.10.2
Bonds, Performance, and Payment
7.3.6.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.4.9, 11.5
Building Permit
3.7.1
Capitalization
1.3
Certificate of Substantial Completion
9.8-3,9.8.4,9.8 5
Certificates for Payment
4.2-5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7.1, 9.101,
9.10.3, 13.7, 14.113, 14.2.4
][WARMING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
Architect
4.1
Architect, Definition of
4.1.1
Architect, Extent of Authority
2.4, 3.12.7, 42, 43.6, 4.4, 5.2, 6.3, 7.1.2, 7.3.6, 7 4,
9.2, 9.3.1, 9.4 9.5, 9.8.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1,
13.5.1, 13-5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4
Architect, Limitations of Authority and
Responsibility
o. 0
2.1.1, 333, 3.12.4, 3.12.8, 3.12.10, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 4.2.2,
�bcrv'o�
4.23,42.6,4.2. 7, 4.2.10, 4.212, 4.2.13, 4.4, 5.21,
O
7.4,9.4.2,9.6.4,9.6.6
01997 AIA®
AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
CONSTRUCTION
The American Institute
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006.5292
Architect's Additional Services and Expenses
2.4, 11.4.11, 12.2.1, 13.5.2, 13.5.3, 14.2.4
Architect's Administration of the Contract
3.13, 4.2, 43 4, 4.4, 94, 9.5
Architect's Approvals
2.4, 3-1-3,3-5.1, 3.10.2, 4.2.7
Architect's Authority to Reject Work
3.5.1, 42.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1
Architect's Copyright
1.6
Architect's Decisions
4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.3.4, 4.4.1, 4.4.5,
4.4.6, 4 5, 6.3, 7.3.6, 7.3.8, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9 2, 9.4, 9.5.1,
9.8.4, 9.9-1,13-5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4
Architect's Inspections
4.2.2, 4.2.9, 4.3.4 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5
Architect's Instructions
3.23, 3.3.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2-8,741, 12.1, 13.5.2
Architect's Interpretations
4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.3.6
Architect's Project Representative
4.2.10
Architect's Relationship with Contractor
1.1.2, 1.6, 3.1.3, 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3-3-1,3-4.2, 3.5.11
3.7.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2, 4.3.4,
4.4.1, 4.4-7,5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 93, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7,
9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 11.47,12,13.4.2, 13.5
Architect's Relationship with Subcontractors
1.1.2, 4.23, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 9.6.3, 9.6-4,11-4.7
Architect's Representations
9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1
Architect's Site Visits
42.2, 42.5, 4.2.9, 4.3.4, 9 4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1,
13.5
Asbestos
10.3.1
Attornevs' Fees
3.18.1, 9.10.2,10-3.3
Award of Separate Contracts
6.1.1, 6.12
Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts
for Portions of the Work
5.2
Basic Definitions
1.1
Bidding Requirements
111, 11-7, 5.2.1,11.5.1
Boiler and Machinery Insurance
11.4.2
Bonds, Lien
9.10.2
Bonds, Performance, and Payment
7.3.6.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.4.9, 11.5
Building Permit
3.7.1
Capitalization
1.3
Certificate of Substantial Completion
9.8-3,9.8.4,9.8 5
Certificates for Payment
4.2-5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7.1, 9.101,
9.10.3, 13.7, 14.113, 14.2.4
][WARMING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
Certilicate., of Inspection, Testing or Approval
13.5.4
Certificates of Insurance
9.10.2. 11.1.3
Change Orders
1.1.1, 2.4.1, 3.4.2, 3.8.2.3, 3-11-t, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 4.3.4,
4.3.9, 5.=3, 7.1, 7.7, 7.3, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 9.10.3, 11.4.1.2,
11 4.4, 11.4.9, 12.1.2
Change Orders, Definition of
7.2.1
CHANGES IN THE WORK
3.11, 4.2.8, 7, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 11.4.9
Claim, Definition of
4.3.1
Claims and Disputes
3.2.3, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 6.1.1, 6.3, 7.3.8, 933, 9.10.4,
10.3.3
Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims
4.6.5
Claims for Additional Cost
3.2.3, 43.4, 4.3.5, 4.3.6, 6.1.1, 7.3-8,10-3.2
Claims for Additional Time
3.2-3,4.3.4, 4.3.7, 6.1.1, 8.3-2,10-3.2
Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions
4.3.4
Claims for Damages
3.2.3, 3.18, 4.3.10, 6.1.1, 8.33, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3,
11.1.1, 11.4.5, 11.4.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4
Claims Subject to Arbitration
4.4.1, 4.5.6 4.6.1
Cleaning Up
3.15, C,.3
Commencement of Statutory Limitation Period
13.7
Commencement of the Work,
Conditions Relating to
2.2.1, 3.2.1, 3.4.1, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12.6, 435, 5.2.1,
5.2.3, 6.2.2, 8.1.2, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 11.1, 11.4.1,11.4.6, 11.5.1
Commencement of the Work, Definition of
8.1.2
Communications Facilitating Contract
Administration
3.9.1, 4.2.4
Completion, Conditions Relating to
1.6.1, 3.4.1, 3.11, 3-15,4.2.2,4-2-9, 8.2, 9.4.2, 9.8,
9.9.1, 9.10, 12.2, 13-7,14.1.2
COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND
Completion, Substantial
4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3,
9.10.4.2, 12 2,13.7
Compliance with Laws
1.6.1, 3.2.2, 3.6, 3.7. 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 4.4.8, 4.6.4,
4.6.6, 9.6.4,10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4,13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1,
13-5.2,13.6,14-1.1,14.2-1.3
Concealed or Lllknowwn Conditions
4.3.4, 8.3.1, m.3
Conditions of the Contract
1.1.1, 1.1.7, 6.1.1, 6.1.4
Consent, Written
1.6, 3.4.2, 3.12.8, 314.2,4-1.2,4-3-4,4.6-4,9.3.2,
9.8.5, 9.9.1,9.10.2,9-10.3,11-4.1,13.2,13-4.2
CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE
CONTRACTORS
1.1.4, 6
Construction Change Directive, Definition of
7.3.1
Construction Change Directives
1.1.1, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 43.9, 7.1, 7.3, 9.3.1.1
Construction Schedules, Contractor's
1.4.1.2, 3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 4.3.7.2, 6.1.3
Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts
5.4,14.2.2.2
Continuing Contract Performance
4.3.3
Contract, Definition of
1.1.2
CONTRACT, TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE
5.4-1.1,11-4.9,14
Contract Administration
3.1.3, 4, 9.4, 9.5
Contract Award and Execution, Conditions Relating
to
3.7.1,3.10,5.2, 6.1,11.1.3,11.4.6,11.5.1
Contract Documents, The
1.1, t1
Contract Documents, Copies Furnished
and Use of
1.6, 2.2.5, 53
Contract Documents, Definition of
1.1.1
Contract Sum
3.8, 43.4, -43.5, 4.4-5,5.2.3,7.2, 7-3,749-11,94-2,
9.5.1-4, 9.6.7, 9.7, 10.3.2,11.4.1, 14.2.4, 14.3.2
Contract Sum, Definition of
9.1
Contract Time
43.4, 43.7, 4.4 5, 5.2.3, 7.2.1.3, 7.3, 7.4, 8.1.1, 8.2,
8.3.1, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 12.1.1, 14.3.2
Contract Time, Definition of
8.1.1
CONTRACTOR
Contractor, Definition of
3.1, 6.1.2
Contractor's Construction Schedules
141.2, 3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 4.3.7.2, 6.1.3
Contractor's Employees
3.3.2, 3.4-3,3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3,
11.1.1, 11.4.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1,
Contractors Liability Insurance
11.1
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
01997 AIA®
AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
CONSTRUCTION
The American Institute
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
0 19 97 A I A 0
AIA DOCUMENT A2014997
GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
CONSTRUCTION
The American Institute
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
Contractor's Relationship with Separate Damages, Claims for
Contractors and Owners Forces 3.2.3, 3.18, 4.3.10, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9,5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3,
3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 6, 11.4.7, 12.1.2, 12.2.4 11.1.1, 1.4.5, 11.4.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4
Contractor's Relationship with Subcontractors
1.2.2,3.3-2, 3.18.1, 3.18.2, 5, 9.6.2, 9.6.7, 9.10.2,
11.4.1.2, 114-7,11-4-8
Contractor's Relationship with the Architect
1.1.2,1.6, 3.1.3, 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 33.1,3.4.2, 3.5.1,
3.73, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2, 43.4,
44.1, 4.4.7, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 93, 9-4-5, 9.7,
9.8, 9.9,10.2.6,10.3,11.3,11-4.7,12,13-4.2,13.5
Contractor's Representations
1.5.2,3.5-1, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.33, 9.8.2
Contractor's Responsibility for Those Performing
the Work
3.3.2,3.18,4.2.3,4.3.85.3.66.1.3,6.2,6.3,9.5.1,10
Contractor's Review of Contract Documents
1.5.25 3.2, 3.7.3
Contractor's Right to Slop the Work
97
Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract
4.3.10,14.1
Contractor's Submittals
3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 73.6, 9.2, 9.3,
9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.6 9.10,2, 9.10.3, 1.1.3, 1.5.2
Contractor's Superintendent
3.9,10.2.6
Contractor's Supervision and Construction
Procedures
1.2.2,3-3, 3.4,3 12-10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 4.33, 6.1.3, 6.2.4,
7.1-3,7-3-4, 7.3.6, 8.2, lo, 12, 14
Contractual Liability Insurance
1.1.1.81.2,11.3
Coordination and Correlation
1.2, 1.5.2, 3.3.1, 3.10, 3.12.6, 6.1.3, 6.2.1
Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications
1.6, 2.2.5, 3.11
Copyrights
1.6, 3.17
Correction of Work
2.3, 2.4, 3.7.4, 4.2.1, 9.4.2, 9.81, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 12.1.2,
12.2,13.7.1.3
Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents
1.2
Cost, Definition of
73.6
Costs
2.4, 3.2.3, 3J•4, 3.8.2,3-15-2, 4-3,54.2, 6.1.1, 6.2-3,
7.333, 73.6, 73-7, 73.8, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 10.5, 11.3,
11.4, 12.1,12.Z.1, 12.2.4,13.5,14
Culling and Patching
6.2.5,3.14
Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate
Contractors
3.14.2, 6.2.4, 9.2.1.5, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.6, 11.1, 11.4,
12.2.4
Damage to the Work
3.14.2, 9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.6, 11.4, 12-2.4
Damages for Delay
6-1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1.6, 9.7, 10.3.2
Date of Commencement of the Work, Definition of
8.1.2
Date of Substantial Completion, Definition of
8.1.3
Day, Definition of
8.1.4
Decisions of the Architect
4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.232, 4.2.13, 4.3.4, 4.4.1,4.4-5,
4.4.6, 4.5, 6.3, 7.3.6, 7.3.8, 8.1.3, 8.3.6 9.2, 9.4, 9.5.1,
9.8.4, 9.9-1,13-5.2, 14.2.2,14-2.4
Decisions to Withhold Certification
9.4.1, 9.5, 9.7,14.1-1.3
Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance,
Rejection and Correction of
2.3, 2.4, 3.5.1, 4.2.6, 6.2.5, 9.5.1, 9.5.2, 9.6.6, 9.8.2,
9.9 3, 9.10.4, 12.2.1, 13.7.13
Defective Work, Definition of
3.5.1
Definitions
1.1,2.1.1,3.63.5.1,3.12.1,3.12.2,3.12.3,4.1.1,4.3.65.1,
61.2.7.2.1, 7.3.1, .-.3.6, 8.1, 9.1, 9.8.1
Delays and Extensions of Time
3.2.3, 4.3.1, 43 4, 43.7, 4.4.5, 5.2-3,7.2-1, 7.3-1, 7.4.1,
7.5.6 6.3, 9.5.6 9.7.1,10-3.2, lo.6.1, 14.3.2
Disputes
4.1.4 43, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 6.3, 7.3.8
Documents and Samples at the Site
3.11
Drawings, Definition of
1.1.5
Drawings and Specifications, Lase and Ownership of
1.1.1, 1-3,1-2-5, 3.11, 53
Effective Date of Insurance
8.2.2, 11.1.2
Emergencies
4.3-5,10.6,14.1-1.2
Employees, Contractor's
3.3.2, 3.43, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6,10.2,10.3,
11.1.1, 11.4.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1
Equipment, Labor, Materials and
1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5.1, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.11
4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1,6.2.1,7.3.6, 9.3.2, 9.33, 9.5.1.3,
9.10.2,10.2.1,10.2.4,14.21.2
Execution and Progress of the Work
1.1,3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2, 2.2.3. 2.2.5, 3.1, 3.3, 3-4,3-5, 3.72
3.10, 3.12, 3.14, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 4.3.3, 6.2.2, 7.1-3,,.3.4,
8.2, 9.5, 9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.2, 14.2, 14.3
Extensions of Time
3.2 3, 43.1, 4.3.4, 43.7, 4 4 5, 5.2.3,7.2.1,73, 7.4.1,
9.5.1, 9.7.1, 10.3.2, 1o.6.1, 14.3.2
Failure of Payment
4.3.6, 9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 14.I.1.3, 14.2.1.2,13.6
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
Faulty Work
(See Defective or Nonconforming Work)
Final Completion and Final Payment
4.2.1, 4.2-9,4.3.2,9 9 2, 9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11 4.1,
11.4.5, 1.3.1, 13.7, 14.2.4, 14.4.3
Financial Arrangements, Owner's
2.2.1, 13.1.2, 14.1.1.5
Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance
11.4
GENERAL PROVISIONS
Governing Law
13.1
Guarantees (See Warranty)
Hazardous Materials
10.2-4,10.3,10.5
Identification of Contract Documents
1.5.1
Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers
5.2.1
Indemnification
3.17, 3.i8,9.10.2,10-3.3,10.5,11.4-1.2,11-4.7
Information and Services Required of the Owner
2.1.2, 2.2, 3.2 1, 3.12.4, 3.12.10, 4.2-7, 433, 6.1-3,
6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.3.2, 9.6.1, 9.6-4,9-9-2,9-10-3,10-3-3,
11.2,11.4,13-5.1,13-5.2,14.1-1.4,14-1.4
Injury or Damage to Person or Property
4.3.8, 10.2, 1o.6
Inspections
3.1.3, 33.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 42A, 9.4.2, 9.82,
9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 12.2.1, 13.5
Instructions to Bidders
1.1.1
Instructions to the Contractor
3.2.3, 3.3.1, 3.8.1, 4.2.8, 5.2.1, 7,12, 822,13.5.2
Insurance
3.18.1, 6.1.1, 7.3.6, 8.2.1,9.3.2,9.8-4,9.9.1,9.10.2,
9.10.5, 11
Insurance, Boiler and Machinery
11.4.2
Insurance, Contractor's Liability
11.1
Insurance, Effective Date of
8.2.2, 11.1-2
Insurance, Loss of Use
11.4.3
Insurance, Owner's Liability
11.2
Insurance, Project Management Protective Liability
11.3
Insurance, Property
102.5,11.4
Insurance, Stored Materials
9.3.2,11.4-1.4
INSURANCE AND BONDS
Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial Occupancy
9-9-1,11-4-1-5
Insurance Companies, Settlement with
11.4.10
Intent of the Contract Documents
1.2.1, 4.2-7,4.2.12,4.2-13,7.4
Interest
13.6
Interpretation
1.2.3,1.4, 4.1.1, 4.3.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 8.1.4
Interpretations, Written
4.2.11, 42.12, 4.3.6
Joinder and Consolidation of Claims Required
4.6.4
Judgment on Final Award
4.6.6
Labor and Materials, Equipment
1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5-1,3.8.2, 3.8-3,3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1,
42.6, 42.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.6, 9.32, 933, 9.5.1.3,
9.10.2,10.2.1, 10.2-4,14.2.1.2
Labor Disputes
8.3.1
Laws and Regulations
1.6, 3.2.2, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 41.1, 4.4.8, 4.6,
9.6-4,9.9.1)10.2.2,11.1,11.4,13-1213.4,13-5.1,13.5.2,
13.6,14
Liens
2.12, 4.4.8, 8.2.2, 9.33, 9.10
Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder
4.6.4
Limitations, Statutes of
4.6.3, 12.2.6, 13.7
Limitations of Liability
2.3, 3.2.1, 3.5.1, 3.73, 3.12.8, 3.12.10, 3.17, 3.18, 4.2.6,
42.7, 4.2.12, 6.2.2, 9.4.2, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.4,10-3.3,
Io2.5, 11.12, 112.1,11.4.7, 12.2.5, 13.42
Limitations of Time
2.1.2, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2.1, 3.73, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1,
4.2.7, 43, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 5.2, 53, 5.4, 6.2.4, 73, 7.41
8-2,9-2, 9.3.1, 933, 9.4.6 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9,
9.10,11.1.3, 11.4.1.5, 11.4.6, 11.4.10, 122,13.5, 13.7, 14
Loss of Use Insurance
11.4.3
Material Suppliers
1.6, 3.12.1, 4.2.4, 42.6, 5.2.1, 9.3,9-4.2, 9.6, 9.1o.5
Materials, Hazardous
10.2-4,10.3,10.5
Materials, Labor, Equipment and
1.1-3, 1-1-6,1.6.6 3.4, 3.5.6 3.8.2, 3.8-23,3.12, 3.13,
3.15.6 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.6 7.3.6, 9.3.2, 933,
9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 102.6 10.2-4,14.2.1.2
Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and
Procedures of Construction
3.3.1, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2-7, 9.4.2
Mechanic's Lien
4.4 .8
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
01997 AIA®
AIA DOCUMENT A2014997
GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
CONSTRUCTION
The American Institute
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
I
I
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject she violator to legal prosecution.
Mediation
Owners Loss of Use Insurance
4.4.1, 44.5, 4.4.6, 4.4.8, 4.5, 4.6.1, 4.6.2, 8.3-1,10.5
11.4.3
Minor Changes in the Work
Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors
1.1.1, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 4.3.6, 7.1,7.4
1.1.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5 4, 9.6.4, 9.10.2, 14.2.2
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
Owners Right to Carry Out the Work
13
2.4, 12.2.4. 14.2.2._2
Modifications, Definition of
Owner's Right to Clean Up
1.1.1
6.3
Modifications to the Contract
Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to
1.1.1. 1.1.2, 3.7.3, 3.11, 4.1-2-4.2.1,5.2-3,7, 8.3-1,9.7,
Award Separate Contracts
10.3.2,11.4.1
6.1
Mutual Responsibility
Owner's Right to Stop the Work
6.2
2.3
Nonconforming Work, Acceptance of
Owner's Right to Suspend the Work
9.6.6, 9.9.3,12.3
14.3
Nonconforming Work, Rejection and Correction of
Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract
2-3,2-4,3.5.1,4.2.6, 6.2.5, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.4,
14.2
12.2.1,13.7-1.3
Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications
Notice
and Other Instruments of Service
2.2.1, 2.3, 2.4, 3.2.3, 3.3.1, 3J•2, 3.7.4, 3.12.9, 4.3,
1.1.1, 1.6, 2.2.5, 3.2.1, 3.11.1, 3.17.1, 4.2.12, 5.3
44.85 4.6.5, 5.2.1,8.2.2, 9.7,9,10,10.2.2,11-1.3,
Partial Occupancy or Use
11-4.6,12.2.2,12.2-4,13.3,13-5.1,13-5.2,14.1,14.2
9.6.6, 9.9,11.4-1.5
Notice, Written
Patching, Cutting and
2.3, 2.4 3.3.1, 3.9, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 43, 4.4.8, 4.6.5,
3.14, 6.2.5
5.2.1, 8.2.2, 9.7, 9.10,10-2.2,10.3,11-1.3,11-4.6,
12.2.2,12-2.4,13.3,14
Patents
Notice of Testing and Inspections
3.17
13-5.1,13-5.2
Payment, Applications for
Notice to Proceed
4.2.5, 73.8, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4,9.5.1,9.6-3,9.7.1,9.8.5,
8.22.2
9.10.1, 9.10.3, 9.10.5, 11.13, 14.2.4, 14.4.3
Notices, Permits, Fees and
Payment, Certificates for
2.2.2, 3.7, 3.13, 7.3.6-4,10.2.2
42.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7.1, 9.10.1,
9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4
Observations, Contractor's
Payment, Failure of
1.5.2, 3.2, 3.7-3,4.3.4
4.3.6, 9.5.1-3, 9.7, 9.10.2,14.1.1-3, 14.2.1.2, 13.6
Occupancy
Payment, Final
2.2.2, 9.6.6, 9.8, 11.4.1.5
4.2.1, 4.2.9, 43.2, 9.8.2, 9.10,11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.1,
Orders, Written
11-4.5, 12.3.1, 1;.,-, 14.2.4, 1443
1.1.1, 2.3,3.9,4.3.6,7,8.2.2,11-4.9,12.1,12.2,13-5.2,
Payment Bond, Performance Bond and
14.3.1
7.3.6.4, 9.G.7, 1,.10.3, 11.4.9,11.5
OWNER
Payments, Progress
2
4.3-3,9.3,9.6,9.8-5,9.10.3,13.6,14.2.3
Owner, Definition of
2.1
PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
9
Owner, Information and Services Required of the
Pavments to Subcontractors
2.1.2,2.2,3.2.1,3.12.4,3.12.10,4.2-7,4-3.3,6.1-3,
6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.3.2,9.6.1,9.6.4,9.9.2,9.10.3,10-3.3,
5.4.2,9-5-1-3,9.6.2,9.6-3,9.6-4,9.6-7,11-4.8,
112,11.4,13.5.1,13.5.2,14.1.1-4,14.1.4
14.2.1.2
Owner's Authority
PCB
'o. 0
1.6, 2.1.1, 2.3, 2.4, 3.4.2, 3.8.1, 3.12.10, 3.14.2, 4.1-2,
. .
3
o•. m,• .•o
4.1-3,4.2.4, 4.2.9, 4.3.6,4.4.7,5.2.1,5-2-4,5-4-1,
a
Performance Bond and Payment Bond
6.1, 6-3,7.2.1,7-3A, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 9.3-1,9.3.2,9.5.1,
7.3.6.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.4.9,11.5
0 1 9 9 7 A i A 0
9.9.1,9.10.2,10 -3.2,11 -1.3,11.3 -It 11.4.3,11.4.10,
Permits, Fees and Notices
AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997
12.2.2, 12.3.1, 13.2.2, 14.3,14.4
2.2.2,31.7,3-13,73.6-4,10.2.2
GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
Owners Financial Capability
P Y
PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION OF
CONSTRUCTION
_.2-1, 13'2'2' 14'1'1'5
10
Owners Liability Insurance
Polychlorinated Biphenyl
The American Institute
11.2
10-3.1
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, NM.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject she violator to legal prosecution.
Product Data, Definition of
3.12.2
Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings
3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7
Progress and Completion
4.2-2, 4 3.3, 8.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 14.1.4
Progress Payments
4.3.3, 93, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3
Project, Definition of the
1.1.4
Project Management Protective Liability Insurance
11.3
Project Manual, Definition of the
1.1.7
Project Manuals
2.2.5
Project Representatives
4.2.10
Property Insurance
10.2.5,11.4
PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
10
Regulations and Laws
1. 6, 3.2.2, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 4.4.8, 4.6,
9.6.4, 9.9.6 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4,13.1, t3-4,13-5-1,13-5.2,
13.6,14
Rejection of Work
3.5.1, 4.2.6, 12.2-1
Releases and Waivers of Liens
9.10.2
Representations
1.5.2, 3.5.1, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.1,
9.8.2, 9.10.1
Representatives
2.1.6 3 1, 3.9, 4.1.1, 4.2.1, 4.2.10, 5.1.1, 5.1.2, 13.2.1
Resolution of Claims and Disputes
4.4, 4.5, 4.6
Responsibility for Those Performing the Work
3.3.2, 3.18, 4.23, 4.3.8, 5-3-1, 6.1-3, 6.2, 6.3, 9.5.1, 10
Retainage
9.3.1, 9.6.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3
Review of Contract Documents and Field
Conditions by Contractor
1,5.x, 3.2, 3 73, 3.12.7, 6.13
Review of Contractor's Submittals by Owner
and Architect
3.10.1, 3-10.2,311, 3.12, 4.2, 5.2, 6.1.3, 9.2, 9.8.2
Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and
Samples by Contractor
3.12
Rights and Remedies
1.1.2, 2.3, 243-5-1, 3.15.2, 4.2.6, 4.3.4, 4.5, 4.6,5.3,
5.4, 6.1, 6.3.7.3.1, 8.3, 9-i 1, 9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 12.2.2,
12.2-4,13-4,14
Royalties, Patents and Copyrights
3.17
Rules and Notices fur Arbitration
4.6.2
Safety of Persons and Property
10.2, to.6
Safety Precautions and Programs
3.3.1,4-.2, 4.2-7, 5.3-1,10.1,10.2, 1o.6
Samples, Definition of
3.12.3
Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and
3.11, 3.12, 4 2.7
Samples at the Site, Documents and
3.11
Schedule of Values
9.2, 9.3.1
Schedules, Construction
1.4.1.2, 3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 4.3.7.2, 6.1.3
Separate Contracts and Contractors
1.1.4, 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.7, 4.6.4, 6, 8.3.1,11.4.7,
12.1.2, 12.2.5
Shop Drawings, Definition of
3.12.1
Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples
3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7
Site, Use of
3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1
Site Inspections
1.2.2, 3 '.1, 333, 3.1, 4.2, 4.3-4,9.4.2,9.10.1,13.5
Site Visits, Architect's
4.2.2, 4.2 9, 43.4, 9.4.2, 9.5-1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5
Special Inspections and Testing
4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.5
Specifications, Definition of the
t.1.6
Specifications, The
1.1-1, 1.1-6, 1.1.7, 1.2.2, 1.6, 3.11, 3.12.10, 3.17
Statute of Limitations
4.6.3, 12.2.6, 13.7
Stopping the Work
2.3, 4.3.6, 9.7, 10.3, 14.1
Stored Materials
6.2.1,9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2-4, 11.4.1.4
Subcontractor, Definition of
5.1.1
SUBCONTRACTORS
5
Subcontractors, Work by
12.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.1, 4.2.3, 5.23, 53, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6.7
Subcontractual Relations
5.3, 5.4, 93.1.2, 9.6, 9.10 10.2.1, 11.4.7, 11.4.8, 14.1,
14.2.1, 14.3.2
Submittals
1.6, 3.10, 3. u, 3.12, 42.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 7.3.6, 9.2, 9.3,
9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.13
Subrogation, Waivers of
6.u, 114.5, 164.7
Substantial Completion
4.2.9. 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3,
9.10.4.2, 12.2, 13.7
Substantial Completion, Definition of
9.8.t
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
0 19 97 AIA®
AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
CONSTRUCTION
The American Institute
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
I.
I
®1997 AIA®
AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
CONSTRUCTION
The American Institute
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
Substitution of Subcontractors
5.2.3, 5.2.4
Substitution of Architect
4.1.3
Substitutions of Materials
3.4-2,3.5.1, 73.7
Sub -subcontractor, Definition of
5.1.2
Subsurface Conditions
43.4
Successors and Assigns
13.2
Superintendent
3.9, 10.2.6
Supervision and Construction Procedures
1.2.2,31-31,343-12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 433, 6.1.3, 6.2.4,
7.13, 73.6, 8.2, 8.3.1, 9.4.2, to, 12, 14
Surety
4.4 7, 5.4.1.2, 9.8.5, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 14.2.2
Surety, Consent of
9.10.2, 9.10.3
Surveys
2.2.3
Suspension by the Owner for Convenience
14.4
Suspension of the Work
5.4.2, 14.3
Suspension or Termination of the Contract
4.3.6, 5.4.1.1, 11.4.9, 14
Taxes
3.6, 3.8.2.1, 7.3.6.4
Termination by the Contractor
43-10,14.1
Termination by the Owner for Cause
4.3.10, 541-1,14.2
Termination of the Architect
4.1.3
Termination of the Contractor
14.2.2
TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT
14
Tests and Inspections
3.1.3, 3.3.3, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 99
9.10.1,10-3.2,114.1-1,12.2.1,13.5
TIME
a
Time, Delays and Extensions of
3.2.3, 43.1, 4.3.4, 43.7, 4.4.5, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1,
7.4.1, 7.5.1, 6.3, 9.5.6 9.7.1, 10.3.2, 1o.6.6 14.3.2
Time Limits
2.1.2, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2.6 3.73, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1,
4.2, 43.4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 5.2 535 5.4, 6.2.4, 73, 7.4,
8.2,92.9.3.1,9.33,9.4.69.5,9.6,9.7,9.8,9.9,
9.10, 11.1.3, 11.4.1.5, 11.4.6, 11.4.1o, 12.2, 13.5, 13.73 14
Time Limits on Claims
4.3.2, 43.4.4.3.8, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6
Title to Work
9.3.2, 9.33
UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
12
Uncovering of Work
12.1
Unforeseen Conditions
43 4, 8.3-1,10.3
Unit Prices
43.9, 7.3.3.2
Use of Documents
1.1.1, 1.6, 2.2.5, 3.12.6, 53
Use of Site
3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1
Values, Schedule of
9.2, 9.3.1
Waiver of Claims by the Architect
13.4.2
Waiver of Claims by the Contractor
4.3-10,9.10 5, 11.4.7, 13.4.2
Waiver of Claims by the Owner
4.3.10, 9.9.3, 9.10.3, 9.10.4, 11-4.3, 11.4.5, 11.4.7,
12.2.2.1, 13-4.2, 14.2.4
Waiver of Consequential Damages
4.3.10, 14.2.4
Waiver of Liens
9.10.2, 9.10.4
Waivers of Subrogation
6.1.1, 11.4.5,11.4.7
Warranty
3.5, 4.2.9, 43.5-3, 933, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.4,12-2.2,
13.7.1.3
Weather Delays
4.3-7.2
Work, Definition of
1.1.3
Written Consent
1.6, 3.4.2, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 4.3.4, 4.6.4, 93.2,
9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.4.1, 13.2,13.4.2
Written Interpretations
4.2.16 4.2.12, 4.3.6
Written Notice
2.3, 24, 3.3.6 3.9, 3.12 9, 3.12.10, 4.3, 4.4.8, 4.6.5,
5.2.1, 8.2.2, 9.7, 9.10, 10.'_.2,10.3, 11.1,3, 11-4.6,
12.2.2, 12.2-4,13.3, 14
Written Orders
1.1.1, 2.3, 3.9, 43.6, 7, 8.2.2, 11-4.9, 12.1, 12.2, 13.5.2,
14.3.1
WARNING: Unllcensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS
1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor (hereinafter
the Agreement), Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions),
Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents
listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification
is (t) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a
Construction Change Directive or (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by
the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the Contract Documents do not
include other documents such as bidding requirements (advertisement or invitation to bid,
Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, the Contractor's bid or portions of Addenda relating to
bidding requirements).
1.1.2 THE CONTRACT
The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire
and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations,
representations or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified
only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual
relationship of any kind (1) between the Architect and Contractor, (2) between the Owner and a
Subcontractor or Sub -subcontractor, (3) between the Owner and Architect or (4) between any
persons or entities other than the Owner and Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be entitled
to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate
performance of the Architect's duties.
1.1.3 THE WORK
The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents,
whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and
services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The
Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project.
1.1.4 THE PROJECT
The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract
Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner or by
separate contractors.
1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS
The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the
design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections,
details, schedules and diagrams.
1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS
The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written require-
ments for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and perfor-
mance of related services.
1.1.7 THE PROJECT MANUAL
The Project Manual is a volume assembled for the Work which may include the bidding
requirements, sample forms, Conditions of the Contract and Specifications.
1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper
execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
01997 AIA®
AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
CONSTRUCTION
The American Institute
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance
by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents
and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results.
1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of
Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in
establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade.
1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which have well-known
technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance
with such recognized meanings.
1.3 CAPITALIZATION
1.3.1 Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those which are (r) specifically
defined, (2) the titles of numbered articles and identified references to Paragraphs, Subparagraphs
and Clauses in the document or (3) the titles of other documents published by the American
Institute of Architects.
1.4 INTERPRETATION
1.4.1 In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such
as "all" and "any" and articles such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an article is
absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of
either statement.
1.5 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
1.5.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed by the Owner and Contractor. If either the
Owner or Contractor or both do not sign all the Contract Documents, the Architect shall identify
such unsigned Documents upon request.
1.5.2 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has
visited the site, become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be
performed and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents.
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
1.6 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS
OF SERVICE
1.6.1 The Drawings, Specifications and other documents, including those in electronic form,
prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants are Instruments of Service through
which the Work to be executed by the Contractor is described. The Contractor may retain one
record set. Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor, Sub -subcontractor or material or
equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings, Specifications and other
documents prepared by the Architect or the Architect's consultants, and unless otherwise
indicated the Architect and the Architect's consultants shall be deemed the authors of them and
will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights, in addition to the copyrights. All
copies of Instruments of Service, except the Contractors record set, shall be returned or suitably
e o
accounted for to the Architect, on request, upon completion of the N\0rk. The Drawings,
oo..00
Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants, and
copies thereof furnished to the Contractor, are for use solely with respect to this Project. They are
® 19 9 r A I A 0
not to be used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, Sub -subcontractor or material or
AIA DOCUMENT A2014997
equipment supplier on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work
GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
without the specific written consent of the Owner, Architect and the Architect's consultants. The
CONSTRUCTION
Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub -subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are
authorized to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings, Specifications and other
The American Institute
of Architects
documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants appropriate to and for use in
P P
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006.5292
'
m
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
the execution of their Work under the Contract Documents. All copies made under this
authorization shall bear the statutory copyright notice, if any, shown on the Drawings,
Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect and the Architect's consultants.
Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in
connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's
or Architect's consultants' copyrights or other reserved rights.
ARTICLE 2 OWNER
2.1 GENERAL
2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to
throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Owner shall designate in
writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all
matters requiring the Owner's approval or authorization. Except as otherwise provided in
Subparagraph 4.2.1, the Architect does not have such authority. The term "Owner" means the
Owner or the Owner's authorized representative.
2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor within fifteen days after receipt of a written
request, information necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of or
enforce mechanic's lien rights. Such information shall include a correct statement of the record
legal title to the property on which the Project is located, usually referred to as the site, and the
Owner's interest therein.
2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED Of THE OWNER
2.2.1 The Owner shall, at the written request of the Contractor, prior to commencement of the
Work and thereafter, furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements
have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract. Furnishing of such evidence
shall be a condition precedent to commencement or continuation of the Work. After such
evidence has been furnished, the Owner shall not materially vary such financial arrangements
without prior notice to the Contractor.
2.2.2 Except for permits and fees, including those required under Subparagraph 3.7.1, which are
the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, the Owner shall secure and
pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for construction, use or
occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities.
2.2.3 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and
utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of tlhe site. The Contractor shall
be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise
proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work.
2.2.4 Information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents shall be
furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness. Any other information or services relevant
to the Contractors performance of the Work under the Owner's control shall be furnished by the
Owner after receipt from the Contractor of a written request for such information or services.
0 0
d. ,c
2.2.5 Lhiless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor will be furnished,
17�—
free of charge, such copies of Drawings and Project Manuals as are reasonably necessary for
® t 9 97 A I A
execution of the Work.
AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS
2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
CONSTRUCTION
2.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements
of the Contract DOlIIII)CIAS as required by Paragraph 12.2 or persistently fails to carry out Work in
The American Institute
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may issue a written order to the
Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been
eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the
part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or
entity, except to the extent required by Subparagraph 6.1.3.
2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK
2.4.1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents and fails within a seven-day period after receipt of written notice from the
Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and
promptness, the Owner may after such seven-day period give the Contractor a second written
notice to correct such deficiencies within a three-day period. If the Contractor within such
three-day period after receipt of such second notice fails to commence and continue to correct
any deficiencies, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have,
correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting
from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the reasonable cost of correcting such
deficiencies, including Owner's expenses and compensation for the Architect's additional services
made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. Such action by the Owner and amounts
charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect. If payments then or
thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay
the difference to the Owner.
ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred
to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Contractor" means
the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative.
3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance
with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's
administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by
persons other than the Contractor.
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR
3.2.1 Since the Contract Documents are complementary, before starting each portion of the
Work, the Contractor shall carefully study and compare the various Drawings and other Contract
Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as the information furnished by the
Owner pursuant to Subparagraph 2.2.3, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions
related to that portion of the Work and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These
obligations are for the purpose of facilitating construction by the Contractor and are not for the
purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents;
however, any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered.by the Contractor shall be reported
�.
promptly to the Architect as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require.
3.2.2 Any design errors or omissions noted by the Contractor during this review shall be
®1997 A 1 A
AIA DOCUMENT A201-19977
re orted tl to the Architect, but it is recognized that the Contractor's review is made in the
P promptly g
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Contractor's capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional unless otherwise
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
specifically provided in the Contract Documents. The Contractor is not required to ascertain that
CONSTRUCTION
the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building
The American Institute
codes, and rules and regulations, but any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the
of Architects
Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Architect.
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006.5292
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
3.2.3 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications
or instructions issued by the Architect in response to the Contractor's notices or requests for
information pursuant to Subparagraphs 3.2.1 and 3.2.2, the Contractor shall make Claims as
provided in Subparagraphs 4.3.6 and 4.3.7. If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of
Subparagraphs 3.2.1 and 3.2.2, the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner as
would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations. The Contractor shall
not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or
omissions in the Contract Documents or for differences between field measurements or
conditions and the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized such error,
inconsistency, omission or difference and knowingly failed to report it to the Architect.
3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES i
3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor's best skill and
attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction j
means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the
Work under the Contract, unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions
concerning these matters. If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning
construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, the Contractor shall evaluate j
the jobsite safety thereof and, except as stated below, shall be fully and solely responsible for the
jobsite safety of such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. If the Contractor
determines that such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures may not be safe, the
Contractor shall give timely written notice to the Owner and Architect and shall not proceed with
that portion of the Work without further written instructions from the Architect. If the
Contractor is then instructed to proceed with the required means, methods, techniques, sequences
or procedures without acceptance of changes proposed by the Contractor, the Owner shall be
solely responsible for any resulting loss or damage.
I
3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Con-
tractor's employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities
performing portions of the �Vork for or on behalf of the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors.
3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed
to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work.
3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS
3.4.1 Lhaless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and
pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat,
utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and
completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to
be incorporated in the Work.
3.4.2 The Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner, after
evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order.
3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor'semployees
Sac,
and other persons carrying out the Contract. The Contractor shall not permit
'I
employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them.
r ---
(D 1 9 9 7
®1997 AIA®
3.5 WARRANTY
AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997
3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment
GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless otherwise required or
CONSTRUCTION
permitted by the Contract Documents, that the Work will be free from defects not inherent in the
uality required or permitted, and that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract
q 1 P q
The American Institute
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
I
Documents. Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly
approved and authorized, may be considered defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes
remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not executed by the Contractor,
improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal
usage. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind
and quality of materials and equipment.
3.6 TAXES
3.6.1 The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work provided by
the Contractor which are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded,
whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect.
3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES
3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and
pay for the building permit and other permits and governmental fees, licenses and inspections
necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work which are customarily secured after
execution of the Contract and which are legally required when bids are received or negotiations
concluded.
3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by laws, ordinances, rules,
regulations and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work.
3.7.3 It is not the Contractor's responsibility to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in
accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations.
However, if the Contractor observes that portions of the Contract Documents are at variance
therewith, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect and Owner in writing, and
necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification.
3.7.4 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to laws, statutes, ordinances,
building codes, and rules and regulations without such notice to the Architect and Owner, the
Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs
attributable to correction.
3.8 ALLOWANCES
3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract
Documents. Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons
or entities as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons
or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection.
3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents:
.1 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
at the site and all required taxes, less applicable trade discounts;
(III
.2 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs,
overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall
o n
be included in the Contract Sum but not in the allowances;
cOo'
.3 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be
adjusted accordingly by Change Order. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect
0'997 AIA®
(1) the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Clause and
AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997
3.8.2.1
(2) changes in Contractor's costs under Clause 3.8.2.2.
GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
CONSTRUCTION
3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner in sufficient
time to avoid delay in the \Vork.
The American Institute
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
m
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
3.9 SUPERINTENDENT
3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who
shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent
shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall be as
binding as if given to the Contractor. Important communications shall be confirmed in writing.
Other communications shall be similarly confirmed on written request in each case.
3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
3.10.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall prepare and submit for
the Owner's and Architect's information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work. The
schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents, shall be revised at
appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project, shall be related to the
entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents, and shall provide for expeditious
and practicable execution of the Work.
3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare and keep current, for the Architect's approval, a schedule of
submittals which is coordinated with the Contractor's construction schedule and allows the
Architect reasonable time to review submittals.
3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent
schedules submitted to the Owner and Architect.
3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE
3.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of the Drawings,
Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked
currently to record field changes and selections made during construction, and one record copy of
approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar required submittals. These shall be
available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon
completion of the Work.
3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the
Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub -subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or
distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work.
3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions,
brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or
equipment for some portion of the Work.
3.12.3 Samples are physical examples which illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and
establish standards by which the Work will be judged.
3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract
Documents. The purpose of their submittal is to demonstrate for those portions of the Work for
which submittals are required by the Contract Documents the way by which the Contractor
proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract
Documents. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Subparagraph 4.2.7.
Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may
be so identified in the Contract Documents. Submittals which are not required by the Contract
Documents may be returned by the Architect without action.
3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve and
submit to the Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
O O
o. b
oo.ozzz.00
E___-1
01997 AIA®
AIA DOCUMENT A2014997
GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
CONSTRUCTION
The American Institute
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
I
the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay
in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate contractors. Submittals which are not
marked as reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents and approved by the
Contractor may be returned by the Architect without action.
3.12.6 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar
submittals, the Contractor represents that the Contractor has determined and verified materials,
field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and has checked
and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the
Work and of the Contract Documents.
3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents
require submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until
the respective submittal has been approved by the Architect.
3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall
not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by
the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the
Contractor has specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of
submittal and (i) the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor
change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued
authorizing the deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or
omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Architect's
approval thereof.
3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by
the Architect on previous submittals. In the absence of such written notice the Architect's
approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions.
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services which
constitute the practice of architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required
by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide
such services in order to carry out the Contractor's responsibilities for construction means,
methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. The Contractor shall not be required to provide
professional services in violation of applicable law. If professional design services or certifications
by a design professional related to systems, materials or equipment are specifically required of the
Contractor by the Contract Documents, the Owner and the Architect will specifv all performance
and design criteria that such services must satisfy. The Contractor shall cause such services or
certifications to be provided by a properly licensed design professional, whose signature and seal
shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings and other
submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other submittals related to the
Iil�N'oo..00
Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such
professional's written approval when submitted to the Architect. The Owner and the Architect
o, o
shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the services,
certifications or approvals performed by such design professionals, provided the Owner and
Architect have specified to the Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services
0 1 9 9 7 A I A 0
must satisfy. Pursuant to this Subparagraph 3.12.10, the Architect will review, approve or take other
AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997
appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with
GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Contractor
CONSTRUCTION
shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria required by the
The American Institute
Contract Documents.
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
m
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
3.13 USE OF SITE
3.13.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances,
permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with
materials or equipment.
3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING
3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete
the Work or to make its parts fit together properly.
3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially
completed construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise
altering such construction, or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter such
construction by the Owner or a separate contractor except with written consent of the Owner and
of such separate contractor; such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor
shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor's
consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work.
3.15 CLEANING UP
3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of
waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work,
the Contractor shall remove from and about the Project waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor's
tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials.
3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may
do so and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor.
3.16 ACCESS TO WORK
3.16.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation
and progress wherever located.
3.17 ROYALTIES, PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS
3.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or
claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect
harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when
a particular design, process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required
by the Contract Documents or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings,
Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However, if the
Contractor has reason to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement
of a copyright or a patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such
information is promptly furnished to the Architect.
3.18 INDEMNIFICATION
3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law and to the extent claims, damages, losses or
expenses are not covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance purchased by the
Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 11.3, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless
the Owner, Architect, Architects consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and
o, a
against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising
o
out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or
® 1997 A I A®
expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of
AIA DOCUMENT A201.1997
tangible property ( other than the Work itself), but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts
GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them
CONSTRUCTION
or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss
or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be
The American Institute
of Architects
m1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would
otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Paragraph 3.18.
3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Paragraph 3.18 by an
employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or
anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Subparagraph
3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or
benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers' compensation acts,
disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts.
ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
4.1 ARCHITECT
4.1.1 The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully
practicing architecture identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the
Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Architect" means the Architect or the
Architect's authorized representative.
4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the
Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the
Owner, Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld.
4.1.3 If the employment of the Architect is terminated, the Owner shall employ a new Architect
against whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract
Documents shall be that of the former Architect.
4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract
Documents, and will be an Owner's representative (1) during construction, (2) until final payment
is due and (3) with the Owner's concurrence, from time to time during the one-year period for
correction of Work described in Paragraph 12.2. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf
of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified
in writing in accordance with other provisions of the Contract.
4.2.2 The Architect, as a representative of the Owner, will visit the site at intervals appropriate
to the stage of the Contractor's operations (1) to become generally familiar with and to keep the
Owner informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, (2) to
endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work, and (3) to determine in
general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when fully
completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not
be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or
quantity of the Work. The Architect will neither have control over or charge of, nor be
(ll) responsible for, the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for the
safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the
o, o Contractor's rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents, except as provided in
c�Oo: Subparagraph 3.3.1.
0 1 9 9 7 AIAO 4.2.3 The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Work in
AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have
GENERAL CONDITIONS control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor,
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
CONSTRUCTION Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions
of the Work.
The American Institute
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
4.2.4 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration. Except as otherwise provided in
the Contract Documents or when direct coinmunications have been specially authorized, the
Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communicate with each other through the Architect
about matters arising out of or relating to the Contract. Communications by and with the
Architect's consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with
Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and
with separate contractors shall be through the Owner.
4.2.5 Based on the Architect's evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the
Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for
Payment in such amounts.
4.2.6 The Architect will have authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract
Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable, the Architect will have
authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Subparagraphs 13.5.2 and
13.5.3, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this
authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise
such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor,
Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons or
entities performing portions of the Work.
4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the
Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the
limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept
expressed in the Contract Documents. The Architect's action will betaken with such reasonable
promptness as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner, Contractor or
separate contractors, while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional judgment to
permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of
determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or
for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of
which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The
Architect's review of the Contractor's submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations
under Paragraphs 3.3, 3.5 and 3.12. The Architect's review shall not constitute approval of safety
precautions or, unless otherwise specifically stated by the Architect, of any construction means,
methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. The Architect's approval of a specific item shall
not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component.
4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may
authorize minor changes in the Work as provided in Paragraph 7.4.
4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial
Completion and the date of final completion, will receive and forward to the Owner, for the
Owner's review and records, written warranties and related documents required by the Contract IIII
and assembled by the Contractor, and will issue a final Certificate for Payment upon compliance
with the requirements of the Contract Documents. o a
o. .o
4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more project
representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site. The duties, O 1997 AIA®
responsibilities and limitations of authority of such project representatives shall be as set forth in AIA DOCUMENT 97
GENERAL CONDITIONSITIONS
an exhibit to be incorporated in the Contract Documents. OF THE CONTRACT FOR
CONSTRUCTION
4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under, and
The American Institute
requirements of, the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
The Architect's response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed
upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. If no agreement is made concerning the time
within which interpretations required of the Architect shall be furnished in compliance with this
Paragraph 4.2, then delay shall not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to furnish
such interpretations until 15 days after written request is made for them.
4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and
reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of
drawings. When making such interpretations and initial decisions, the Architect will endeavor to
secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either and
will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions so rendered in good faith.
4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent
with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents.
4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES
4.3.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of
right, adjustment or interpretation of Contract terms, payment of money, extension of time or
other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term "Claim" also includes other
disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to
the Contract. Claims must be initiated by written notice. The responsibility to substantiate Claims
shall rest with the party making the Claim.
4.3.2 Time Limits on Claims. Claims by either party must be initiated within 21 days after
occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first
recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later. Claims must be initiated by
written notice to the Architect and the other party.
4.3.3 Continuing Contract Performance. Pending final resolution of a Claim except as
otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Subparagraph 9.7.1 and Article 14, the Contractor
shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make
payments in accordance with the Contract Documents.
4.3.4 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If conditions are encountered at the site
which are (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materially from
those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual
nature, which differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as
inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, then
notice by the observing party shall be given to the other party promptly before conditions are
disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after first observance of the conditions. The Architect
will promptly investigate such conditions and, if they differ materially and cause an increase or
decrease in the Contractor's cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work,
jlll
will recommend an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the
Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those
0 o
indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified,
oa.00
the Architect shall so notify the Owner and Contractor in writing, stating the reasons. Claims by
r ---- —1
either party in opposition to such determination must be made within 21 days after the Architect
0 1997 AIAO
has given notice of the decision. If the conditions encountered are materially different, the
AIA DOCUMENT A2014997
Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be equitably adjusted, but if the Owner and Contractor
GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
cannot agree on an adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, the adjustment shall be
CONSTRUCTION
referred to the Architect for initial determination, subject to further proceedings pursuant to
Paragraph 4.4.
The American Institute
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
4.3.5 Claims for Additional Cost. If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the
Contract Sum, written notice as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute the
Work. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or
Property arising under Paragraph 10.6.
4.3.6 If the Contractor believes additional cost is involved for reasons including but not limited
to (i) a written interpretation from the Architect, (2) an order by the Owner to stop the Work
where the Contractor was not at fault, (3) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued
by the Architect, (4) failure of payment by the Owner, (5) termination of the Contract by the
Owner, (6) Owner's suspension or (7) other reasonable grounds, Claim shall be filed in
accordance with this Paragraph 4.3.
4.3.7 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL TIME
4.3.7.1 if the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, written
notice as provided herein shall be given. The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of cost
and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work. In the case of a continuing delay only one
Claim is necessary.
4.3.7.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim
shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the
period of time, could not have been reasonably anticipated and had an adverse effect on the
scheduled construction.
4.3.8 Injury or Damage to Person or Property. If either party to the Contract suffers injury or
damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party, or of others for
whose acts such party is legally responsible, written notice of such injury or damage, whether or
not insured, shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after
discovery. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the
matter.
4.3.9 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if
quantities originally contemplated are materially changed in a proposed Change Order or
Construction Change Directive so that application of such unit prices to quantities of Work
proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices
shall be equitably adjusted.
4.3.10 Claims for Consequential Damages. The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against
each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract. This mutual
waiver includes:
.1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit,
financing, business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee
productivity or of the services of such persons; and
.2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the
compensation of personnel stationed there, for losses of financing, business and repu-
tation, and for loss of profit except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work.
This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation, to all consequential damages due to either
party's termination in accordance with Article 14. Nothing contained in this Subparagraph 4.3.10
shall be deemed to preclude an award of liquidated direct damages, when applicable, in
accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
4.4 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES
4.4.1 Decision of Architect. Claims, including those alleging an error or omission by the
Architect but excluding those arising under Paragraphs 10.3 through io.5, shall be referred
initially to the Architect for decision. An initial decision by the Architect shall be required as a
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
M__
®1997 AIA®
AIA DOCUMENT A201.1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
CONSTRUCTION
The American Institute
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
■
condition precedent to mediation, arbitration or litigation of all Claims between the Contractor
and Owner arising prior to the date final payment is due, unless 3o days have passed after the
Claim has been referred to the Architect with no decision having been rendered by the Architect.
The Architect will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than
the Owner.
4.4.2 The Architect will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of the Claim take one
or more of the following actions: (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant or a
response with supporting data from the other party, (z) reject the Claim in whole or in part, (3)
approve the Claim, (4) suggest a compromise, or (5) advise the parties that the Architect is unable
to resolve the Claim if the Architect lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the
Claim or if the Architect concludes that, in the Architect's sole discretion, it would be
inappropriate for the Architect to resolve the Claim.
4.4.3 In evaluating Claims, the Architect may, but shall not be obligated to, consult with or seek
information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may
assist the Architect in rendering a decision. The Architect may request the Owner to authorize
retention of such persons at the Owner's expense.
4.4.4 If the Architect requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional
supporting data, such party shall respond, within ten days after receipt of such request, and shall
either provide a response on the requested supporting data, advise the Architect when the
response or supporting data will be furnished or advise the Architect that no supporting data will
be furnished. Upon receipt of the response or supporting data, if any, the Architect will either
reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part.
4.4.5 The Architect will approve or reject Claims by written decision, which shall state the rea-
sons therefor and which shall notify the parties of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract
Time or both. The approval or rejection of a Claim by the Architect shall be final and binding on
the parties but subject to mediation and arbitration.
4.4.6 When a written decision of the Architect states that (1) the decision is final but subject to
mediation and arbitration and (2) a demand for arbitration of a Claim covered by such decision
must be made within 3o days after the date on which the party making the demand receives the
final written decision, then failure to demand arbitration within said 3o days' period shall result
in the Architect's decision becoming final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor. If the
Architect renders a decision after arbitration proceedings have been initiated, such decision may
be entered as evidence, but shall not supersede arbitration proceedings unless the decision is
acceptable to all parties concerned.
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
4.4.7 Upon receipt of a Claim against the Contractor or at any time thereafter, the Architect or
the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if any, of the nature and amount of the
Claim. If the Claint relates to a possibility of a Contractor's default, the Architect or the Owner
but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety's assistance in resolving the
gmay,
controversy.
O
4.4.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic's lien, the party asserting such Claim
may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines
®1997 AIA®
AIA DOCUMENT A201.1997
prior to resolution of the Claim by the Architect, by mediation or by arbitration.
GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
4.5 MEDIATION
CONSTRUCTION
4.5.1 Any Claim arising out of or related to the Contract, except Claims relating to aesthetic
The American Institute
effect and except those waived as provided for in Subparagraphs .}.;.to. 9.10.4 and 9.10.5 shall, after
of Architects
initial decision by the Architect or 3o days after submission of the Claim to the Architect, be
1735 New York Avenue,N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
subject to mediation as a condition precedent to arbitration or the institution of legal or equitable
proceedings by either party.
4.5.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which, unless the parties
mutually agree otherwise, shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Mediation Rules
of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect. Request for mediation shall be filed
in writing with the other party to the Contract and with the American Arbitration Association.
The request may be made concurrently with the filing of a demand for arbitration but, in such
event, mediation shall proceed in advance of arbitration or legal or equitable proceedings, which
shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 6o days from the date of filing, unless stayed for
a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order.
4.5.3 The parties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally. The mediation shall
be held in the place where the Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon.
Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court
having jurisdiction thereof.
4.6 ARBITRATION
4.6.1 Any Claim arising out of or related to the Contract, except Claims relating to aesthetic
effect and except those waived as provided for in Subparagraphs 4.3.10, 9.10.4 and 9.10.5, shall, after
decision by the Architect or 3o days after submission of the Claim to the Architect, be subject to
arbitration. Prior to arbitration, the parties shall endeavor to resolve disputes by mediation in
accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 4.5•
4.6.2 Claims not resolved by mediation shall be decided by arbitration which, unless the parties
mutually agree otherwise, shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration
Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect. The demand for arbitration
shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract and with the American Arbitration
Association, and a copy shall be filed with the Architect.
4.6.3 A demand for arbitration shall be made within the time limits specified in Subparagraphs
4.4.6 and 4.6.1 as applicable, and in other cases within a reasonable time after the Claim has arisen,
and in no event shall it be made after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings
based on such Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations as determined
pursuant to Paragraph 13.7.
4.6.4 Limitation on Consolidation or joinder. No arbitration arising out of or relating to the
Contract shall include, by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner, the Architect, the
Architect's employees or consultants, except by written consent containing specific reference to
the Agreement and signed by the Architect, Owner, Contractor and any other person or entity
sought to be joined. No arbitration shall include, by consolidation or joinder or in any other
manner, parties other than the Owner, Contractor, a separate contractor as described in Article 6
and other persons substantially involved in a common question of fact or law whose presence is
required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration. No person or entity other than the
Owner, Contractor or a separate contractor as described in Article 6 shall be included as an
original third party or additional third party to an arbitration whose interest or responsibility is
insubstantial. Consent to arbitration involving an additional person or entity shall not constitute
consent to arbitration of a Claim not described therein or with a person or entity not named or
described therein. The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an
additional person or entity duly consented to by parties to the Agreement shall be specifically
enforceable under applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof.
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
®199] AIA®
AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
CONSTRUCTION
The American Institute
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
4.6.5 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims. The party filing a notice of demand for
arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitration
is permitted to be demanded.
4.6.6 Judgment on Final Award. The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be
final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court
having jurisdiction thereof.
ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS
5.1 DEFINITIONS
5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to
perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Subcontractor" is referred to throughout the
Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized
representative of the Subcontractor. The term "Subcontractor' does not include a separate
contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor.
5.1.2 A Sub -subcontractor is a person or entity who has a d� �R,.^ direct contract with a
Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Sub -subcontractor" is
referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a
Sub -subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub -subcontractor.
5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK
5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the
Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the
Owner through the Architect the names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish
materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each principal portion of the
Work. The Architect will promptly reply to the Contractor in writing stating whether or not the
Owner or the Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any such proposed
person or entity. Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no
reasonable objection.
5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whotn the Owner
or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be required to
contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection.
5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the
Contractor, the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no
reasonable objection. If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of
performing the Work, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be increased or decreased by the
difference, if any, occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued
before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor's Work. However, no increase in the
Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted
promptly and responsively in submitting names as required.
:.c 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not change a Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected if the
o Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitute.
01997 AIA®
AIA DOCUMENT A201.1997
5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
5.3.1 By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor shall
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
q each re quire h Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be
CONSTRUCTION
bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the
The American Institute
Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
Subcontractor's \Mork, which the Contractor, by these Documents, assumes toward the Owner and
Architect. Fath subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and
.Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the
Suhcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the
Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of
all rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract
Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each
Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub -subcontractors. The Contractor shall
make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agree-
ment, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon
written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the
proposed subcontract agreement which may be at variance with the Contract Documents.
Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to
their respective proposed Sub -subcontractors.
5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS
5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the
Owner provided that:
.1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause
pursuant to Paragraph 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements which the Owner
accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor in writing; and
.2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under bond
relating to the Contract.
5.4.2 Upon such assignment, if the Work has been suspended for more than 3o days, the
Subcontractor's compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the
suspension.
ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS
6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS
6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project
with the Owner's- own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions
of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract
identical or substantially similar to these including those portions related to insurance and
waiver of subrogation. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of
such action by the Owner, the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided in Paragraph 4.3.
6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other
construction or operations on the site, the term "Contractor" in the Contract Documents in each
case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner -Contractor Agreement.
6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner's own forces and
of each separate contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. The Ilj�
Contractor shall participate with other separate contractors and the Owner in reviewing their
construction schedules when directed to do so. The Contractor shall make any revisions to the 'dao
construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The 0
construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor, separate 0 19 97 A I A
contractors and the Owner until subsequently revised. AIA DOCUMENT A2014997
GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
6.1.4 Llnless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs CONSTRUCTION
construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, the Owner shall be
deemed to be subject to the same obligations and to have the same rights which apply to the The American Institute
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
Contractor under the Conditions of the Contract, including, without excluding others, those
stated in Article 3, this Article 6 and Articles to, it and 12.
6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY
6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity
for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their
activities, and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's construction and operations with
theirs as required by the Contract Documents.
6.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon
construction or operations by the Owner or a separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to
proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to the Architect apparent
discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable for such
proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an
acknowledgment that the Owner's or separate contractor's completed or partially completed
construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work, except as to defects not then
reasonably discoverable.
6.2.3 The Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for costs incurred by the Owner which
are payable to a separate contractor because of delays, improperly timed activities or defective
construction of the Contractor. The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs
incurred by the Contractor because of delays, improperly limed activities, damage to the Work or
defective construction of a separate contractor.
6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage wrongfully caused by the Contractor to
completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate
contractors as provided in Subparagraph 10.2.5.
6.2.5 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting
and patching as are described for the Contractor in Subparagraph 3.14.
6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP
6.3.1 If a dispute arises among the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner as to the
responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area
free from waste materials and rubbish, the Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the
cost among those responsible.
ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK
7.1 GENERAL
7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without
invalidating the Contract, by Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor
change in the Work, subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract
jlj�
Documents.
o0r. 5,
7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor and
o
Architect; a Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and
may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor; an order for a minor change in the Work may be
0 1 9 9 r AIAO
AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997
issued by the Architect alone.
GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract
CONSTRUCTION
Documents, and the Contractor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the Change
The American Institute
Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work.
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
7.2 CHANGE ORDERS
7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the
Owner, Contractor and Architect, stating their agreement upon all of the following:
.1 change in the Work;
.2 the amount of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum; and
.3 the extent of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Time.
7.2.2 Methods usedin determining adjustments to the Contract Sum may include those listed
in Subparagraph 7.3.3.
7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES
7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed
by the Owner and Architect, directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment, if
any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change
Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work within the general scope
of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and
Contract Time being adjusted accordingly.
7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the
terms of a Change Order.
7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the
adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods:
.t mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient
substantiating data to permit evaluation;
.2 unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon;
.3 cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually
acceptable fixed or percentage fee; or
.4 as provided in Subparagraph 7.3.6.
7.3.4 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed
with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's agreement or
disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for
determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time.
7.3.5 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the agreement of the
Contractor therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method
for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a
Change Order.
7.3.6 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment
in the Contract Sum, the method and the adjustment shall be determined by the Architect on the
basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the
change, including, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, a reasonable allowance for overhead
and profit. In such case, and also under Clause 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shall keep and present, in
such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate
supporting data. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of
this Subparagraph 7.3.6 shall be limited to the following:
.1 costs of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance, fringe
benefits required by agreement or custom, and workers' compensation insurance;
.2 costs of materials, supplies and equipment, including cost of transportation, whether
incorporated or consumed;
.3 rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from
the Contractor or others;
NARNIN(i: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
01997 AIA®
AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
CONSTRUCTION
The American Institute
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and sales, use or similar
taxes related to the Work; and
additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the
change. j
7.3.7. The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or
change which results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed
by the Architect. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are
involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net
increase, if any, with respect to that change.
7.3.8 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the
Owner, amounts not in dispute for such changes in the Work shall be included in Applications for
Payment accompanied by a Change Order indicating the parties' agreement with part or all of
such costs. For any portion of such cost that remains in dispute, the Architect will make an
interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs. That
determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Change Order, subject
to the right of either party to disagree and assert a claim in accordance with .Article 4.
7.3.9 When the Owner and Contractor agree with the determination made by the Architect
concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach
agreement upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be
recorded by preparation and execution of an appropriate Change Order.
7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
7.4.1 The Architect will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjust-
ment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent
of the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be effected by written order and shall be binding
on the Owner and Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out such written orders promptly.
ARTICLE 8 TIME
8.1 DEFINITIONS
8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized
adjustments, allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work.
8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement.
8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance
with Paragraph 9.8.
8.1.4 The term "day' as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless
otherwise specifically defined.
ll�l
8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION
8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By j
o. o'
executing the Agreement the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period
00.�o
�
for performing the Work. I
01997 AIA®
AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997
!
8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in
GENERAL CONDITIONS
writing, prematurely commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
insurance required by Article it to be furnished by the Contractor and Owner. The date of
CONSTRUCTION
commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the effective date of such insurance. Unless
The American Institute
the date of commencement is established by the Contract Documents or a notice to proceed given
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue,N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
by the Owner, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing not less than five days or other
agreed period before commencing the Work to permit the timely filing of morgages, mechanic's
liens and other security interests.
8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve
Substantial Completion within the Contract Time.
8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME
8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by
an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, or of an employee of either, or of a separate contractor
employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes, fire, unusual
delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by
delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and arbitration, or by other causes which the
Architect determines may justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order
for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine.
8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of
Paragraph 4.3.
8.3.3 This Paragraph 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under
otherprovisions of the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
9.1 CONTRACT SUM
9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the
total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the
Contract Documents.
9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
9.2.1 Before the first Application for Payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect a
schedule of values allocated to various portions of the Work, prepared in such form and
supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule,
unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's
Applications for Payment.
9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor
shall submit to the .Architect an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in
accordance with the schedule of values. Such application shall be notarized, if required, and
supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner or
Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers,
and reflecting retainage if provided for in the Contract Documents.
9.3.1.1 As provided in Subparagraph 7.3.8, such applications may include requests for payment on
account of changes in the Work which have been properly authorized by Construction Change
Directives, or by interim determinations of the Architect, but not yet included in Change Orders.
9.3.1.2 Such applications may not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for
which the Contractor does not intend to pay to a Subcontractor or material supplier, unless such
Work has been performed by others whom the Contractor intends to pay.
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
01997 AIA®
AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
CONSTRUCTION
The American Institute
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on
account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent
incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may similarly be made
for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing.
Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon com-
pliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title
to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest, and shall include the
costs of applicable insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such materials and
equipment stored off the site.
9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will
pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon
submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been
previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor's
knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests or encum-
brances in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, material suppliers, or other persons or entities
making a claim by reason of having provided labor, materials and equipment relating to the Work.
9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT
9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for
Payment, either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor, for
such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in
writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in
Subparagraph 9.5.1.
9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect
to the Owner, based on the Architect's evaluation of the Work and the data comprising the
Application for Payment, that the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that, to the best
of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief, the quality of the Work is in accordance with
the Contract Documents. The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work
for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of
subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents
prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. The issuance of a
Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to
payment in the amount certified. However, the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be
a representation that the Architect has (t) made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to
check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques,
sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and
material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to
payment, or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used
money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum.
9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION
9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent
reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the
�• v Owner required by Subparagraph 9.4.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is unable to certify
0o payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as
® provided in Subparagraph 9.4.1. If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount,
AIA DOCUMENT
AIA®
A201.1997 the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect
GENERAL CONDITIONS is able to make such representations to the Owner. The Architect may also withhold a Certificate
OF THE CONTRACT FOR for Pavlttent or, because of subsequently discovered evidence, may nullify the whole or a part of a
CONSTRUCTION Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect's
The American Institute
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
opinion to protea the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible, including loss
resulting liom acts and emissions described in Subparagraph 3.3.2, because of:
.1 defective Work not remedied;
.2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims
unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor;
.3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor,
materials or equipment;
.4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the
Contract Sum;
.5 damage to the Owner or another contractor;
.6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and
that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages
for the anticipated delay; or
.7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be
made for amounts previously withheld.
9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS
9.6.1 .after the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in
the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the
Architect.
9.6.2 The Contractor shall promptly,pay each Subcontractor, upon receipt of payment from the
Owner, out of the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's
portion of the Work, the amount to which said Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages
actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of
the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each
Subcontractor to make payments to Sub -subcontractors in a similar manner.
9.6.3 The Architect will, On request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable, information
regarding percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken
thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such
Subcontractor.
9.6.4 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment
of money to a Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law.
9.6.5 Payment to material suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in
Subparagraphs 9.6.2, 9.6.3 and 9.6.4.
9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the
Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents.
155, 9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of
the Contract Sum, payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by 17�_
Subcontractors and suppliers shall be held by the Contractor for those Subcontractors or 01997 AIA®
suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials, or both, under contract with the AIA DOCUMENT A201.1997
Contractor for which payment was made b the Owner. Nothing contained herein shall require GENERAL CONDITIONS
l y y g q OF THE CONTRACT FOR
money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor, CONSTRUCTION
shall create any fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust
or shall entitle inThe American Institute
y person or entity to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for of Architects
breach of the requirements of this provision. 1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5297
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT
9.7.1 If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the
Contractor, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, or if the
Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the Contract
Documents the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by arbitration, then the Contractor
may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and Architect, stop the Work until
payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended appropri-
ately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs
of shut -down, delay and start-up, plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents.
9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or
designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents
so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use.
9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner
agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to
the Architect a -comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment.
Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to
complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor's list, the Architect will make an inspection to determine
whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect's
inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor's list, which is not
sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy
or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use, the Contractor shall, before
issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such item upon
notification by the Architect. In such case, the Contractor shall then submit a request for another
inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion.
9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will
prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Substantial
Completion, shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security,
maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and shall fix the time within
which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accomparring the Certificate. Warranties
required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of
the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial
Completion.
9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and
Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate.
Upon such acceptance and consent of surety, if any, the Owner shall make payment of retainage
applying to such Work or designated portion thereof. Such payment shall be adjusted for Work
that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
0 0
'oo.ap.00' 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE
0 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work
0 1 9 9 7 A I A ® at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor,
AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer as required under Clause 11.4.1.5 and
GENERAL CONDITIONS authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. Such partial occupancy or use
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
CONSTRUCTION may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and
Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments,
The American Institute retainage, if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of
warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion
substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as
provided under Subparagraph 9.5.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall
not be unreasonably withheld. 'file stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by
written agreement between the Owner and Contractor or, if no agreement is reached, by decision
of the Architect.
9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contractor and Architect
shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to
determine and record the condition of the Work.
9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the
Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the
Contract Documents.
9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT
9.10.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance
and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such
inspection and, when the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and
the Contract fully performed, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment
stating that to the best of the ,Architect's knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of
the Architect's on-site visits and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with
terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the
Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect's final Certificate
for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Subparagraph 9.10.2
as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled.
9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the
Contractor submits to the .Architect (I) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and
equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's
property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have been paid
or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract
Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be canceled
or allowed to expire until at least 3o days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner, (3) a
written statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not
be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents, (q) consent of surety, if any,
to final payment and (5), if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or
satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens, claims, security interests
or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be
designated by the Owner. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the
Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner
against such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall
refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien,
including all costs and reasonable attorneys' fees.
9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed
through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion,
and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certifi-
cation by the Architect, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due
for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not
fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and if
bonds have been furnished, the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that
NARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
01997 AIA®
AIA DOCUMENT A201.1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
CONSTRUCTION
The American Institute
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the
Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and
conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims.
9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except
those arising from:
.1 liens, Claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and
unsettled;
.2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; or
terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents.
9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor or material supplier shall
constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified
by that payee as unsettled at the time of Final Application for Pavment.
ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS
10.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety
precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract.
10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide
reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to:
.t employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby;
.2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage
on or off the site, under care, custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor's
Subcontractors or Sub -subcontractors; and
.3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks,
pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or
replacement in the course of construction.
10.2.2 The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules,
regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or
their protection from damage, injury or loss.
10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and
performance of the Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting
danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying
owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities.
10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual
methods are necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and
carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel.
10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss
'o. o
insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in
Clauses 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a
0
Sub -subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for
® AIA®
AIA DOCUMENT A2014997
whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Clauses 10.2.1.2
GENERAL CONDITIONS
and 10.2.1.3, except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of
CONSTRUCTION
them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The
The American Institute
foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's obligations under
of Architects
Paragraph 3.18.
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
I
10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's organization at
the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's
superintendent unless othenvise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and
Architect.
10.2.7 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded
so as to endanger its safety.
10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
10.3.1 If reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death
to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or
polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall,
upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and report the
condition to the Owner and Architect in writing.
10.3.2 The Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or
absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such material
or substance is found to be present, to verify that it has been rendered harmless. Unless othenvise
required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and
Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying
the presence or absence of such material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal
or safe containment of such material or substance. The Contractor and the Architect will
promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to
the persons or entities proposed by the Owner. If either the Contractor or Architect has an
objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner, the Owner shall propose another to whom
the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection. When the material or substance
has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the
Owner and Contractor. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum
shall be increased in the amount of the Contractor's reasonable additional costs of shut -down,
delay and start-up, which adjustments shall be accomplished as provided in Article 7.
10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall inderri and hold harmless the
Contractor, Subcontractors, Architect, Architect's consultants and agents and employees of any of
them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attor-
neys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact
j
the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in Subparagraph
10.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is
attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible
property (other than the Work itself) and provided that such damage, loss or expense is not due
to the sole negligence of a party seeking indemnity.
i
10.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under Paragraph 10.3 for materials and substances
brought to the site by the Contractor unless such materials or substances were required by the
Contract Documents.I10.5
la,
If, without negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor is held liable for the
cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as
r____1
required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall indemnify the Contractor for all cost and
® 19 9 r A I A
expense thereby incurred.
AIA DOCUMENT A201.1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
10.6 EMERGENCIES
CONSTRUCTION
10.6.1 In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the
Contractor's disartion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Additional compensatior
The American Instituteon
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as
provided in Paragraph 4.3 and Article 7.
ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS
11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE
11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully
authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will
protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the
Contractor's operations under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable,
whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or
indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable:
.1 claims under workers' compensation, disability benefit and other similar employee
benefit acts which are applicable to the Work to be performed;
.2 Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death
of the Contractor's employees;
.3 claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person
other than the Contractor's employees;
.4 claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage;
.5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of
tangible property, including loss of use resulting therefrom;
.6 claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or property damage
arising out of ownership, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle;
.7 claims for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations; and
.a claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor's
obligations under Paragraph 3.18.
11.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph 1u.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of
liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is greater.
Coverages, whether written on an occurrence or claims -made basis, shall be maintained without
interruption from date of commencement of the Work until date of final payment and
termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment.
11.1.3 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to
commencement of the Work. These certificates and the insurance policies required by this
Paragraph u.1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be
canceled or allowed to expire until at least 3o days' prior written notice has been given to the
Owner. If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are required to remain in force after final
payment and are reasonably available, an additional certificate evidencing continuation of such
coverage shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Subparagraph
9.10.2. Information concerning reduction of coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid
under the General Aggregate, or both, shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable
promptness in accordance with the Contractor's information and belief.
c jljl v
11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE
11.2.1 The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner's usual
o liability insurance.
®1997 AIA®
AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997 11,3 PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE
GENERAL CONDITIONS 11.3.1 Optionally, the Owner may require the Contractor to purchase and maintain Project
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
CONSTRUCTION Management Prolective Liability insurance from the Contractors usual sources as primary
coverage for the Owner's, Contractors and Architect's vicarious liability for construction
The American Institute operations under the Contract. Lhiless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue,N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
shall reimburse the Contractor by increasing the Contract Sum to pay the cost of purchasing and
maintaining such optional insurance coverage, and the Contractor shall not be responsible for
purchasing any other liability insurance on behalf of the Owner. The minimum limits of
liability purchased with such coverage shall be equal to the aggregate of the limits required for
Contractor's Liability Insurance under Clauses 11.1.1.2 through 11.1.1.5.
11.3.2 To the extent damages are covered by Project Nlanagement Protective Liability insurance,
the Owner, Contractor and Architect waive all rights against each other for damages, except such
rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance. The policy shall provide for such
waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise.
11.3.3 The Owner shall not require the Contractor to include the Owner, Architect or other
persons or entities as additional insureds on the Contractor's Liability Insurance coverage under
Paragraph 11.1.
11.4 PROPERTY INSURANCE
11.4.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or
companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located,
property insurance written on a builder's risk "all-risk" or equivalent policy form in the amount
of the initial Contract Sum, plus value of subsequent Contract modifications and cost of
materials supplied or installed by others, comprising total value for the entire Project at the site
on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles. Such property insurance shall be
maintained, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing
by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment has been
made as provided in Paragraph 9.Io or until no person or entity other than the Owner has an
insurable interest in the property required by this Paragraph 11.4 to be covered, whichever is later.
This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and
Sub -subcontractors in the Project.
11.4.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an "all-risk" or equivalent policy form and shall include,
without limitation, insurance against the perils of fire (with extended coverage) and physical loss
or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief,
collapse, earthquake, flood, windstorm, falsework, testing and startup, temporary buildings and
debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal
requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect's and Contractor's services
and expenses required as a result of such insured loss.
11.4.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such property insurance required by the
Contract and with all of the coverages in the amount described above, the Owner shall so inform
the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. The Contractor may then effect
insurance which will protect the interests of the Contractor, Subcontractors and
Sub -subcontractors in the Work, and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof shall be
charged to the Owner. If the Contractor is damaged by the failure of neglect of the Owner to
purchase or maintain insurance as described above, without so notihing the Contractor in
writing, then the Owner shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto.
11.4.1.3 If the property insurance requires deductibles, the Owner shall pay costs not covered
because of such deductibles.
11.4.1.4 This property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site, and also
portions of the Work in transit.
11.4.1.5 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Paragraph 9.9 shall not commence until the
insurance company or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
01997 AIA®
AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
CONSTRUCTION
The American Institute
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
occupancy or use by endorsement or otherwise. The Owner and the Contractor shall take
reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or companies and shall, without
mutual written consent, take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use that would cause
cancellation, lapse or reduction of insurance.
11.4.2 Boiler and Machinery Insurance. The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and
machinery insurance required by the Contract Documents or by law, which shall specifically cover
such insured objects during installation and until final acceptance by the Owner; this insurance
shall include interests of the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub -subcontractors in the
Work, and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds.
11.4.3 Loss of Use Insurance. The Owner, at the Owner's option, may purchase and maintain
such insurance as will insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property due to fire or
other hazards, however caused. The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor for
loss of use of the Owner's property, including consequential losses due to fire or other hazards
however caused.
11.4.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described
herein or other special causes of loss be included in the property insurance policy, the Owner
shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor
by appropriate Change Order.
11.4.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties, real or personal or
both, at or adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring
the Project, or if after final payment property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project
through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Project during the construction period,
the Owner shall waive all rights in accordance with the terms of Subparagraph 11.4.7 for damages
caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance. All separate
policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise.
11.4.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Owner shall file with the Contractor a copy of
each policy that includes insurance coverages required by this Paragraph 11.4. Each policy shall
contain all generally applicable conditions, definitions, exclusions and endorsements related to
this Project. Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled or allowed
to expire, and that its limits will not be reduced, until at least 3o days' prior written notice has been
given to the Contractor.
11.4.7 Waivers of Subrogation. The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (t) each other
and any of their subcontractors, sub -subcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other, and
(2) the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and
any of their subcontractors, sub -subcontractors, agents and employees, for damages caused by fire
or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this
Paragraph 11.4 or other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they have
to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as Fiduciary. The Owner or Contractor, as
appropriate, shall require of the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate contractors described
�. in Article 6, if any, and the subcontractors, sub -subcontractors, agents and employees of any of
a� them, by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, similar waivers each
in favor of other parties enumerated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of
0 19 97 AIA®
AfA DOCUMENT A201-1997 subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a
GENERAL CONDITIONS person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnifica-
OF THE CONTRACT FOR tion, contractual or otherwise, did not pay the Insurance premium directly or indirectly, and
CONSTRUCTION whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged.
The American Institute
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
11.4.8 A loss insured under Owner's property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as
fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may
appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Subparagraph 11.4.10.
The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the
Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, shall
require Subcontractors to make payments to their Sub -subcontractors in similar manner.
11.4.9 If required in writing by a party in interest, the Owner as fiduciary shall, upon occurrence
of an insured loss, give bond for proper performance of the Owner's duties. The cost of required
bonds shall be charged against proceeds received as fiduciary. The Owner shall deposit in a
separate account proceeds so received, which the Owner shall distribute in accordance with such
agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or in accordance with an arbitration award in
which case the procedure shall be as provided in Paragraph 4.6. If after such loss no other special
agreement is made and unless the Owner terminates the Contract for convenience, replacement
of damaged property shall be performed by the Contractor after notification of a Change in the
Work in accordance with Article 7.
11.4.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless one
of the parties in interest shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss to the
Owner's exercise of this power; if such objection is made, the dispute shall be resolved as
provided in Paragraphs 4.5 and 4.6. The Owner as fiduciary shall, in the case of arbitration, make
settlement with insurers in accordance with directions of the arbitrators. If distribution of
insurance proceeds by arbitration is required, the arbitrators will direct such distribution.
11.5 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND
11.5.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering
faithful performance of the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipulated
in bidding requirements or specifically required in the Contract Documents on the date of
execution of the Contract.
11.5.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds
covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly
furnish a copy of the bonds or shall permit a copy to be made.
ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK
12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect's request or to requirements
specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if required in writing by the Architect,
be uncovered for the Architect's examination and be replaced at the Contractor's expense without
change in the Contract Time.
12.1.2 if a portion of the Work has been covered which the Architect has not specifically
requested to examine prior to its being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and
it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract
Documents, costs of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, be at the
Owner's expense. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, correction
shall be at the Contractor's expense unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate
contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs.
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
01997 AIA®
AIA DOCUMENT A2014997
GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
CONSTRUCTION
The American Institute
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK
12.2.1 BEFORE OR AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
12.2.1.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform
to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether discovered before or after Substantial
Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such
rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections and compensation for the Architect's
services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the Contractor's expense.
12.2.2 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.5, if, within one year after the
date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for
commencement of warranties established under Subparagraph 9.9.1, or by terms of an applicable
special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in
accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it
promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has
previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give
such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the one-year period for correction
of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to
make the correction, the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to
make a claim for breach of warranty. If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work
within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect,
the Owner may correct it in accordance with Paragraph 2.4.
12.2.2.2The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of
Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial
Completion and the actual performance of the Work.
12.2.2.3The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work
performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Paragraph 12.2.
12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work which are not in
accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the
Contractor nor accepted by the Owner.
12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction,
whether completed or partially completed, of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the
Contractor's correction or removal of Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of
the Contract Documents.
12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Paragraph 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of
limitation with respect to other obligations which the Contractor might have under the Contract
Documents. Establishment of the one-year period for correction of Work as described in
ocewr
Subparagraph 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work,
and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract
Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be
commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Contractor's obligations
1-1 other than specifically to correct the Work.
01997 AIA®
AIA DOCUMENT A2014997
123 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK
GENERAL CONDITIONS
123.1 If the Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
CONSTRUCTION
the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so instead of requiring its renhohat and correction,
in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment
The American Institute
shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made.
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
1
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
13.1 GOVERNING LAW
13.1.1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located.
13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS
13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns
and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to partners, successors, assigns and legal
representatives of such other party in respect to covenants, agreements and obligations contained
in the Contract Documents. Except as provided in Subparagraph 13.2.2, neither party to the
Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other. If either party
attempts to make such an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain
legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract.
13.2.2 The Owner may, without consent of the Contractor, assign the Contract to an
institutional lender providing construction financing for the Project. In such event, the lender
shall assume the Owner's rights and obligations under the Contract Documents. The Contractor
shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate such assignment.
13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE
13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the
individual or a member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was
intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail to the last business address known
to the party giving notice.
13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES
13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies
available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights and
remedies otherwise imposed or available by law.
13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver
of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act
constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed
in writing.
13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
13.5.1 'rests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract
Documents or by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities having
jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall
make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing
laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall
bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect
timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may
be present for such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections or approvals
which do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded.
1.,
13.5.2 If the Architect, Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions
,
o
of the Work require additional testing, inspection or approval not included under Subparagraph
o
135.1, the Architect will, upon written authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to
® 19 97 A I A
make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to
AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997
the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests
GENERAL CONDITIONS
and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. Such
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
CONSTRUCTION
costs, except as provided in Subparagraph 13.5.3, shall be at the Owner's expense.
The American Institute
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
13.5.3 If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval under Subparagraphs 13.5.1 and 13.5.2
reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the
Contract Documents, all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated
procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses shall be at the Contractor's
expense.
13.5.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall, unless otherwise required by
the Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect.
13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections or approvals required by the Contract
Documents, the Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place
of testing.
13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made
promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work.
13.6 INTEREST
13.6.1 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date
payment is due at such rate as the parties may agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof, at
the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located.
13.7 COMMENCEMENT Of STATUTORY LIMITATION PERIOD
13.7.1 As between the Owner and Contractor:
Before Substantial Completion. As to acts or failures to act occurring prior to the
relevant date of Substantial Completion, any applicable statute of limitations shall
commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in
any and all events not later than such date of Substantial Completion;
Between Substantial Completion and Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or
failures to act occurring subsequent to the relevant date of Substantial Completion and
prior to issuance of the final Certificate for Payment, any applicable statute of
limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to
have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of issuance of the final
Certificate for Payment; and
After Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring after the
relevant date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment, any applicable statute of
limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to
have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of any act or failure to act by
the Contractor pursuant to any Warranty provided under Paragraph 3.5, the date of any
correction of the Work or failure to correct the Work by the Contractor under Paragraph
12.2, or the date of actual commission of any other act or failure to perform any duty or
obligation by the Contractor or Owner, whichever occurs last.
ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT
c v 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR
oQ..Do 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 con-
n secutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub -subcontractor or
0 199r AIAO their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under
AIA DOCUMENT A2014997 direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, for any of the following reasons:
GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE CONTRACT FOR .1 issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction which
CONSTRUCTION requires all Work to be stopped;
.2 an act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency which requires all
The American Institute
of Architects Work to be stopped;
1735 New York Avenue,N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the
C011traetOr of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Subparagraph
9.4.1, or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within
the time staled in the Contract Documents; or
the Owner has Failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly, upon the Contractor's
request, reasonable evidence as required by Subparagraph 2.2.1.
14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if, through no act or fault of the Contractor
or a Subcontractor, Sub -subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or
entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor,
repeated suspensions, delays or interruptions of the entire Work by the Owner as described in
Paragraph 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than too percent of the total number of days
scheduled for completion, or 12o days in any 365 -day period, whichever is less.
14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Subparagraph 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists, the Contractor may,
upon seven days' written notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover
from the Owner payment for Work executed and for proven loss with respect to materials,
equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery, including reasonable overhead,
profit and damages.
14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the
Contractor or a Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing
portions of the Work under contract with the Contractor because the Owner has persistently
failed to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters
important to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' written
notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as
provided in Subparagraph 14.1.3.
14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE
14.2.1 The Owner may terminale the Contract if the Contractor:
.1 persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or
proper materials;
.2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the
respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors;
.3 persistently disregards laws, ordinances, or rules, regulations or orders of a public
authority having jurisdiction; or
.4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents.
14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist, the Owner, upon certification by the Architect that
sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may without prejudice to any other rights or
remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor's surety, if any, seven
days' written notice, terminate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights
of the surety:
.1 take possession of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools, and construction
equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor;
accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Paragraph 5.4; and
Finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. Upon
request of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed
accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work.
14.2.3 \then the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in
Subparagraph 14.2.1, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work
is finished.
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
01997 AIA®
AIA DOCUMENT A201-1997
GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
CONSTRUCTION
The American Institute
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5292
14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the bVork, including
compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other
damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the
Contractor. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the dif-
ference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall
be certified by the Architect, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive
termination of the Contract.
14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE
14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or inter-
rupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine.
14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time
caused by suspension, delay or interruption as described in Subparagraph 14.3.1..Adjustment of the
Contract Sum shall include profit. No adjustment shall be made to the extent:
.1 that performance is, was or would have been so suspended, delayed or interrupted by
another cause for which the Contractor is responsible; or
.2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the
Contract.
14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE
14.4.1 The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract for the Owner's convenience and
without cause.
14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner's
convenience, the Contractor shall:
cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice;
take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and
preservation of the Work; and
except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination
stated in the notice, terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter
into no further subcontracts and purchase orders.
14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner's convenience, the Contractor shall be entitled
to receive payment for Work executed, and costs incurred by reason of such termination, along
with reasonable overhead and profit on the Work not executed.
IIIA
o, o
o. .o
oo.�.00
0
®1997 AIA®
AIA DOCUMENT A2014997
GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE CONTRACT FOR
CONSTRUCTION
The American Institute
of Architects
1735 New York Avenue, N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006-5291
9197 %� WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
The following supplements modify, change, delete, or add to the "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", AIA
Document A201, 1997. Where any part of the General Conditions is modified or voided by these Articles, the unaltered provisions
of that part shall remain in effect.
ARTICLE I: GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS
Add to 1.1 the following:
1.1.4.1 The entire Project shall be considered as one "portion" unless separate areas or phases are designated in the Contract
Documents for separate completion times or separate areas of completion and occupancy.
1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
1.2.1 In the fifth line following the word "results.", add "In case of an inconsistency between drawings and specifications or
within earlier document not clarified by Addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of work shall be provided in accordance
with the Architect's interpretation."
1.5 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
1.5.2 In the third line following the word "Documents.", add "The Contractor shall require that each Subcontractor for this work
comply with the foregoing requirements. Extra payments will not be authorized for work that would have been determined by a
careful examination of the site conditions and the Documents."
ARTICLE 2: OWNER
2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER
2.2.3 Delete the entire subparagraph and substitute, "The Contractorshall accurately establish the building lines, lot lines, utility
locations, restrictions, elevations, and bench marks from information furnished by the Owner and local utility companies."
ARTICLE 3: CONTRACTOR
3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS
Add the following Subparagraphs 3.4.2.1 and 3.4.2.2 to 3.4.2:
3.4.2.1 After the contract has been executed, the Owner and the Architect will consider a formal request for the substitution of
products in place of those specified only under the following conditions:
Required product cannot be supplied in time for compliance with Contract time requirements.
.2 Required product is not acceptable to governing authority, or determined to be non -compatible, or cannot be
properly coordinated, warranted or insured, or has other recognized disability as certified by Contractor.
.3 Substantial advantage is offered Owner after deducting offsetting disadvantages including delays, additional
compensation to Architect/Engineer for redesign, investigation, evaluation and other necessary services, and
similar considerations.
3.4.2.2 By making requests for substitutions based on Clause 3.4.2.1 above, the Contractor:
Represents that he has personally investigated the proposed substitute product and determined that it is equal or
superior in all respects to that specified;
.2 Represents that he will provide the same warranty for the substitution that he would for that specified;
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Supplementary Conditions SC
0376-72-989 1 May 2004
.3 Certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under separate contracts, but
excludes the Architect's redesign costs, and waives all claims for additional costs related to be substitution which
subsequently become apparent; and
.4 Will coordinate the installation ofthe accepted substitute, making such changes as maybe required for the Work
to be complete in all respects.
3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES
Add to 3.7.1 the following new subparagraph:
3.7.1.2 The Contractor shall obtain andpayforall licenses and permits and shallpayall fees andcharges for connections to outside
services and for the use of municipal or private property for storage of materials, parking, utility services, temporary obstructions,
enclosures, opening and patching of streets, etc., off of the property of the City arising from the construction and completion of the
Work.
3.7.2 In the second line following the word "Work" add "and shall pay all permits, fees, to accomplish the work."
3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING
3.14.3 Add the following additional new subparagraph: "Structural elements shall be cut and patched by the General Contractor
only, and only upon written approval and authorization of the Architect. The General Contractor shall provide all chases,
holes, or openings as may be necessary for the proper installation of his own or his subcontractor's work, and he shall
consult with such subcontractor regarding the size and location of same. All holes made through concrete or masonry shall
be done with diamond drills or bits. The cost of the work shall be paid for by the Contractor or subcontractor requesting
same. The piping, ducts and similar installations shall be concealed in all finished areas, unless otherwise called for, behind
furred walls, ceilings or in chases built into masonry. It will be necessary for the contractor to place such work before
finishes are applied. The different trades under the contract will leave all slots, openings and chases before work is in place
to save unnecessary cutting patching."
ARTICLE 4: ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
Delete subparagraph 4.2. 10
4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES
Delete subparagraph 4.3.3 and substitute the following:
4.3.3 Claims by either party must be made within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21
days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later. Provided, however, that the claimant
shall use his best efforts to famish the Architect and the other party, as expeditiously as possible, with notice of any Claim including,
without limitation, those in connection with concealed or unknown conditions, once such Claim is identified, and shall cooperate
with the Architect and the other parry against whom the claim is made in any effort to mitigate the alleged orpotential damages, delay
or other adverse consequences arising out of the condition which is the cause of such a Claim. Claims must be made by written
notice. An additional Claim made after the initial Claim has been implemented by Change Order will not be considered unless
submitted in a timely manner.
Add to 4.3.4 the following:
4.3.4.1 No adjustment in the Contract Time or Contract Sum shall be permitted, however, in connection with a concealed or
unknown condition which does not differ materially from those conditions disclosed or which reasonably should have been disclosed
by the Contractor's (I) prior inspections, tests, reviews and preconstmetion services for the Project, or (2) inspections, tests, reviews,
and preconstruction services which the Contractor had the opportunity to make or should have performed in connection with the
Project.
Add to 4.3.6 the following:
4.3.6.1 The parties agree that an integral part of this agreement is the ability to resolve claims and disputes in a timely manner.
To achieve this timely resolution, the parties agree to establish a set cost allowance for delays and time extensions. There will be
no additional allowance for equitable adjustment for any general conditions, costs of mobilization, demobilization, layout, temporary
facilities, equipment, home office, or field overhead costs (extended overhead) or other costs of supervision herein relating to change
orders, time extensions, or delays, other than asset forth in this paragraph. The Owner will pay only for the following verifiable costs
associated with the time extension or delay; l) the actual labor costs, fringe benefits, employment taxes and insurance related to the
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Supplementary Conditions SC
0376-72-989 2 May 2004
Project Superintendent; 2) the cost associated with the fair rental value of the Project Superintendent's vehicle directly related to the
time extension; 3) the direct costs attributable to the extension for the field office facility including telephone line, utilities, power,
lights, water, and sewer (toilets). Mark-up on these costs will not be allowed.
Add to 4.3.7 the following:
All claims for costs related to claims for additional time shall be pursuant to paragraph 4.3.6.1.
4.4 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES
In subparagraph 4.4.5, in the fourth line delete the word "arbitration" and substitute the word "litigation".
4.5 MEDIATION
4.5.1 In the fourth line delete the words "arbitration or".
4.5.2 Delete the last sentence.
4.6 ARBITRATION
Delete entirely all paragraphs in 4.6 and substitute the following:
4.6.1 The Contractor and the Owner shall not be obligated to resolve any claim or dispute related to the contract by arbitration.
Any reference herein to arbitration is deemed void and has no force or effect.
ARTICLE 5: SUBCONTRACTORS
5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTORS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK
5.2.1 In the third line following the word "names", delete the word "of' and insert "and amounts of the Contract Sum allocated
for each".
5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS
5.3.1 Add to the paragraph as follows: "The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall coordinate their work to expedite the
progress of the work. The Contractor shall require that all subcontractors refer to the drawings and the specifications of other trades
involved with their particular work before proceeding."
ARTICLE 7: CHANGES IN THE WORK
7.2 CHANGE ORDERS
Add to 7.2 the following:
7.2.3 Agreement on any Change Order shall constitute a final settlement of all matters relating to the change in the Work which
is the subject of the change Order, including, but not limited to, all direct and indirect costs associated with such change and any and
all adjustments to the Contract Sum and the construction schedule. In the event a Change Order increases the contract Sum, the
Contractor shall include the Work covered by such Change Order in Application for Payment as if such Work were originally part
of the Project and Contract Documents.
7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES
7.3.6 In the first sentence, delete the words "a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit" and substitute "an allowance for
overhead and profit in accordance with Clauses 7.3.10.1 through 7.3.10.6 below."
7.3.10 Add the following Subparagraph 7.3.1Oto7.3: "In Subparagraph 7.3.6, the allowance for the combined overhead and profit
included in the total cost to the Owner shall be based on the following schedule:
For the Contractor, for Work performed by the Contractor's own forces, 15 percent of the cost.
.2 For the Contractor, for Work performed by the contractor's Subcontractor, 5 percent of the amount due the
Subcontractor.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Supplementary Conditions SC
0376-72-989 3 May 2004
.3 For the Subcontractor or Sub -subcontractor involved, for Work performed by that Subcontractor's or Sub.
subcontractor's own forces, 15 percent of the cost.
.4 For each Subcontractor, for Work performed by the Subcontractor's Sub -subcontractors, 5 percent of the amount
due the Sub -subcontractor.
.5 Cost to which overhead and profit is to be applied shall be determined in accordance with Subparagraph 7.3.6.
.6 In order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals, except those so minor that their
propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied by a complete itemization of costs including labor,
materials and Subcontracts. Labor and materials shall be itemized in the manner prescribed above. Where major
cost items are Subcontracts, they shall be itemized also. In no case will a change involving over $500.00 be
approved without such itemization."
ARTICLE 8: TIME
8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME
8.3.1 In subparagraph 8.3.1, in the first sentence, delete the word "arbitration" and substitute the word "litigation".
8.3.3 Delete subparagraph 8.3.3 and substitute the following:
8.3.3 Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the contract Documents, an extension in the Contract Time, to the extent
permitted under Paragraph 8.3.1, shall be the sole remedy of the contractor for any of the following:
I delay in the commencement, prosecution or completion of the Work;
.2 hindrance or obstruction in the performance of the Work;
.3 loss of productivity; or
.4 other similar claims (collectively referred to in this subparagraph 8.3.3 as Delays). This will be the remedy
whether or not such Delays are foreseeable, unless a Delay is caused by acts of the Owner constituting active
interference with the Contractor's performance of the work, and only to the extent such acts continue after the
contractor furnishes the Owner with written notice of such interference. In no event shall the Contractor be
entitled to any compensation or recovery of any damages, in connection with any Delay, including, without
limitation, consequential damages, lost opportunity costs impact damages or other similar remuneration. The
Owner's exercise of any of its rights or remedies under the contract Documents including, without limitation,
ordering changes in the Work, or directing suspension, rescheduling or correction of the Work, and regardless
of the extent or frequency of the Owner's exercise of such rights or remedies, shall not be construed as active
interference with the Contractors performance of the Work.
8.3.4 If the Contractor submits a progress report indicating, or otherwise expressing an intention to achieve completion of the
Work prior to any completion date required by the contract Documents or expiration of the contract Time, no liability of the Owner
to the Contractor for any failure of the Contractor to so complete the Work shall be created or implied.
ARTICLE 9: PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
9.3.1 Add the following: "Progress payments shall represent 95% of the actual value of the work done and materials and
equipment furnished and/or suitably stored at thejobsite or other approved location up to the first day of that month. In making such
partial (monthly) payments, there shall be retained five percent (5%) on the estimated amounts until final completion and acceptance
of all work covered by the Contract. Payments for work under the subcontracts of the General Contractor shall be subject to the
above conditions. The forth of Application for Payment shall be AIA Document G702, Application and Certification for Payment,
supported by AIA Document G703, Continuation Sheet."
9.11 Add the following Paragraph 9.11 to Article 9: "LIQUIDATED DAMAGES"
9.11. t The Contractor and the Contractor's surety, if any, shall be liable for and shall pay the Owner the sums hereinafter
stipulated as liquidated damages for each calendar day of delay until the Work is substantially complete: One Thousand
Five Hundred and no/100 dollars ($1,500.00)."
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Supplementary Conditions SC
0376-72-989 4 May 2004
ARTICLE 10: PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
10.2.3 In the fourth line following the word "utilities", add "Unauthorized visitors shall not be permitted within the working and
storage areas. Suitable personal safety devices and apparel shall be provided for the authorized visitors within the working
area. Suitable fire extinguishing equipment, readily accessible from any part of the work, shall be provided and
maintained."
10.2.4.1 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary, the
Contractor shall give the Owner reasonable advance notice.
ARTICLE 11: INSURANCE AND BONDS
11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE
11.1.1 In the first line following the word "companies" insert "to which the Owner has no reasonable objection and are".
11.1.1.9 Liability Insurance shall include all major divisions of coverage and be on a comprehensive basis including:
Premises Operations (including X, C and U coverages as applicable).
.2 Independent Contractor's Protective.
.3' Products and Completed Operations.
.4 Personal Injury Liability with Employment Exclusion deleted.
.5 Contractual, including specified provisions for Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.18.
.6 Owner, non -owner and hired motor vehicles.
.7 Broad Form Property Damage including Completed Operations.
11.1.1.10 If the General Liability coverages are provided by a Commercial General Liability Policy on a claims -made basis, the
policy date or Retroactive Date shall predate the Contract; the termination date of the policy or applicable extended reporting period
shall be no earlier than the termination date of coverages required to be maintained after final payment, certified in accordance with
Subparagraph 9.10.2.
11.1.1 In subparagraph t 1.1.1. l substitute a comma for the semicolon at the end, and add the following: "including private entities
performing Work at the site and exempt from the coverage on account of number of employees or occupation, which entities shall
maintain voluntary compensation coverage at the same limits specified for mandatory coverage for the duration of the Project:".
l I.I.I In subparagraph 11.1.1.2 delete the semicolon at the end, and add the following: "or persons or entities excluded by statute
from the requirements of Clause 11.1.1.1 but required by the Contract Documents to provide the insurance required by that Clause,".
Add to 11. 1.2 the following
11.1.2.1 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than the following limits
Workers' Compensation:
(a) State:
(b) Employer's Liability:
Statutory
$ 100,000 per Accident
$ 500,000 Disease, Policy Limit
$ 100,000 Disease, Each Employee
2. Comprehensive or Commercial General Liability (including Premises Operations; Independent Contractor's Protective;
Products and Completed Operations; Broad Form Property Damage):
(a) Bodily Injury:
$ 500,000 Each Occurrence
$1,000,000 Aggregate
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Supplementary Conditions SC
0376-72-989 5 May 2004
(b) Property Damage: $ 500,000 Each Occurrence
S 1,000,000 Aggregate
(c) Products and Completed Operations to be maintained for One year after final payment:
$1,000,000 Aggregate
(d) Property Damage Liability Insurance shall provide X, C and U coverage.
(e) Broad Form Property Damage Coverage shall include Completed Operations.
3. Contractual Liability
(a) Bodily Injury: $ 500,000 Each Occurrence
$1,000,000 Aggregate
(b) Property Damage: S 500,00 Each Occurrence
$1,000,000 Aggregate
4. Personal Injury, with Employment Exclusion deleted:
$1,000,000 Aggregate
5. Business Auto Liability (including owner, non -owned and hired vehicles):
(a) Combined Single Limit $1,000,000
6. If the General Liability coverages are provided by a Commercial Liability policy, the
(a) General Aggregate shall be not less than $1,000,000 and it shall apply, in total, to this Project only.
(b) Fire Damage Limit shall be not less than $50,000 on any one Fire.
(c) Medical Expense Limit shall be not less than $5,000 on any one person."
7. Umbrella Excess Liability:
(a) An umbrella policy may be used in combination with other policies to provide a minimum coverage of
S 1,000,000.
11.1.2.2 The Owner shall be named as an additional insured on the insurance required in l 1.1.2.1.2 above and the insurance shall
contain the severability of interest clause as follows:
(a) "The insurance afforded herein applies separately to each insured against whom claim is made or suit is brought,
except with respect to the limits of the company's'liability'."
11.1.2.3 The Contractor shall require all subcontractors of any tier to provide Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with
combined single limits for bodily injury and property damage of at least $500,000 per occurrence, and comprehensive Automobile
Liability Insurance for all owned, non -owned and hired vehicles with combined single limits for bodily injury and property damage
of at least $500,000 per occurrence.
Add to 11. 1.3 the following:
11.1.3.1 If this insurance is written on the Comprehensive General Liability policy form, the Certificates shall be AIA Document
G705, Certificate of Insurance or ACORD Form 25. If this insurance is written on a Commercial General Liability policy form,
ACORD For 25S will be acceptable.
11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE
Add to 11.2 the following:
I1.2.2 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance covering the Owner's contingent liability for claims which may arise
from operations under the Contract.
.I HOLD HARMLESS AGREEMENT: In addition to obtaining insurance coverage as required above, the
Contractor shall indemnify, defend and save the Owner, the Architect, the Architect's consultants, their agents
and employees harmless from and against any and all liability, demands, causes of action, claims thereof,
damages, costs, legal fees, expense actions and suits whatsoever, whether well founded or otherwise, including
the cost of defending the same, including bodily injury to any person whomsoever (including employees of
Owner or Architect) or damage to property of any person in the course of construction as a result of the
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Supplementary Conditions SC
0376-72-989 6 May 2004
negligence of the Contract, the subcontractors or materialmen, their agents or employees. In addition to the
foregoing, the Contractor shall be liable to defend the Owner in any lawsuit filed by any subcontractor or
materialmen as a result of the building project which is the subject matter of this Contract. No subcontract shall
relieve Contractor of any ofhis liability or obligation under the Contractor. The Contractor agrees that he is fully
responsible to the Owner for acts or omissions ofhis Subcontractors and their materialmen and of persons either
directly or indirectly employed by them."
11.4 PROPERTYINSURANCE
11.4.1.4 Delete Clause 11.4.1.4 and substitute the following: "The Contractor shall at the Contractor's own expense provide insurance
coverage for materials stored off the site after written approval of the Owner at the value established in the approval, and also for
portions to the Work in transit until such materials are permanently attached to the Work."
11.4.1.6 Add the following Clause 11.4.1.6 to Subparagraph 11.4.1: "The insurance required by Paragraph 11.4 is not intended to
cover machinery, tools or equipment owned or rented by the Contractor that are utilized in the performance of the Work but not
incorporated into the permanent improvements. The Contractor shall, at the Contractor's own expense, provide insurance coverage
for owned or rented machinery, tools or equipment, which shall be subject to the provision of Subparagraph 11.4.7."
11.5 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND
11.5.1 Delete Subparagraph l 1.5.1 and substitute the following: "The Contractor shall furnish bonds or acceptable government
obligations covering faithful performance of the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder. Bonds shall be obtained
through a company licensed to transact business in the locality of the project and the cost thereof shall be included in the Contract
Sum. The amount of each bond shall be equal to 100 percent of the Contract Sum."
11.5.1.1 The Contractor shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three days following the date the Agreement is
entered into, or if the Work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent, the Contractor shall, prior to the
commencement of the Work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished.
11.5.1.2 The Contractor shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a
certified and current copy of the power of attorney.
11.5.1.3 Form of bonds shall be AIA Document A312
ARTICLE 13: MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
13.6 INTEREST
13.6.1 Delete Clauses 13.6 and 13.6.1 in their entirety.
13.8 EQUAL OPPORTUNITY
13.8.1 The Contractor shall maintain policies of employment as follows:
13.8.1.1 The Contractor and the Contractor's Subcontractors shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for
employment because of race, religion, color, sex, age or national origin. The contractor shall take affirmative action to insure that
applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, religion, color, sex, age or
national origin. Such action shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer;
recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training,
including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for
employment, notices setting forth the policies of non-discrimination.
13.8.1.2 The Contractor and the Contractor's Subcontractors shall, in all solicitation or advertisements for employees placed by them
or on their behalf, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, religion, color,
sex, age or national origin.
ARTICLE 15: DELIVERING AND STORING
15.1 DELIVERING AND STORING
15.1.1 Schedule deliveries and unloading to prevent traffic congestion, blocking ofaccess, and interference with work in progress.
Arrange deliveries to avoid larger accumulations than can be suitably stored at site.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Supplementary Conditions Sc
0376-72-989 7 May 2004
15.1.2 Provide for continuity of supply to avoid change of supplier or change in brand of materials during any phase of work.
15.1.3 Pack and handle materials to prevent damage during loading, delivering, and storing.
15.1.4 Deliver packaged materials to site in manufacturer's original unopened, labeled, containers. Do not open containers until
approximate time for use.
15.1.5 Store materials at locations that will not interfere with progress of work. Arrange locations of storage areas in approximate
order of intended use.
15.1.6 Store materials in a manner that will prevent damage to materials or structure, and that will prevent injury to persons.
15.1.7 Store cementitious materials in dry, weathertight, ventilated, spaces. Store ferrous materials to prevent contractwith ground
and to avoid rusting and damage from weather.
ARTICLE 16: MANUFACTURED ITEMS
16.1 INSTALLATION AND INSTRUCTIONS
16.1.1 Apply, install, connect, and erect manufactured items or materials according to the recommendations of the manufacturer
when such recommendations are not in conflict with the Contract Documents.
16.1.2 Furnish to the Architect, on request, copies of the manufacturer's recommendations before proceeding with the work.
16.1.3 Keep at the site not less than one copy, in good conditions, of manufacturer's recommendations, or directions, pertaining
to work at the site. Inform involved personnel of requirements and availability of the manufacturer's recommendations.
16.2 MANUALS AND INSTRUCTIONS
16.2.1 Deliver to the Owner, upon substantial completion of the work, three copies of maintenance and instruction manuals
customarily supplied by the manufacturers for items incorporated in this work.
16.2.2 Give physical demonstration and oral instructions for proper operation and maintenance of machines and equipment to the
Owner or his designated representative.
16.2.3 Arrange, with Owner, appointment for time to give demonstration and instruction.
ARTICLE 17: RECORD DRAWINGS
17.1 RECORD DRAWINGS
17.1.1 Prepare record or as -built drawings as work progresses or as necessary to show changes from the Contract Document.
17.1.2 Show deviations from Documents with reference to locations, sizes, methods, qualities, quantities, and other specified
requirements.
17.1.3 Indicate the actual locations of pipes, conduits, switches, cut-offs, equipment, and machinery, that would not be visible
and readily accessible after work is completed.
17.1.4 Use reproducible prints or translucent drawings for recording information. Deliver record drawings to the Architect upon
substantial completion of the work.
ARTICLE 18: SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS
18.1 SPECIFICATIONS EXPLANATION
18.1.1 The specifications have been partially "stream -lined" and some words and phrases have been intentionally omitted. Missing
portions shall be supplied by inference as with notes on drawings.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Supplementary Conditions SC
0376-72-989 8 May 2004
18.1.2 Words like "approved", "inspected", "directed", and "selected" shall be construed to be followed by the words "by the
Architect". Words like "satisfactory", "submitted", and "reported", shall be construed to be followed by the words "to the Architect".
18.1.3 Words like "install", "provide", "furnish", and "supply" shall be construed to include complete furnishing, installing, and
constructing, unless modified by additional information.
18. l.4 Instructions, directions, and requirements, as specified, shall be construed to be followed by the phrase "unless otherwise
specified or indicated".
18.2 STANDARDS
18.2.1 References to standards, codes, specifications, recommendations, and regulations, refer to the latest editions or printing
in effect at the date of issue shown in the Documents unless another date is implied by the suffix number of the standard.
18.2.2 Applicable portions of the standards listed that are not in conflict with the Contract Documents shall be construed as
"Specifications for this work".
18.2.3 Specified variations from the standards listed shall be construed as amendments and the unaltered portions of the standards
shall remain in full effect.
18.2.4 In cases of discrepancies or variations between the specifications and the standards, the requirements shall govern.
18.2.5 Keep at the site not less than one copy, in good condition, of the standards specifically indicated as the methods for
applying, installing, connecting and erecting. Inform involved personnel as to the requirements and availability of the standards.
END OF SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Supplementary Conditions SC
0051-61-761 9 September 2000
SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01010 SUMMARY OF WORK
01015 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01027 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01035 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
01040 COORDINATION
01045 CUTTING AND PATCHING
01200 PROJECT MEETINGS
01300 SUBMITTALS
01400 QUALITY CONTROL
01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
01600 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
01631 SUBSTITUTIONS
01700 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
01740 WARRANTIES
SECTION 0 10 10 - SUMMARY OF WORK
PARTI-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other
Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. The Project consists of constructing a new Office and Warehouse Building and associated site development.
I. Project Location: Property located at 57 West Main, Rexburg, Idaho.
2. Owner: Melaleuca, Inc., P.O. Box 51980, Idaho Falls, Idaho 83405.
B. Contract Documents, dated May 2004, were prepared for the Project by Nielson Bodily & Associates, P.A.,
Idaho Falls, Idaho.
C. The Work consists ofsteel stud framed interior partitions, new finishes, H.M. frames, H.M. doors, carpet, HVAC
and electrical systems.
D. The Work will be constructed under a single prime contract.
1.3 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES
A. General: During the construction period the Contractor shall have full use of the premises for construction
operations, including use of the site. The Contractor's use of the premises is limited only by the Owner's right
to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of the Project.
1.4 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS
A. Owner Occupancy: The Owner will occupy the site during the construction period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01010
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Summary of Work 01010
0376-72-989 1 May 2004
SECTION 0 10 15 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PARTI- GENERAL
1.1 WORK PREFORMED BY OTHERS OR UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACT
A. Work indicated in the specifications or on the drawings as not being included in this Contract, including that
marked "N I C" (Not In Contract) may be done prior to, during, or later than, the term of work for this Contract.
It may be done under a separate Contract or by the Owner.
1.2 SECTION AND DIVISIONS
A. Separation of these specifications into Division and Section units is for convenience only and is not intended to
establish limits of work.
1.3 ACCEPTANCE
A. Signing of the contract will be deemed evidence that site and documents have been examined and that the
Contractor is familiar with conditions under which work will be done. Beginning of work indicates acceptance
of conditions under which work will be done.
1.4 PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT
A. Maintain a construction force at site, including supervisors, mechanics, craftsmen, and laborers, sufficient to
expedite work to completion date indicated in the Contract Documents. A responsible member of the
Contractor's organization shall be on thejob at any time that work is being performed by the Contractor or any
of the subcontractors throughout the duration of the project.
B. Maintain construction equipment at site, in good condition, sufficient for efficient prosecution of work.
1.5 DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS
A. Throughout these specifications, reference is made to various widely published, standard, commercial
specifications. The Contractor and each subcontractor shall become familiar with the contents of the pertinent
potions of the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) (AASHO) Specifications, to mention the most
widely used, that are cited and referred to in these specifications and drawings. Each citation of a standard
specification shall be construed to refer to the latest published revision of such portions of it that relate and apply
directly to the material or installation called for on this job.
B. In case of conflict between the referenced specification and the project specification, the project specification
shall govern. In cases of conflict among the referenced specifications or standards, the one having the more
stringent requirements shall govern.
C. The contractor, if required, shall famish an affidavit from the Manufacturer, certifying that the materials or
products delivered to the project meet the requirements specified. However, such certification shall not relieve
the contractor from responsibility of complying with any added requirements specified herein.
1.6 ARCHITECT'S OBSERVATIONS
A. The Architects shall endeavor to make periodic visits to the site as the construction progresses. However, it is
desirable to make certain of these visits prior to covering up portions of the work. Generally, the critical stages
for observation when the Architects should be notified are noted below. If possible, the Architect request a 24
hour advance notice of requested observation.
I. Prior to pouring any concrete
1.7 SAFETY REGULATIONS
A. The General Contractor and all Subcontractors on this project shall exercise safety precautions in their work
complying with recommendations given in the following:
I. National Electrical Code
2. NFPA Code Chapter 9
3. Idaho Safety Code No. 1
4. OSHA
PART 2 - MATERIALS (Not Applicable)
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg General Requirements 01015
0376.72-959 1 May 2004
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not. Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01015
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg General Requirements 01015
0376-72-989 2 May 2004
SECTION 01027 - APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
PARTI- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other
Division -I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's Applications for
Payment.
1. Coordinate the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment with the Contractor's Construction
Schedule, List of Subcontracts, and Submittal Schedule.
1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of the Contractors Construction Schedule.
B. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Valueswith other required administrative schedules and forms, including:
I. Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Application for Payment form.
3. List of subcontractors.
4. Schedule of allowances.
5. Schedule of alternates.
6. List of products.
7. List of principal suppliers and fabricators.
8. Schedule of submittals.
C. Submit the Schedule of Values to the Architect at the earliest feasible date, but in no case later than 7 days before
the date scheduled for submittal of the initial Application for Payment.
I. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:
a. Project name and location.
b. Name of the Architect.
C. Project number.
d. Contractor's name and address.
e. Date of submittal.
D. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications
for Payment and progress reports. Break principal subcontract amounts down into several line items.
E. Round amounts off to the nearest whole dollar; the total shall equal the Contract Sum.
1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT:
A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by the
Architect and paid for by the Owner.
I. The initial Application for Payment, the Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion,
and the final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B. Payment Application Times: Each progress payment date is as indicated in the Agreement. The period of
construction Work covered by each Application or Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G 702 and Continuation Sheets G 703 as the foot for
Application for Payment.
D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on the form, including notarization and execution by person
authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of the Owner. Incomplete applications will be returned without
action.
1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractors Construction Schedule. Use
updated schedules if revisions have been made.
2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued prior to the last day of
the construction period covered by the application.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Applications for Payment 01027
0376-72-989 1 May 2004
E. Transmittal: Submit 3 executed copies of each Application for Payment to the Architect by means ensuring
receipt within 24 hours; one copy shall be complete, including waivers of lien and similar attachments, when
required.
F. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with
submittal of the first Application for Payment include the following:
1. List of subcontractors.
2. List of principal suppliers and fabricators.
3. Schedule of Values.
4. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final).
5. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
G. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following issuance of the Certificate of Substantial
Completion, submit an Application for Payment; this application shall reflect any Certificates of Partial
Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
H. Administrative actions and submittals that shall proceed or coincide with this application include:
I. Occupancy permits and similar approvals.
2. Warranties (guarantees) and maintenance agreements.
3. Testladjust/balance records.
4. Maintenance instructions.
5. Change -over information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation and maintenance.
6. List of incomplete Work, recognized as exceptions to Architect's Certificate of Substantial Certificate
of Substantial Completion.
Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals which must precede or coincide with
submittal of the final payment Application for Payment include the following:
1. Completion of Project closeout requirements.
2. Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion. Completion.
3. Assurance that unsettled claims will be settled.
4. Assurance that Work not complete and accepted will be completed without due delay.
5. Transmittal of required Project construction records to Owner. Removal of temporary facilities and
services.
6. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish and similar elements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01027
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Applications for Payment 01027
0376-72-989 2 May 2004
SECTION 01035 -MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PARTI- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other
Division I Specification sections, apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY I
A. This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract j
modifications. g
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
C. Division lSection "Application for Payment" for administrative procedures governing applications forpayment.
1
D. Division lSection "Product Substitutions" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions � --
made after award of the Contract.
r
1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
j
A. Supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving an adjustment to the Contract
Sum or Contract Time, will be issued by the Architect on AIA form G710, Architect's Supplemental Instructions.
1.4 CHANGE ORDER PROPOSAL REQUESTS i
A. Owner -Initiated Proposal Requests: Proposed changes in the Work that will require adjustment to the Contract
Sum or Contract Time will be issued by the Architect, with a detailed description of the proposed change and
supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications, if necessary.
I. Proposal requests issued by the Architect are for information only. Do not consider an them
instruction either to stop work in progress, or to execute the proposed change.
2. Unless otherwise indicated in the proposal request, within 20 days of receipt of the proposal request,
submit to the Architect for the Owners review an estimate of cost necessary to execute the proposed
change.
3. Include a list of quantities of products to be purchased and unit costs, along with the total amount of j
purchases to be made. Where requested, famish survey data to substantiate quantities.
4. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. j
5. Include a statement indicating the effect the proposed change in the Work will have on the Contract
Time.
B. Contractor -Initiated Change Order Proposal Requests: When latent or other unforseen conditions require
modifications to the Contract, the Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to the I
Architect.
I. Include a statement outlining the reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work.
Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on f
the Contract Sum and Contract Time.
2. Include a list of quantities of products to be purchased and unit costs along with the total amount of
purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.
3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.
4. Comply with requirements in Section "Product Substitutions" if the proposed change in the Work
requires the substitution of one product or system for a product or system specified.
C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G 709 for Change Order Proposal Requests.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Modification Procedures 01035
0376-72-989 1 May 2004
1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
A. Construction Change Directive: When the Owner and Contractor are not in total agreement on the terms of a
Change Order Proposal Request, the Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Form G714,
instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
1. The Construction Change Directive will contain a complete description of the change in the Work and
designate the method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time.
B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction
Change Directive.
1. After completion of the change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to
substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A. Upon the Owner's approval of a Change Order Proposal Request, the Architect will issue a Change Order for
signatures of the Owner and Contractor on AIA Form G701, as provided in the Conditions of the Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01035
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Modification Procedures 01035
0376-72-989 2 May 2004
SECTION 01040 - COORDINATION
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for coordinating construction operations
including, but not necessarily limited to, the following:
I. General project coordination procedures.
2. Conservation.
3. Coordination Drawings.
4. Administrative and supervisory personnel.
5. Cleaning and protection.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
I. Division 1 Section "Field Engineering" specifies procedures for field engineering services, including
establishment of benchmarks and control points.
2. Division I Section "Project Meetings" for progress meetings, coordination meetings, and preinstallation
conferences.
3. Division I Section "Submittals" for preparing and submitting the Contractor's Construction Schedule.
4. Division l Section "Materials and Equipment" for coordinating general installation.
5. Division I Section "Contract Closeout" for coordinating contract closeout.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of these Specifications to assure efficient and orderly
installation ofeach part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included under different Sections that depend
on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.
1. Schedule construction operations in the sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one
part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for required maintenance,
service, and repair.
3. Make provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
B. Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required
for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and attendance at meetings.
I. Prepare similar memoranda for the Owner and separate contractors where coordination of their work is
required.
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other
construction activities to avoid conflicts and assure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities
include, but are not limited to, the following:
I. Preparation of schedules.
2. Installation and removal of temporary facilities. f
3. Delivery and processing of submittals.
4. Progress meetings.
5. Project closeout activities.
D. Conservation: Coordinate construction operations to assure that operations are carried out with consideration given
to conservation of energy, water, and materials.
L Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated in, the Work.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Coordination 01040
0376-72-989 1 May 2004
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Staff Names: Within 15 days of commencement of construction operations, submit a list oftheContractor's principal
staff assignments, including the superintendent and other personnel in attendance at the Project Site. Identify
individuals and their duties and responsibilities. List their addresses and telephone numbers.
1. Post copies of the list in the Project meeting room, the temporary field office, and each temporary telephone.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL COORDINATION PROVISIONS
A. Inspection of Conditions: Require the.lnstaller of each major component to inspect both the substrate and conditions
under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an
acceptable manner.
B. Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests to minimize the necessity ofuncovering completed
construction for that purpose.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place, during handling and installation. Apply
protective covering where required to assure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
B. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the
construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to assure operability without damaging effects.
C. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in
progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.
Where applicable, such exposures include, but are not limited to, the following:
I. Excessive static or dynamic loading.
2. Excessively high or low temperatures.
3. Thermal shock.
4. Excessively high or low humidity.
5. Water or ice.
6. Solvents.
7. Chemicals.
8. Puncture.
9. Abrasion.
10. Heavy traffic.
11. Soiling, staining, and corrosion.
12. Rodent and insect infestation.
13. Combustion.
14. Electrical current.
15. Improper lubrication.
16. Unusual wear or other misuse.
17. Contact between incompatible materials.
18. Destructive testing.
19. Misalignment.
20. Excessive weathering.
21. Unprotected storage.
22. Improper shipping or handling.
23. Theft.
24. Vandalism.
END OF SECTION 01040
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Coordination 01040
0376-72-989 2 May 2004
SECTION 01045 - CUTTING AND PATCHING
PARTI- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other
Division -I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS
A. Definition:"Cutting and patching" includes cutting into existing construction to provide for the installation or
performance of other work and subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original
condition.
I. "Cutting and patching" is performed for coordination of the work, to uncover work for access or
inspection, to obtain samples for testing, to permit alterations to be performed or for other similar
purposes.
2. Cutting and patching performed during the manufacture of projects, or during the initial fabrication,
erection or installation processes is not considered to be "cutting and patching" under this definition.
Drilling of holes to install fasteners and similar operations are also not considered to be "cutting and
patching".
B. Refer to other sections of these specifications for specific cutting and patching requirements and limitations
application to individual units of work.
L Unless otherwise specified requirements of this section apply to mechanical and electrical work. Refer
to Division -15 and Division -16 sections for additional requirements and limitations on cutting and
patching of mechanical and electrical work.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch stmctural elements in a manner that would reduce their
load -carrying capacity or load -deflection ratio.
B. Operational and Safety Limitations: Do not cut and patch operational elements or safety related components in
a manner that would result in a reduction of their capacity to perform in the manner intended, including energy
performance, or that would result in increased maintenance, or decreased operational life or decrease safety.
C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces, in a
manner that would, in the Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities, or result in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace Work cut and patched in a visuallyunsatisfactorymanner.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, or as directed by the Architect/Engineer, use materials for cutting and
patching that are identical to existing materials. If identical materials are not available, or cannot be used, use
materials that match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible with regard to visual effect. Use
materials for cutting and patching that will result in equal -or -better performance characteristics.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Before cutting existing surfaces, examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and
patching is to be performed. Take corrective action before proceeding, if unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are
encountered.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Cutting and Patching 01045
0376-72-989 1 May 2004
B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection
from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching
operations.
I. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.
C. Take all precautions necessary to avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit or ductwork serving the building, but
scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. General: Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching work. Except as otherwise indicated oras
approved by the Architect/Engineer, proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete
work without delay.
B. Cutting: Cut the work using methods least likely to damage work to be retained or adjoining work. Where
possible review proposed procedures with the original installer; comply with the original installer's
recommendations.
I. In general, where cutting is required use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding,
not hammering and chopping. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine such as a
carbomndum saw or core drill to insure a neat hole. Cut holes and slots neatly to size required with
minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill
from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in
use.
2. Comply with requirements of applicable Sections of Division -2 where cutting and patching requires
excavating and backfilling.
3. By-pass utility services such as pipe or conduit, before cutting, where services are shown or required
to be removed, relocated or abandoned. Cut-off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed.
After by-pass and cutting, cap, valve or plug and seal tight remaining portion of pipe or conduit to
prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter.
C. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances.
1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation.
2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and where necessary extend finish restoration into retained
adjoining work in a manner which will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.
3. Where removal ofwalls orpartitions extends one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and
wall surfaces in the new space to provide an even surface of uniform color and appearance. If
necessary to achieve uniform color and appearance, remove existing floor and wall coverings and
replace with new materials.
a. Where patching occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over entire
unbroken containing the patch, after the patched area has received primer and second coat.
4. Patch, repair or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even plane surface of uniform
appearance.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Thoroughly clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching is performed or used as access. Remove
completely paint, mortar, oils, putty and items of similar nature. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit and similar
features before painting or other finishing is applied. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
END OF SECTION 01045
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Cutting and Patching 01045
0376-72-989 2 May 2004
SECTION 01200 - PROJECT MEETINGS
PARTI- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other
Division I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project meetings, including, but not limited to,
the following:
I. Preconstmction conferences.
2. Preinstallation conferences.
3. Progress meetings.
4. Coordination meetings.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
I. Division I Section "Coordination" for procedures for coordinating project meetings with other construction
activities.
2. Division l Section "Submittals" for submitting the Contractor's Construction Schedule.
1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A. Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to the Owner and the
Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at the Project Site or
another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
B. Attendees: Authorized representatives of the Owner, Architect, and their consultants; the Contractor and its
superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference.
All participants at the conference shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the
Work.
C. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:
1. Tentative construction schedule.
2. Critical work sequencing.
3. Designation of responsible personnel.
4. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
5. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
6. Distribution of Contract Documents.
7. Submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.
8. Preparation of record documents.
9. Use of the premises.
10. Office, work, and storage areas.
11. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
12. Safety procedures.
13. First aid.
14. Security.
15. Housekeeping.
16. Working hours.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCES
A. Conduct apreinstallation conference at the Project Site before each construction activity thatrequires coordination with
other construction.
B. Attendees: The Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the
installation, and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow,
shall attend the meeting. Advise the Architect of scheduled meeting dates.
I. Review the progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under
consideration at each preinstallation conference, including requirements for the following:
a. Contract Documents.
b. Options.
C. Related Change Orders.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Project Meetings 01200
0376-72-989 1 May 2004
d. Purchases.
C. Deliveries.
f. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and quality -control samples.
g. Review of mockups.
h. Possible conflicts.
i. Compatibility problems.
j. Time schedules.
k. Weather limitations.
I. Manufacturer's recommendations.
in. Warranty requirements.
n. Compatibility of materials.
o. Acceptability of substrates.
P. Temporary facilities.
q. Space and access limitations.
r. - Governing regulations.
S. Safety.
t. Inspecting and testing requirements.
U. Required performance results.
V. Recording requirements.
W. Protection.
2. Record significant discussions and agreements and disagreements of each conference, and the approved
schedule. Promptly distribute the record of the meeting to everyone concerned, including the Owner and the
Architect.
3. Do not proceed with the installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever
actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of Work and reconvene the conference at the
earliest feasible date.
1.5 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. The Architect will conduct progress meetings at the Project Site monthly. Notify the subcontractors of scheduled
meeting dates. Coordinate preparation of the payment request with dates of meetings.
B. Attendees: In addition to representatives of the Owner and the Architect, each subcontractor, supplier, or other entity
concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be
represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to
conclude matters relating to the Work.
C. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance
that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to the status of the Project.
I. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine where each activity
is in relation to the Contractor's Construction Schedule, whether on time or ahead or behind schedule.
Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved
to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to insure that current and subsequent activities will
be completed within the Contract Time.
2. Review the present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
a. Interface requirements.
b. Time.
C. Sequences.
d. Status of submittals.
C. Deliveries.
f Off-site fabrication problems.
g. Access.
h. Site utilization.
i. Temporary facilities and services.
j. Hours of work.
k. Hazards and risks.
I. Housekeeping.
in. Quality and work standards.
n. Change Orders.
o. Documentation of information for payment requests.
1.6 COORDINATION MEETINGS
A. Conduct project coordination meetings at regular intervals convenient for all parties involved. Project coordination
meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as regular progress meetings and special
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Project Meetings 01200
0376-72.989 2 May 2004
preinstallation meetings.
B. Request representation at each meeting by every party currently involved in coordination or planning for the
construction activities involved.
C. Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions
resulting from each meeting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01200
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Project Meetings 01200
0376-72-989 3 May 2004
SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS
PARTI- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other
Division -I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required forperformance ofthe
Work, including;
I. Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Submittal schedule.
3. Daily construction reports.
4. Shop Drawings.
5. Product Data.
6. Samples.
B. Administrative Submittals: Refer to other Division -1 Sections and other Contract Documents for requirements
for administrative submittals. Such submittals include, but are not limited to:
I. Permits.
2. Applications for payment.
3. Performance and payment bonds.
4. Insurance certificates.
5. List of Subcontractors.
C. The Schedule of Values submittal is included in Section "Applications for Payment."
D. Inspection and test reports are included in Section "Quality Control Services."
1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.
Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay.
B. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals and related activities
that require sequential activity.
C. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work so processing will not
be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.
D. The Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals
until related submittals are received.
E. Processing: Allow sufficient review time so that installation will not be delayed as a result of the time required
to process submittals, including time for resubmittals.
F. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to the Architect
sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing.
1.4 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Bar -Chart Schedule: Prepare a fully developed, horizontal bar- chart type Contractor's construction schedule.
Submit within 30 days of the date established for "Commencement of the Work".
1. Provide a separate time bar for each significant construction activity. Provide a continuous vertical
line to identify the first working day of each week. Use the same breakdown of units of the Work as
indicated in the "Schedule of Values".
2. Within each time bar indicate estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments. As Work
progresses, place a contrasting mark in each bar to indicate Actual Completion.
3. Prepare the schedule on a sheet, orseries of sheets, of stable transparency, or other reproducible media,
of sufficient width to show data for the entire construction period.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Submittals 01300
0376.72-989 1 May 2004
4. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved.
Coordinate each element on the schedule with other construction activities; include minor elements
involved in the sequence of the Work. Show each activity in proper sequence. Indicate graphically
sequences necessary for completion of related portions of the Work.
5. Coordinate the Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts,
submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests and other schedules.
6. Indicate completion in advance of the date established for Substantial Completion. Indicate
Substantial Completion on the schedule to allow time for the Architect's procedures necessary for
certification of Substantial Completion.
B. Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the Architect, Owner,
subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with scheduled dates. Post copies in the Project meeting
room and temporary field office.
I. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties
from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer
involved in construction activities.
C. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity, where revisions have been recognized
or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.
1.5 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
A. After development and acceptance of the Contractor's construction schedule, prepare a complete schedule of
submittals. Submit the schedule within 10 days of the date required for establishment of the Contractor's
construction schedule.
B. Coordinate submittal schedule with the list of subcontracts, schedule of values and the list of products as well
as the Contractor's construction schedule.
C. Preparethe schedulein chronological order; include submittals required during the first90days ofconstruction.
Provide the following information:
I. Scheduled date for the first submittal.
2. Related Section number.
3. Submittal category.
4. Name of subcontractor.
5. Description of the part of the Work covered.
6. Scheduled date for resubmittal
7. Scheduled date the Architect's final release or approval.
D. Distribution: Following response to initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the Architect, Owner,
subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with submittal dates indicated. Post copies in the Project
meeting room and field office.
E. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from
distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in
construction activities.
F. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity, where revisions have been recognized
or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.
1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit newly prepared information, drawn to accurate scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate
deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information
as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not
considered Shop Drawings.
B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates
and similar drawings. Include the following information:
I. Dimensions.
2. Identification of products and materials included.
3. Compliance with specified standards.
4. Notation of coordination requirements.
5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Submittals 01300
0376-72-989 2 May 2004
C. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar PoII- size Drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at
least 8-1/2" x I I" but no larger than 36" x 48".
D. Submittal: Submit five (5) blue- or black -line prints; submit seven (7) prints where required for maintenance
manuals. Two (2) prints will be retained; the remainder will be returned.
1. One of the prints returned shall be marked -up and maintained as a "Record Document".
E. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken in connection with
construction.
F. Coordination drawings are a special type of Shop Drawing that show the relationship and integration of different
construction elements that require careful coordination during fabrication or installation to fit in the space
provided or function as intended.
G. Preparation ofcoordination Drawings is specified in section "Project Coordination" and may include components
previously shown in detail on Shop Drawings or Product Data.
H. Submit coordination Drawings for integration of different construction elements. Show sequences and
relationships of separate components to avoid conflicts in use of space.
1.7 PRODUCT DATA
A. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Product Data includes
printed information such as manufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing.
in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams and performance curves. Where Product Data must be
specially prepared because standard printed data is not suitable for use, submit as "Shop Drawings."
B. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data includes information on
several products, some of which are not required, mark copies to indicate the applicable information. Include
the following information:
1. Manufacturer's printed recommendations.
2. Compliance with recognized trade association standards.
3. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.
4. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
5. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement.
6. Notation of coordination requirements.
C. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements ofthe Contract Documents has been confirmed.
D. Submittals: Submit five (5) copies of each required submittal; submit seven (7) copies where required for
maintenance manuals. The Architect will retain two (2), and will return the other marked with action taken and
corrections or modifications required.
I. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the submittal mayserve as the
final submittal.
E. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittal to installers, subcontractors,suppliers, manufacturers, fabricators,
and others required for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
F. Do not proceed with installation until an applicable copy of Product Data applicable is in the installer's
possession.
G. Do not permit use of unmarked copies of Product Data in connection with construction.
1.8 SAMPLES
A. Submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with the
material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts
or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture and pattern.
B. Mount, display, or package Samples in the manner specified to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare
Samples to match the Architect's Sample. Include the following:
1. Generic description of the Sample.
2. Sample source.
3. Product name or name of manufacturer.
4. Compliance with recognized standards.
5. Availability and delivery time.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Subminals 01300
0376-72-989 3 May 2004
C. Submit Samples for review of kind,color,pattern, and texture, for a final check of these characteristics with other
elements, and for a comparison of these characteristics between the final submittal and the actual component as
delivered and installed.
D. Where variation in color, pattern, texture or other characteristics are inherent in the material or product
represented, submit multiple units (not less than 3), that show approximate limits of the variations.
E. Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication
techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation and similar construction characteristics.
F. Submittals: Where Samples are for selection of color, pattern, texture or similar characteristics from a range of
standard choices, submit a full set of choices for the material or product. Except for Samples illustrating
assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation and similar characteristics, submit
two (2)sets; one (t) will be returned marked with the action taken.
1. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the submittal mayserve as the
final submittal.
G. Distribution of Samples: Prepare and distribute additional sets to subcontractors, manufacturers, fabricators,
suppliers, installers, and others as required for performance of the Work. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
1.9 ARCHITECTS ACTION
A. Except for submittals for record, information or similar purposes, where action and return is required or
requested, the Architect will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return promptly.
1. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility.
B. Action Stamp: The Architect will stamp each submittal with a uniform, self-explanatory action stamp. The
stamp will be appropriately marked, as follows, to indicate the action taken:
C. Final Unrestricted Release: Where submittals are marked "Approved," that part of the Work covered by the
submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will
depend upon that compliance.
D. Final -But -Restricted Release: When submittals are marked "Approved as Noted," that part of the Work covered
by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or corrections on the submittal and
requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend on that compliance.
E. Returned for Resubmittal: When submittal is marked "Not Approved, Revise and Resubmit," do not proceed
with that part of the Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other
activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal in accordance with the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat
if necessary to obtain a different action mark.
1. Do not permit submittals marked "Not Approved, Revise and Resubmit" to be used at the Project site,
or elsewhere where Work is in progress.
F. Other Action: Where a submittal is primarily for information or record purposes, special processing or other
activity, the submittal will be returned, marked "Action Not Required".
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable).
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable).
END OF SECTION 01300
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Submittals 01300
0376-72.989 4 May 2004
SECTION 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL
PART I - GENERAL
I.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions oftheContract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and otherDivision I
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality -control services.
B. Quality -control services include inspections, tests, and related actions, including reports performed by Contractor, by
independent agencies, and by governing authorities. They do not include contract enforcement activities performed by
Architect.
C. Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services
do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with Contract Document requirements.
D. Requirements of this Section relate to customized fabrication and installation procedures, not production of standard
products.
I. Specific quality -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that
specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.
2. Specified inspections, tests, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality -control proceduresthat facilitate
compliance with Contract Document requirements.
3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities
having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.
E. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" specifies requirements for repair and restoration of construction
disturbed by inspection and testing activities.
2. Division t Section "Submittals" specifies requirements for development of a schedule of required tests and
inspections.
1.3 RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated as the responsibility of another identified entity, Contractor shall
provide inspections, tests, and other quality -control services specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents and required
by authorities having jurisdiction. Costs for these services are included in the Contract Sum.
1. Where individual Sections specifically indicate that certain inspections, tests, and other quality -control services
are the Contractor's responsibility, the Contractor shall employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency
to perform quality -control services. Costs for these services are included in the Contract Sum.
2. Where individual Sections specifically indicate that certain inspections, tests, and other quality -control services
are the Owner's responsibility, the Owner will employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perforin
those services.
B. Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of inspections,tests, or other quality -control services
prove unsatisfactory and indicate noncompliance with Contract Document requirements, regardless of whether the
original test was Contractor's responsibility.
1. The cost of retesting construction, revised or replaced by the Contractor, is the Contractor's responsibility where
required tests performed on original construction indicated noncompliance with Contract Document
requirements.
C. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required inspections, tests, and similar services, and provide
reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify the agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment
of personnel. Auxiliary services required include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Provide access to the Work.
2. Furnish incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests.
3. Take adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing or assist the agency in taking
samples.
4. Provide facilities for storage and curing of test samples.
5. Deliver samples to testing laboratories.
6. Provide the agency with a preliminary design mix proposed for use for materials mixes that require control by
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Quality Control 01400
0376-72-989 1 May 2004
the testing agency.
7. Provide security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project Site.
D. Duties of the Testing Agency: The independent agency engaged to perform inspections, sampling, and testing of
materials and construction specified in individual Sections shall cooperate with the Architect and the Contractor in
performance of the agency's duties. The testing agency shall provide qualified personnel to perform required inspections
and tests.
1. The agency shall notify the Architect and the Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in
the Work during performance of its services.
2. The agency is not authorized to release, revoke, alter, or enlarge requirements of the Contract Documents or
approve or accept any portion of the Work.
3. The agency shall not perform any duties of the Contractor.
E. Coordination: Coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required services with a minimum of delay.
Coordinate activities to avoid the necessity ofremoving and replacing construction to accommodate inspections and tests.
1. The Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking samples, and similar activities.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. The independent testing agency shall submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each inspection, test, or similar
service to the Architect.
L Submit additional copies of each written report directly to the governing authority, when the authority so directs.
2. Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test, or similar service include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Date of issue.
b. Project title and number.
C. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
d. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
C. Names of individuals making the inspection or test.
f. Designation of the Work and test method.
g. Identification of product and Specification Section.
h. Complete inspection or test data.
i. Test results and an interpretation of test results.
j. Ambient conditions at the time of sample taking and testing.
k. Comments or professional opinion on whether inspected or tested Work complies with Contract
Document requirements.
1. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
In. Recommendations on retesting.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications for Service Agencies: Engage inspection and testing service agencies, including independent testing
laboratories, that are prequalified as complying with the American Council of Independent Laboratories"'Recommended
Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification" and that specialize in the types of inspections and tests to be
performed.
I. Each independent inspection and testing agencyengaged on the Project shall be authorized by authorities having
jurisdiction to operate in the state where the Project is located.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample taking and similar services, repair damaged construction and
restore substrates and finishes. Comply with Contract Document requirements for Division I Section "Cutting and
Patching."
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Quality Control 01400
0376-72-989 2 May 2004
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality -control service activities, and protect repaired construction.
C. Repair and protection is Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for inspection, testing,
or similar services.
END OF SECTION 01400
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Quality Control 01400
0376.72-989 3 May 2004
SECTION 01500 -CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
PARTI- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings andgencral provisions oftheContract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and otherDivision I
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for construction facilities and temporary controls, including temporary utilities,
support facilities, and security and protection.
B. Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
L Water service and distribution.
2. Temporary electric power and light.
3. Temporary heat.
4. Ventilation.
5. Telephone service.
6. Sanitary facilities, including drinking water.
C. Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
I.
Field offices and storage sheds.
2.
Temporary roads and paving.
3.
Dewatering facilities and drains.
4.
Temporary enclosures.
5.
Temporary project identification signs and bulletin boards.
6.
Waste disposal services.
7.
Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities.
D. Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
I. Temporary fire protection.
2. Barricades, warning signs, and lights.
3. Enclosure fence for the site.
4. Environmental protection.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Building code requirements.
2. Health and safety regulations.
3. Utility company regulations.
4. Police, fire department, and rescue squad mles.
5. Environmental protection regulations.
B. Standards: Comply with NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction,Alterations, and Demolition Operations,"
ANSI A 10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition," and NECA Electrical Design
Library "Temporary Electrical Facilities."
I. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric
service. Install service in compliance with NFPA 70 "National Electric Code."
C. Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility before use. Obtain
required certifications and permits.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and efficient
manner. Relocate temporary services and facilities as the Work progresses. Do not overload facilities or permit them
to interfere with progress. Take necessary fire -prevention measures. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary
conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on-site.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 01500
0376.72-989 1 May 2004
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide new materials. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may use undamaged, previously used
materials in serviceable condition. Provide materials suitable for use intended.
B. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry."
1. For signs and directory boards, provide exterior -type, Grade B -B high-density concrete form overlay plywood
of sizes and thicknesses indicated.
2. For safety barriers and similar uses, provide minimum 5/8 -inch- (16 -mm-) thick exterior plywood.
C. Tarpaulins: Provide waterproof, fire-resistant, UL -labeled tarpaulins with flame -spread rating of 15 or less. For
temporary enclosures, provide translucent, nylon -reinforced, laminated polyethylene or polyvinyl chloride, fire -retardant
tarpaulins.
D. Water: Provide potable water approved by local health authorities.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. General: Provide new equipment. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may use undamaged, previously used
equipment in serviceable condition. Provide equipment suitable for use intended.
B. Water Hoses: Provide 3/4 -inch (19 -mm), heavy-duty, abrasion -resistant, flexible rubber hoses 100 feet (30 m) long, with
pressure rating greater than the maximum pressure of the water distribution system. Provide adjustable shutoff nozzles
at hose discharge.
C. Electrical Outlets: Provide properly configured, NEMA -polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110 -to 120 -Volt plugs
into higher voltage outlets. Provide receptacle outlets equipped with ground -fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and
pilot light for connection of power tools and equipment.
D. Electrical Power Cords: Provide grounded extension cords. Use hard -service cords where exposed to abrasion and
traffic. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electric cords if single lengths will not reach areas
where construction activities are in progress. Do not exceed safe length -voltage ratio.
E. Lamps and Light Fixtures: Provide general service incandescent lamps of wattage required for adequate illumination.
Provide guard cages or tempered -glass enclosures where exposed to breakage. Provide exterior fixtures where exposed
to moisture.
F. Heating Units: Provide temporary heating units that have been tested and labeled by UL, FM, or another recognized
trade association related to the type of fuel being consumed.
G. Temporary Offices: Provide prefabricated or mobile units or similar job -built construction with lockable entrances,
operable windows, and serviceable finishes.
H. Temporary Toilet Units: Provide self-contained, single -occupant toilet units of the chemical, aerated recirculation, or
combustiontype. Provide units properly vented and fully enclosed with a glass -fiber -reinforced polyester shell or similar
nonabsorbent material.
L Fire Extinguishers: Provide hand -carried, portable, UL -rated, Class A fire extinguishers for temporary offices and similar
spaces. In other locations, provide hand -carried, portable, UL -rated, Class ABC, dry -chemical extinguishers or a
combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for the exposures.
1. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by location and
class of fire exposure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Use qualified personnel for installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities where they will serve the Project
adequately and result in minimum interference with performance ofthe Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required.
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until
facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 01500
0376-72-989 2 May 2004
3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Engage the appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing service. Where
company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment.
Comply with company recommendations.
I. Arrange with company and existing users for a time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make
connections for temporary services.
2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Prior to temporary utility availability, provide trucked -
in services.
3. Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to the site where the Owner's easements cannot be used for that
purpose.
4. Use Charges: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to the Owner or Architect. Neither
the Owner nor Architect will accept cost or use charges as a basis of claims for Change Orders.
B. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping of sizes and pressures adequate for construction until
permanent water service is in use.
1. Sterilization: Sterilize temporary water piping prior to use.
C. Temporary Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of
sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period. Include meters, transformers, overload -
protected disconnects, automatic ground -fault interrupters, and main distribution switch gear.
I. Install electric power service underground, except where overhead service must be used.
2. Power Distribution System: Install wiring overhead and rise vertically where least exposed to damage. Where
permitted, wiring circuits not exceeding 125 Volts, ac 20 Ampere rating, and lighting circuits maybe nonmetallic
sheathed cable where overhead and exposed for surveillance.
D. Temporary Lighting: When overhead floor or roof deck has been installed, provide temporary lighting with local
switching.
1. Install and operate temporary lighting that will fulfill security and protection requirements without operating the
entire system. Provide temporary lighting that will provide adequate illumination for construction operations
and traffic conditions.
E. Temporary Heat: Provide temporary heat required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed
installations or for protection of installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select
safe equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate
ventilation requirements to produce the ambient condition required and minimize consumption of energy.
F. Heating Facilities: Except where the Owner authorizes use of the permanent system, provide vented, self-contained,LP.
gas or fuel -oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.
1. Use of gasoline -burning space heaters, open flame, or salamander heating units is prohibited.
G. Temporary Telephones: Provide temporary telephone service throughout the construction period for all personnel
engaged in construction activities. Install telephone on a separate line for each temporary office and first-aid station.
I. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.
H. Sanitary facilities include temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking -water fixtures. Comply with regulations and
health codes for the type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. Install where facilities
will best serve the Project's needs.
I. Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units. Shield toilets to ensure privacy. Use of pit -type privies will not be permitted.
3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Locate field offices, storage sheds, and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access.
I. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove prior to Substantial Completion.
Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions
acceptable to the Owner.
B. Field Offices: Provide insulated, weathertight temporary offices of sufficient size to accommodate required office
personnel at the Project Site. Keep the office clean and orderly for use for small progress meetings.
C. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: For temporary drainage and dewatering facilities and operations not directly associated
with construction activities included under individual Sections, comply with dewatering requirements of applicable
Division 2 Sections. Where feasible, utilize the same facilities. Maintain the site, excavations, and construction free of
water.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 01500
0376-72-989 3 May 2004
D. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from
exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities.
I. Where heat is needed and the permanent building enclosure is not complete, provide temporary enclosures where
there is no other provision for containment of heat. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying
or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects.
2. Install tarpaulins securely, with incombustible wood framing and other materials. Close openings of 25 sq. ft.
(2.3 sq. m) or less with plywood or similar materials.
3. Close openingsthrough floor or roofdecks and horizontal surfaceswith load-bearing, wood -framed construction.
E. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Prepare project identification and other signs of size indicated. Install signs
where indicated to inform the public and persons seeking entrance to the Project. Support on posts or framing of
preservative -treated wood or steel. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs.
I. Project Identification Signs: Engage an experienced sign painter to apply graphics. Comply with details
indicated.
2. Temporary Signs: Prepare signs to provide directional information to construction personnel and visitors.
Collection and Disposal of Waste: Collect waste from construction areas and elsewhere daily. Comply with
requirements of NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste material and debris. Enforce requirements strictly. Do
not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days when the temperature is expected to rise above 80
deg F (27 deg Q. Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste by
containerizing properly. Dispose of material lawfully.
G. Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate. Cover finished,
permanent stairs with a protective covering of plywood or similar material so finishes will be undamaged at the time of
acceptance.
3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Except for use of permanent fire protection as soon as available, do not change over from use of temporary security and
protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion, or longer, as requested by the Architect.
B. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire -protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, install and maintain
temporary fire -protection facilities of the types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire
losses. Comply with NFPA 10 "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers" and NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding
Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations."
I. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose, but not less than one
extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell.
2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire -safe locations.
3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire -protection facilities, stairways,
and other access routes for fighting fires. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire -exposure areas.
4. Provide supervision of welding operations, combustion -type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire
ignition.
C. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erection of structurally
adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform personnel and the public of
the hazard being protected against. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or amber
lights.
D. Enclosure Fence: Before excavation begins, install an enclosure fence with lockable entrance gates. Locate where
indicated, or enclose the entire site or the portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. Install
in a manner that will prevent people, dogs, and other animals from easily entering the site, except by the entrance gates.
E. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure of partially completed areas of construction.
Provide locking entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.
I. Storage: Where materials and equipment must be stored, and are of value or attractive for theft, provide a secure
lockup. Enforce discipline in connection with the installation and release ofmaterial to minimize the opportunity
for theft and vandalism.
Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by
methods that comply with environmental regulations, and minimize the possibility that air, waterways, and subsoil might
be contaminated or polluted or that other undesirable effects might result. Avoid use of tools and equipment that produce
harmful noise. Restrict use of noise -making tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons
or firms near the site.
3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 01500
0376.72-989 4 May 2004
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. Limit availability of temporary facilities to essential
and intended uses to minimize waste and abuse.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage by freezing
temperatures and similar elements.
1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,ventilation, and similar facilities
on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.
2. Protection: Prevent water -filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect from
damage during excavation operations.
C. Termination and Removal: Unless the Architect requests that it be maintained longer, remove each temporary facility
when the need has ended, when replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial
Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of
interference with the temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that
cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
I. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the Contractor's property. The Owner reserves
the right to take possession of project identification signs.
2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used duringthe construction period including,
but not limited to, the following:
a. Replace air filters and clean inside of ductwork and housings.
b. Replace significantly worn parts and parts subject to unusual operating conditions.
C. Replace lamps burned out or noticeably dimmed by hours of use.
END OF SECTION 01500
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 01500
0376-72-989 5 May 2004
SECTION 01600 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
PARTI- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawingsand general provisions oftheContract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and otherDivision I
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's selection of products for
use in the Project.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Reference Standards and Definitions" specifies the applicability of industry standards to
products specified.
2. Division I Section "Submittals" specifies requirements for submittal of the Contractor's Construction Schedule
and the Submittal Schedule.
3. Division 1 Section "Substitutions" specifies administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions
made after award of the Contract.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents,
such as "specialties," "systems," "structure," "finishes," "accessories," and similar terms. Such terms are self-explanatory
and have well-recognized meanings in the construction industry.
I. "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, whether purchased for the Project or taken from
previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment; "'system," and terms
of similar intent.
a. "Named Products" are items identified by the manufacturer's product name, including make or model
number or other designation, shown or listed in the manufacturer's published product literature, that is
current as of the date of the Contract Documents.
2. "Materials" are products substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined or otherwise fabricated,
processed, or installed to form a part of the Work.
3. "Equipment" is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that requires service
connections, such as wiring or piping.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind from a single source.
B. Compatibility of Options: When the Contractor is given the option of selecting between 2 or more products for use on
the Project, the product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected
products were also options.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver,store, and handle products according to the manufacturer's recommendations, using means and methods that will
prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft.
I. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at the site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to assure minimum holding time for items that are flammable,
hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.
3. Deliver products to the site in an undamaged condition in the manufacturer's original sealed container or other
packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and
installing.
4. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products
are undamaged and properly protected.
5. Store products at the site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of
units.
6. Store heavy materials away from the Project structure in a manner that will not endanger the supporting
construction.
7. Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, under cover in a weathertight enclosure, with
ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Materials and Equipment 01600
0376-72-989 1 May 2004
manufacturer's instructions.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and,
unless otherwise indicated, new at the time of installation.
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety guards, and other devices and details needed for
a complete installation and the intended use and effect.
2. Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations on other projects.
B. Product Selection Procedures: The Contract Documents and governing regulations govem product selection. Procedures
governing product selection include the following:
I. Proprietary Specification Requirements: Where Specifications name only a single product or manufacturer,
provide the product indicated. No substitutions will be permitted.
2. Semiproprietary Specification Requirements: Where Specifications name 2 or more products or manufacturers,
provide l of the products indicated. No substitutions will be permitted.
a. Where Specifications specify products or manufacturers by name, accompanied by the term "or equal"
or "or approved equal," comply with the Contract Document provisions concerning "substitutions" to
obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
3. Nonproprietary Specifications: When Specifications list products or manufacturers that are available and may
be incorporated in the Work, but do not restrict the Contractor to use of these products only, the Contractor may
propose any available product that complies with Contract requirements. Comply with Contract Document
provisions concerning "substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
4. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product or assembly, listing exact
characteristics required, with or without use of a brand or trade name, provide a product or assembly that
provides the characteristics and otherwise complies with Contract requirements.
5. Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require compliance with performance
requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements and are recommended by the manufacturer
for the application indicated.
a. Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in published product literature or by the
manufacturer's certification of performance.
6. Compliance with Standards, Codes, and Regulations: Where Specifications only require compliance with an
imposed code, standard, or regulation, select a product that complies with the standards, codes, or regulations
specified.
7. Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, the Architect's decision will
be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily.
a. Where no product available within the specified category matches satisfactorily and complies with other
specified requirements, comply with provisions of the Contract Documents concerning "substitutions"
for selection of a matching product in another product category.
8. Visual Selection: Where specified product requirements include the phrase "... as selected from manufacturer's
standard colors, patterns, textures ..." or a similar phrase, select a product and manufacturer that complies with
other specified requirements. The Architect will select the color, pattern, and texture from the product line
selected.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation ofproducts in the applications indicated.
Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other Work.
I. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 01600
Melateuca Call Center - Rexburg Materials and Equipment 01600
0376-72.989 2 May 2004
SECTION 01631 - SUBSTITUTIONS
PARTI- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests for substitutions made after award
of the Contract.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
L Division I Section "Reference Standards and Definitions" specifies the applicability of industry standards to
products specified.
2. Division I Section "Submittals" specifies requirements for submitting the Contractor's Construction Schedule
and the Submittal Schedule.
3. Division I Section "Materials and Equipment" specifies requirements governing the Contractor's selection of
products and product options.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions in this Article do not change or modify the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents.
B, Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by the Contract
Documents proposed by the Contractor after award of the Contract are considered to be requests for substitutions. The
following are not considered to be requests for substitutions:
1. Substitutions requested during the bidding period, and accepted by Addendum prior to award of the Contract,
are included in the Contract Documents and are not subject to requirements specified in this Section for
substitutions.
2. Revisions to the Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Architect.
3. Specified options of products and construction methods included in the Contract Documents.
4. The Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and orders issued by governing
authorities.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Substitution Request Submittal: The Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 30 days after j
commencement of the Work. Requests received more than 30 days after commencement of the Work may be considered
or rejected at the discretion of the Architect.
I. Submit 3 copies of each request for substitution for consideration. Submit requests in the form and according
to procedures required for change -order proposals.
2. Identify the product or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each request. Include related
Specification Section and Drawing numbers.
3. Provide complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions, and the following -
information, as appropriate:
a. A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with those of the Work
specified. Significant qualities may include elements, such as performance, weight, size, durability, and
visual effect. -
b. Product Data, including Drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation
procedures.
C. Samples, where applicable or requested.
d. A statement indicating the substitution's effect on the Contractor's Construction Schedule compared to
the schedule without approval of the substitution. Indicate the effect of the proposed substitution on
overall Contract Time.
e. Cost information, including a proposal of the net change, if any in the Contract Sum.
f. The Contractor's certification that the proposed substitution conforms to requirements in the Contract
Documents in every respect and is appropriate for the applications indicated.
g. The Contractor's waiverof rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary
because of the failure of the substitution to perform adequately.
4. Architect's Action: If necessary, the Architect will request additional information or documentation for
evaluation within one week of receipt of a request for substitution. The Architect will notify the Contractor of
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Substitutions 01631
0376-72-989 1 May 2004
acceptance or rejection of the substitution within 2 weeks of receipt of the request, or one week of receipt of
additional information or documentation, whichever is later.
a. Use the product specified if the Architect cannot make a decision on the use of a proposed substitute
within the time allocated.
PAR72-PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Conditions: The Architect will receive and consider the Contractor's request for substitution when one or more of the
following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Architect. If the following conditions are not satisfied, the
Architect will return the requests without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements.
I. Extensive revisions to the Contract Documents are not required.
2. Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of the Contract Documents.
3. The request is timely, fully documented, and properly submitted.
4. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time. The Architect
will not consider the request if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work
promptly or coordinate activities properly.
5. The request is directly related to an "or -equal" clause or similar language in the Contract Documents.
6. The requested substitution offers the Owner a substantial advantage, in cost, time, energy conservation, or other
considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities the Owner must assume. The Owner's additional
responsibilities may include compensation to the Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost
of other construction by the Owner, and similar considerations.
7. The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority,
and the requested substitution can be approved.
8. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in a manner that is compatible with other
materials and where the Contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome the incompatibility.
9. The specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with other materials and where the
Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be coordinated.
10. The specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warranty required by the Contract Documents
and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution provides the required warranty.
B. The Contractor's submittal and the Architect's acceptance of Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples for construction
activities not complying with the Contract Documents do not constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution,
nor do they constitute approval.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01631
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Substitutions 01631
0376-72-989 2 May 2004
SECTION 01700 -PROJECT CLOSEOUT
PARTI-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Bid Packages,
General Notes and other Division -I Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project closeout, including but not limited
to:
I. Inspection procedures.
2. Project record document submittal.
3. Operating and maintenance manual submittal.
4. Submittal of warranties.
5. Final cleaning.
B. Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate Sections in Divisions -2
through -16.
1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion, complete the
following. List exceptions in the request.
1. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial Completion is
claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.
Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract Documents and a
statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
a. If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items, the value of
incomplete construction, and reasons the Work is not complete.
2. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications and similar
documents.
3. Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and
utilities; include occupancy permits, operating certificates and similar releases.
4. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items.
5. Make final change-overofpermanent locks and transmit keys to the Owner. Advise the Owner's personnel
of change -over in security provisions.
6. Complete start-up testing of systems, and instruction ofthe Owner's operating and maintenance personnel.
Discontinue or change over and remove temporary facilities from the site, along with construction tools,
mock-ups, and similar elements.
7. Complete final clean up requirements, including touch-up painting. Touch-up and otherwise repair and
restore marred exposed finishes.
B. Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, the Architect will either proceed with inspection
or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial
Completion following inspection, or advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected
before the certificate will be issued.
I. The Architect will repeat inspection when requested and assured that the Work has been substantially
completed.
2. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final acceptance.
1.4 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment,
complete the following. List exceptions in the request.
I. Submit record drawings, maintenance manuals and similar final record information.
2. Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted
and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products and completed operations where required.
3. Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the Contract Sum.
4. Submit a certified copy of the Architect's final inspection list of items to be completed orcomected,stating
that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance, and the list has been endorsed
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Project Closeout 01700
0376-72.989 1 May 2004
and dated by the Architect.
5. Submit final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of the date
of Substantial Completion, or when the Owner took possession of and responsibility for corresponding
elements of the Work.
6. Submit consent of surety to final payment.
7. Submit a final liquidated damages settlement statement.
8. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.
B. Reinspection Procedure: The Architect will reinspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the Work, including
inspection list items from earlier inspections, has been completed, except items whose completion has been delayed
because of circumstances acceptable to the Architect.
1. Upon completion of reinspection, the Architect will prepare a certificate of final acceptance, or advise the
Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for
final acceptance.
2. If necessary, reinspection will be repeated.
1.5 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS
A. General: Do not use record documents for construction purposes; protect from deterioration and loss in a secure,
fire -resistive location; provide access to record documents for the Architect's reference during normal working
hours.
B. Record Drawings: Maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black line white -prints of Contract Drawings and
Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies substantially from the
Work as originally shown. Mark whichever drawing is most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately;
where Shop Drawings are used, record a cross-reference at the corresponding location on the Contract Drawings.
Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date.
1. Mark record sets with red erasable pencil; use other colors to distinguish between variations in separate
categories of the Work.
2. Mark new information that is important to the Owner, but was not shown on Contract Drawings or Shop
Drawings.
3. Note related Change Order numbers where applicable.
4. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets, bind with durable paper cover sheets, and print
suitable titles, dates and other identification on the cover of each set.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: General cleaning during construction is required by the General Conditions and included in
Section "Temporary Facilities".
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to
the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with
manufacturer's instructions.
C. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for Certification of Substantial
Completion.
L Remove labels that are not permanent labels.
2. Clean transparentmaterials, including mirrors and glass in doors andwindows. Remove glazing compound -
andothersubstancesthatarenotice-able vision -obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and
other damaged transparent materials.
3. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard -surfaced finishes to a dust -free condition, free ofstains, films and
similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original reflective condition. Leave
concrete floors broom clean. Vacuum carpeted surfaces.
4. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and other substances.
Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures and lamps.
5. Clean the site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, litter and other foreign substances.
Sweep paved areas broom clean; remove stains, spills and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are
neither paved nor planted, to a smooth even -textured surface.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Project Closeout 01700
0376-72-989 2 May 2004
D. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of the Work
during construction.
E. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities havingjurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning.
Do not bum waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Owner's property. Do not
discharge volatile, harmful or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from
the site and dispose of in a lawful manner.
1. Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated Work have become the
Owner's property, arrange for disposition of these materials as directed.
END OF SECTION 01700
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Project Closeout 01700
0376-72-989 3 May 2004
SECTION 01740 - WARRANTIES
PARTI- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for warranties required by the Contract Documents,
including manufacturers standard warranties on products and special warranties.
1. Refer to the General Conditions for terms of the Contractor's period for correction of the Work.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
I. Division I Section "Submittals" specifies procedures for submitting warranties.
2. Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout" specifies contract closeout procedures.
3. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified
to be warranted.
4. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to Owner are specified elsewhere
in the Contract Documents.
C. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the
Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties
with the Contractor.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Standard product warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular
products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner.
B. Special warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to extend time
limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner.
1.4 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS
A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted construction, remove and replace
construction that has been damaged as a result of such failure or must be removed and replaced to provide access for
correction of warranted construction.
B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or
rebuilding,reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty
with an equitable adjustment for depreciation.
C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an
acceptable condition complying with requirements ofthe Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost
of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through
a portion of its anticipated useful service life.
D. Owner's Recourse: Expressed warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties and shall not limit the
duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise available under the law. Expressed warranty periods shall not be
interpreted as limitations on the time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies.
I. Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selection toproductswith
warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.
E. Where the Contract Documents require a special warranty, or similar commitment on the Work or part of the Work, the
Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept the Work, until the Contractor presents evidence that entities required to
countersign such commitments are willing to do so.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit written warranties to the Architect prior to the date certified for Substantial Completion. If the Architect's
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Warranties 01740
0376.72-989 1 May 2004
Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial
Completion for the Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the Architect.
1. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the Owner, by separate agreement
with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties to the Architect within
15 days of completion of that designated portion of the Work.
B. When the Contract Documents require the Contractor, or the Contractor and a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer
to execute a special warranty, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for
execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Owner, through the Architect, for approval prior to final
execution.
I. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for
submitting special warranties.
2. When warranted construction requires operation and maintenance manuals, provide additional copies of each
required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 LIST OF WARRANTIES
A. Schedule: Provide warranties on products and installations as specified in the following Sections:
I. Steel Roofing: Section 07411 - Manufactured Roof Panels
2. Flush Wood Doors: Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors.
3. See Division 15 and 16 for additional warranties required.
END OF SECTION 01740
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Warranties 01740
0376.72-989 2 May 2004
DIVISION 2
SITE WORK
02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
SECTION 02070 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PARTI- GENERAL
L 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of a building.
2. Patching and repairs.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 1 Section "Summary of Work" for use of the building and phasing requirements.
2. Division I Section "Cutting and Patching" for cutting and patching procedures for selective demolition
operations.
3. Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls" for temporary utilities, temporary
construction and support facilities, temporary security and protection facilities, and environmental protection
measures for selective demolition operations.
4. Division I Section "Contract Closeout" for record document requirements.
5. Division 15 Sections for cutting, patching, or relocating mechanical items.
6. Division 16 Sections for cutting, patching, or relocating electrical items.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Remove and legally dispose of items except those indicated to be reinstalled, salvaged, or to remain the
Owner's property.
B. Remove and Reinstall: Remove items indicated; clean, service, and otherwise prepare them for reuse; store and protect
against damage. Reinstall items in locations indicated.
C. Existing to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition.
When permitted by the Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective
demolition and then cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations.
1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain the Owner's
property, demolished materials shall become the Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site with further
disposition at the Contractor's option.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before starting selective demolition.
Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Owner will occupy portions of the building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective
demolition so that Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities
that will affect Owner's operations.
B. Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of buildings to be selectively demolished.
I. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.
C. Asbestos: It is not expected that asbestos will be encountered in the Work. Materials containing asbestos will be abated
prior to beginning the work of this project. If any materials suspected of containing asbestos are encountered, do not
disturb the materials. Immediately notify the Architect and the Owner.
D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Selective Demolition 02070
0376-72-989 1 May 2004
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's on-site operations.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 REPAIR MATERIALS
A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials.
I. Where identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials that visually
match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
B. Surveyexisting conditions and correlatewith requirements indicated to determine extent ofselective demolition required.
C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged.
D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with the intended function or design are
encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of the conflict. Promptly submit a written report to the
Architect.
E. Survey the condition of the building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency
or unplanned collapse of any portion of the structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition.
F. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES
A. Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition
operations.
I . Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities, except when authorized in writing by
Owner and authorities havingjurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities,
as acceptable to Owner and to governing authorities.
a. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during changeover.
2. Where utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide bypass connections to
maintain continuity of service to other parts of the building before proceeding with selective demolition.
3. Cutoff pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal the remaining portion
of pipe or conduit after bypassing.
B. Utility Requirements: Refer to Division 15 and 16 Sections for shutting off, disconnecting, removing, and sealing or
capping utility services. Do not start selective demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been
completed and verified in writing.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Conduct demolition operations and remove debris to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from
Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if
required by governing regulations.
B. Conduct demolition operations to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
Ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area.
I. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between demolition and removal of existing construction,
on exterior surfaces and new construction to ensure that no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or
interior areas.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Selective Demolition 02070
0376.72-989 2 May 2004
2. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain and are exposed during selective
demolition operations.
3. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.
C. Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas
from fumes and noise.
3.4 POLLUTION CONTROLS
A. Use temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit the spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing
environmental protection regulations.
B. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.
L Remove debris from elevated portions of building bychute, hoist, orotherdevicethatwillconveydebristograde
level.
C. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return
adjacent areas to condition existing before start of selective demolition.
3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
A. Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use
methods required to complete Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:
1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely
to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. To minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces, use
hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover
openings to remain.
2. Cut ordrill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.
3. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. On-site storage or sale of removed items is prohibited.
4. Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing before start of selective demolition
operations.
B. Remove resilient floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations of the Resilient Floor Covering Institute's
(RFCI) "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings" and Addendum.
1. Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the methods recommended
by RFCI.
C. Remove air-conditioning equipment without releasing refrigerants.
3.6 PATCHING AND REPAIRS
A. Promptly patch and repair holes and damaged surfaces caused to adjacent construction by selective demolition
operations.
B. Patching is specified in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."
C. Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials.
1. Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls to remain with an approved masonry patching
material, applied according to manufacturer's printed recommendations.
D. Restore exposed finishes ofpatched areas and extend finish restoration into adjoining construction to remain in a manner
that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing. - - -
E. Patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space where demolished walls or partitions extend one finished area
into another. Provide a flush and even surface of uniform color and appearance.
I. Closely match texture and finish of existing adjacent surface.
2. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances.
3. Where patching smooth painted surfaces, extend final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the
patch after the surface has received primer and second coat.
4. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color
and appearance.
5. Inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation, where feasible.
F. Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even -plane surface of uniform appearance.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Selective Demolition 02070
0376-72-989 3 May 2004
3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Sweep the building broom clean on completion of selective demolition operation.
B. Change filters on air -handling equipment on completion of selective demolition operations.
END OF SECTION 02070
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Selective Demolition 02070
0376-72-989 4 May 2004
DIVISION 3
CONCRETE
03300 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PARTI-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifiiescast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcing, mix design, placement procedures, and
finishes.
B. Cast -in-place concrete includes the following:
1. Slabs -on -grade.
2. Footings amd foundations.
3. Miscellaneous Concrete not specified elsewhere.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes, specifications, and standards, except where
more stringent requirements are shown or specified:
I. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings."
2. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete."
3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice."
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM MATERIALS
A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, metal, metal -framed plywood faced, or other acceptable panel -type
materials to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize
number ofjoints and to conform to joint system shown on drawings.
B. Form Release Agent: Provide commercial formulation form release agent with a maximum of 350 mg/I volatile
organic compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair
subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.
2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.
B. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, plain, cold -drawn steel.
C. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar -type supports complying with CRSI specifications.
I. For slabs -on -grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support
chair legs. i
I
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
1. Use one brand of cement throughout Project unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.
B. Normal -Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 and as specified. Provide aggregates from a single source for exposed
concrete. Maximum aggregate size shall be t inch.
I . For exposed exterior surfaces, do not use fine or coarse aggregates that contain substances that cause spalling.
2. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 that have been shown to produce concrete of adequate
strength and durability by special tests or actual service may be used when acceptable to Architect.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Cast -In -Place Concrete 03300
0376-72-989 1 May 2004
C. Water: Potable.
D. Admixtures, General: Provide concrete admixtures that contain not more than 0.1 percent chloride ions.
E. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that maybe incorporated in the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Air-Tite, Cormix Construction Chemicals.
b. Air -Mix or Perma-Air, Euclid Chemical Co.
C. Darex AEA or Daravair, W.R. Grace & Co.
d. MB -VR or Micro -Air, Master Builders, Inc.
C. Sealtight AEA, W.R. Meadows, Inc.
f. Sika AER, Sika Corp.
F. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that maybe incorporated in the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Chemtard, ChemMasters Corp.
b. PSI N, Cormix Construction Chemicals.
C. Eucon WR -75, Euclid Chemical Co.
d. WRDA, W.R. Grace & Co.
e. Pozzolith Normal or Polyheed, Master Builders, Inc.
f. Metco W.R., Metalcrete Industries.
g. Prokrete-N, Prokrete Industries.
It. Plastocrete 161, Sika Corp.
G. Liquid Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: Liquid -type membrane -forming curing compound complying with
ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A. Moisture loss not more than 0.55 kg/sq. meter when applied at 200 sq. ft./gal.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. A -H 3 Way Sealer, Anti -Hydro Co., Inc.
b. Spartan -Cote, The Burke Co.
C. Conspec #I, Conspec Marketing & Mfg. Co.
d. Sealco 309, Cormix Construction Chemicals.
e. Day -Chem Cure and Seal, Dayton Superior Corp.
f. Eucocure, Euclid Chemical Co.
g. Horn Clear Seal, A.C. Horn, Inc.
h. L&M Cure R, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
i. Masterkure, Master Builders, Inc.
j. CS -309, W.R. Meadows, Inc.
k. Seal N Kure, Metalcrete Industries.
I. Kure -Ni -Seal, Sonnebom-Chemrex.
in. Stontop CS2, Stonhard, Inc.
n. Conftlm, Master Builders, Inc.
o. Waterhold, Metalcrete Industries.
H. Underlayment Compound: Free-flowing, self -leveling, pumpable, cement -based compound for applications from 1
inch thick to feathered edges.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that maybe incorporated in the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. K-15, Ardex, Inc.
b. Self -Leveling Wear Topping, W.R. Bonsal Co.
C. Conflow, Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co.
d. Corlevel, Cormix Construction Chemicals.
C. LevelLayer II, Dayton Superior Corp.
f. Flo -Top, Euclid Chemical Co.
g. Gyp -Crete, Gyp -Crete Corp.
It. Levelex, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
i. Underlayment I 10, Master Builders, Inc.
j. Stoncrete ULI, Stonhard, Inc.
k. Concrete Top, Symons Corp.
1. Thoro Underlayment Self -Leveling, Thoro System Products.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Cast -In -Place Concrete 03300
0376-72-989 2 May 2004
I. Bonding Agent: Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base.
I. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that maybe incorporated in the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Acrylic or Styrene Butadiene:
1) Acrylic Bondcrete, The Burke Co.
2) Strongbond, Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co.
3) Day -Chem Ad Bond, Dayton Superior Corp.
4) SBR Latex, Euclid Chemical Co.
5) Daraweld C, W.R. Grace & Co.
6) Homweld, A.C. Hom, Inc.
7) Everbond, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
8) Acryl-Set, Master Builders Inc.
9) Intralok, W.R. Meadows, Inc.
10) Acrylpave, Metalcrete Industries.
11) Sonocrete, Sonnebom-Chemrex.
12) Stonlock LB2, Stonhard, Inc.
13) Strong Bond, Symons Corp.
J. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two -component material suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. Provide material
type, grade, and class to suit Project requirements.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Burke Epoxy M.V., The Burke Co.
b. Spec -Bond 100, Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co.
C. Resi-Bond (J-58), Dayton Superior.
d. Euco Epoxy System #452 or #620, Euclid Chemical Co.
C. Epoxtite Binder 2390, A.C. Hom, Inc.
f. Epabond, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
g. Concresive Standard Liquid, Master Builders, Inc.
It. Rezi-Weld 1000, W.R. Meadows, Inc.
i. Metco Hi -Mod Epoxy, Metalcrete Industries.
j. Sikadur 32 Hi -Mod, Sika Corp.
k. Stonset LV5, Stonhard, Inc.
I. R-600 Series, Symons Corp.
K. Sealer
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements. Products that may be incorporated in the Work include
the following:
a. L & M Construction Chemicals; "Seal Hard".
2.4 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGNING MIXES
A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratorytrial batch or field experience methods
as specified in ACI 301. For the trial batch method, use an independent testing agency acceptable to Architect for
preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.
I. Do not use the same testing agency for field quality control testing.
B. Submit written reports to Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of
Work. Do not begin concrete production until proposed mix designs have been reviewed by Architect.
C. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties as indicated on drawings and schedules:
1. Exterior concrete exposed to weather.
b. 4000 -psi, 28 -day compressive strength; water -cement ratio, 0.45 maximum (air -entrained). 564
pounds of cement minimum per cubic yard.
2. Concrete not exposed to weather.
a. 3000 -psi, 28 -day compressive strength; water -cement ratio, 0.53 maximum (non -air -entrained). 517
pounds of cement minimum per cubic yard.
D. Water -Cement Ratio: Provide concrete for following conditions with maximum water -cement (W/C) ratios as follows:
1. Subjected to freezing and thawing: W/C 0.45.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Cast -In -Place Concrete 03300
0376-72-989 3 May 2004
E. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement as follows:
1. Ramps, slabs, and sloping surfaces: Not more than 3 inches.
2. Reinforced foundation systems: Not less than t inch and not more than 3 inches.
3. Other concrete: Not more than 4 inches.
F. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when characteristics of
materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant, as accepted by Architect. Laboratory
test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by Architect before using in
Work.
2.5 ADMIXTURES
A. Use water -reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.
B. Use air -entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete unless otherwise indicated. Add air -entraining admixture
at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having total air content with a tolerance
of plus or minus 1-1/2 percent within the following limits:
1. Concrete stmctures and slabs exposed to freezing and thawing, deicer chemicals, or hydraulic pressure:
a. 6.0 percent (severe exposure)
2. Other concrete not exposed to freezing, thawing, or hydraulic pressure, or to receive a surface hardener: 2 to
4 percent air.
C. Use admixtures for water reduction in strict compliance with manufacturer's directions.
2.6 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as specified.
1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery
time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing
and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Coordinate the installation ofjoint materials, and other related materials with placement of forms and reinforcing steel.
3.2 FORMS
A. General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads
that might be applied until concrete structure can support such loads. Construct formwork so concrete members and
structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances
and surface irregularities complying with the following ACI 347 limits:
1. Provide Class A tolerances for concrete surfaces exposed to view.
2. Provide Class C tolerances for other concrete surfaces.
B. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown and to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level,
and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings,
rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required in the
Work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide backup at joints to prevent
cement paste from leaking.
C. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or
wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where
slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses,
and the like for easy removal.
D. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork toaccommodate work ofothertrades. Determine
size and location of openings, recesses, and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely
support items built into forms.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Cast -In -Place Concrete 03300
0376.72-989 4 May 2004
E. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood,
sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before placing concrete. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as
required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.
3.3 PLACING REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars,"
for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports and as specified.
1. Avoiding cutting or puncturing vapor retarder/barrier during reinforcement placement and concreting
operations. Repair damages before placing concrete,
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond with
concrete.
C. Accurately position,support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcing by metal
chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as approved by Architect.
D. Place reinforcement to maintain minimum coverages as indicated for concrete protection. Arrange, space, and securely
tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends
are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
3.4 JOINTS
A. Construction Joints: Locate and install constructionjoints so they do not impair strength or appearance ofthe structure,
as acceptable to Architect.
B. Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints
except as indicated otherwise. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements.
C. Use bonding agent on existing concrete surfaces that will bejoined with fresh concrete.
3.5 INSTALLING EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. General: Set and build into formwork anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is
attached to or supported by cast -in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions
provided by suppliers of items to be attached.
B. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms,bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and
contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips using strike -off templates or
compacting -type screeds.
3.6 PREPARING FORM SURFACES
A. General: Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved, nonresidual, low-VOC, form -coating compound before
placing reinforcement.
B. Do not allow excess form -coating material to accumulate in forms or come into contact with in-place concrete surfaces
against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions.
3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be _
embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work.
B. General: Comply with ACI 304,"Guide for Measuring,Mixing,Transporting, and Placing Concrete," and as specified.
C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has
hardened sufficiently to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide
construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation at its final location.
D. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches and in a manner
to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding
layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Cast -In -Place Concrete 03300
0376-72-989 5 May 2004
I. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand -spading, rodding, or
tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete complying with ACI 309.
2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly
spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate
placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete
that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete
and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix to segregate.
E. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limitsofconstmction
joints, until completing placement of a panel or section.
1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations sothatconereteisthoroughly worked around reinforcement,
other embedded items and into comers.
2. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth
surface free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations.
3. Maintain reinforcing in proper position on chairs during concrete placement.
F. Cold -Weather Placement: Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical
damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.
G. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates
before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg
F (27 deg C) at point of placement.
I. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or
on subgrade containing frozen materials.
2. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators
unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.
.H. Hot -Weather Placement: When hot weather conditions exist that would impair quality and strength of concrete, place
concrete complying with ACI 305 and as specified.
I. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement to below 90 deg F (32
deg C). Mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water
equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is
Contractor's option.
2. Cover reinforcing steel with water -soaked burlap ifitbecomestoohot,so that steel temperature will not exceed
the ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.
3. Fog spray forms,reinforcing steel, and subgradejust before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform
without puddles or dry areas.
4. Use water -reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse
placing conditions, as acceptable to Architect.
3.8 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise
shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete as specified to blend with
in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete Work.
3.9 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. In hot, dry,
and windy weather protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during finishing operations with an
evaporation -control material. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but
before power floating and troweling. - - -
B. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather
permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days.
C. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by curing compound, by moist curing, by moisture -retaining cover curing, or by
combining these methods, as specified.
D. Provide moisture curing by the following methods:
1. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water.
2. Use continuous water -fog spray.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Cast -In -Place Concrete 03300
0376-72-989 6 May 2004
3. Cover concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturate cover with water, and keep
continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with a 4 -inch
lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
E. Provide moisture -retaining cover curing as follows:
I . Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width
with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair
any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.
F. Apply curing compound on exposed interior slabs and on exterior slabs, walks, and curbs as follows:
I. Apply curing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours
and after surface water sheen has disappeared). Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or
roller according to manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after
initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
2. Use membrane curing compounds that will not affect surfaces to be covered with finish materials applied
directly to concrete.
G. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other
similar surfaces, by moist curing with forms in place for the full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms
are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable.
H. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, including slabs, floor topping, and other flat surfaces, by
applying the appropriate curing method.
I. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive finish flooring with a moisture -retaining cover, unless otherwise
directed.
3.10 FLOOR SEALER
A. Apply sealer on warehouse floors in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
3.11 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removing fortes,
when acceptable to Architect.
B. Mix dry -pack mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing allo. 16 mesh sieve,
using only enough water as required for handling and placing.
I. Cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, voids over 1/4 inch in any dimension, and holes left by tie rods and bolts
down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth less than 1 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the
concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush -coat the area to be patched with bonding
agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried.
2. For surfaces exposed to view, blend white Portland cement and standard Portland cement so that, when dry,
patching mortar will match surrounding color. Provide test areas at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture
and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike -off slightly higher than
surrounding surface.
C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to
satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles,
honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discoloration that cannot be
removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes and fill with dry -pack mortar or precast cement cone plugs secured in
place with bonding agent.
I. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, containing defects that affect the concrete's durability. If
defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the concrete.
D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and verify surface
tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as specified. Test unformed surfaces
sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness by using a template having the required slope.
1. Repair finished unformed surfaces containing defects that affect the concrete's durability. Surface defects
include crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to the reinforcement or completely
through nonreinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, and other
objectionable conditions.
2. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14 days.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Cast -In -Place Concrete 03300
0376-72-989 7 May 2004
3. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations
by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent
concrete. Proprietary underlayment compounds may be used when acceptable to Architect.
4. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding I inch in diameter, by cutting out
and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel
with at least 3/4 -inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and
apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as
original concrete. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner
as adjacent concrete.
E. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter by dry -pack method. Groove top of cracks
and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and
apply bonding compound. Place dry -pack before bonding agent has dried. Compact dry -pack mixture in place and
finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
Perform structural repairs with prior approval of Architect for method and procedure, using specified epoxy adhesive
and mortar.
G. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of Architect.
END OF SECTION 03300
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Cast -In -Place Concrete 03300
0376-72-989 8 May 2004
DIVISION 4
(NOT USED)
DIVISION 5
METALS
(NOT USED)
DIVISION 6
WOOD AND PLASTICS
06105 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY
06200 FINISH CARPENTRY
SECTION 06105 - MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY
PARTI- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
I. Wood blocking and nailers.
2. Plywood backing panels.
B. Related Sections include the following:
Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry" for nonstructural carpentry items exposed to view and not specified in
another Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension.
B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
1. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
2. W WPA: Western Wood Products Association.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1
A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks
and under coverings.
B. Deliver interior wood materials that are to be exposed to view only after building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work
other than painting is dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and humidity at occupancy levels.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide
lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules -writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review.
Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules
Melaleuca Call Center - RexburgMiscellaneous Carpentry06105
0376-72.9891 May 2004
indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content
specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.
3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 WOOD -PRESERVATIVE -TREATED MATERIALS
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is
continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX).
Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or
chromium.
B. Kiln -dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does
not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.
D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection
with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.
3. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs -on -grade.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including
the following:
I. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
{
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture
content of any species.
C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and the following species and grades:
Melaleuca Call Center - RexburgMiscellaneous Carpentry06105
0376-72-9892May 2004
2.4
2.5
Western woods, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or W WPA.
D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be
used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.
E. For blocking and trailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other
defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.
F. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent.
over nails and damage to paneling.
PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C -D Plugged, in thickness indicated or, if
not indicated, not less than 1/2 -inch nominal thickness.
FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material
and manufacture.
1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure -preservative treated, or in area of high
relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot -dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C. Power -Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B 18.6.1.
E. Screws for Fastening to Cold -Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length
as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.
F. Lag Bolts: ASME B 18.2.1.
G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, Flat
washers.
H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without
failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load
imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent
testing and inspecting agency.
I. Material: Carbon -steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.
2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group I
or 2.
METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.
2. Harlen Metal Products, Inc.
3. KC Metals Products, Inc.
4. Simpson Strong -Tie Co., Inc.
5. Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co., Inc.
6. USP Structural Connectors.
manufacturers offering products that may be
Melaleuca Call Center - RexburgMiscellaneous Carpentry06105
0376-72-9893May 2004
B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot -dip, zinc -coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating
designation.
1. Use for interior locations where stainless steel is not indicated.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other
construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate trailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with
requirements for attaching other construction.
B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.
1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking
does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c.
F. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials
to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use
with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
G. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative -treated lumber.
1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.
2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.
H. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:
NES NER-272 for power -driven fasteners.
2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
I. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where
opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install
fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated.
3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for
true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise
indicated.
END OF SECTION 06105
Melaleuca Call Center - RexburgMiscellaneous Carpentry06105
0376-72-9894May 2004
SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY
PARTI-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division -i
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Definition: Finish carpentry includes carpentry work which is exposed to view, is non-structural, and which is not
specified as part of other sections.
B. Types of finish carpentry work in this section include:
I. Installation of building specialties specified in Division 10.
2. Installation of finish hardware specified in Division 08.
C. Rough carpentry is specified in another Division 06 section.
D. Builders Hardware and wood doors are specified in Division -8 sections.
E. Architectural woodwork is specified in another Division -6 section.
1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect finish carpentry materials during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and
deterioration.
B. Do not deliver finish carpentry materials, until painting, wet work, grinding and similar operations which could
damage, soil or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If, due to unforeseen
circumstances, finish carpentry materials must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas
meeting requirements specified for installation areas.
1.4 ]OB CONDITIONS
A. Conditioning: Installer shall advise Contractor of temperature and humidity requirements for finish carpentry
installation areas. Do not install finish carpentry until required temperature and relative humidity have been
stabilized and will be maintained in installation areas.
B. Maintain temperature and humidity in installation area as required to maintain moisture content of installed finish
carpentry within a 1.0 percent tolerance of optimum moisture content, from date of installation through remainder
of construction period. The fabricator of woodwork shall determine optimum moisture content and required
temperature and humidity conditions.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCT QUALITY STANDARDS
A. Softwood Lumber Standards: Comply with PS 20 and with applicable grading rules of the respective grading and
inspecting agency for the species and product indicated.
B. Plywood Standard: Comply with PS I/ANSI A199.I.
C. Hardwood Lumber Standard: Comply with National Hardwood Lumber Association (NHLA) rules.
D. Hardwood Plywood Standard: Comply with PS 51.
E. Glued -up Lumber Standard: Comply with PS 56.
Melaleuca Call Center - RexburgFinisb Carpentry06200
0376-72-9891May 2004
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detailed dimensions. Provide dressed or worked and
dressed lumber, as applicable, manufactured to the actual sizes as required by PS 20 or to actual sizes and
pattern as shown, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Moisture Content of Softwood Lumber: Provide kiln -dried (KD) lumber having a moisture content from
time of manufacture until time of installation not greater than values required by the applicable grading rules
of the respective grading and inspecting agency for the species and product indicated.
3. Moisture Content of Hardwood Lumber: Provide kiln -dried (KD) lumber having a moisture content from
time of manufacture until time of installation within the ranges required in the referenced woodworking
standard.
4. Lumber for Transparent Finish (Stained or Clear): Use pieces made of solid lumber stock.
5. Lumber for Painted Finish: At Contractor's option, use pieces which are either glued -up lumber or made of
solid lumber stock.
B. Miscellaneous Materials:
1. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide nails, screws and other anchoring devised of the type, size, material, and
finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible, and
complying with applicable Federal Specifications.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Condition wood materials to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to installing.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Discard units of material which are unsound, warped, bowed twisted, improperly treated, not adequately seasoned
or too small to fabricate work with minimum ofjoints or optimum jointing arrangements, or which are of defective
manufacture with respect to surfaces, sizes or patterns.
B. Install the work plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims.
Install to a tolerance of 1/8" in T-0" for plumb and level countertops; and with 1/16" maximum offset in flush
adjoining 1/8" maximum offsets in revealed adjoining surfaces.
C. Scribe and cut work to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts.
D. Anchor finish carpentry work to anchorage devices or blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates. Secure
to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a
complete installation. Except where prefrnished matching fasteners heads are required, use fine finishing nail for
exposed nailings, countersunk and filled flush with finished surface, and matching final finish where transparent is
indicated.
3.3 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, FINISHING AND PROTECTION
A. Repair damaged and defective finish carpentry work wherever possible to eliminate defects functionally and
visually; where not possible to repair properly, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean finish carpentry work on exposed and semi -exposed surfaces. Touch-up shop -applied finishes to restore _ ---
damaged or soiled areas.
C. Protection: Installer of finish carpentry work shall advise Contractor of final protection and maintained conditions
necessary to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration at time of acceptance.
END OF SECTION 06200
Melaleuca Call Center - RexburgFinish Carpentry06200
0376-72-9892May 2004
DIVISION 7
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07901 JOINT SEALANTS
SECTION 07901 - JOINT SEALANTS
PARTI-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following locations:
1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces as indicated below:
a. Joints between different materials.
b. Perimeter joints around frames of doors and windows.
C. Otherjoints as indicated.
2. Interiorjoints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffrc surfaces as indicated below:
a. Perimeterjoints of exterior openings where indicated.
b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows.
C. Otherjoints as indicated.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
L Division 7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal" forsealingjoints related to flashing and sheet metal forronfing.
2. Division 8 "Glass and Glazing" for sealants used in glazing.
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that have been produced and installed to establish and to maintain watertight and
airtight continuous seals without causing staining or deterioration ofjoint substrates.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed joint sealant applications similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project that have resulted in construction with a record of successful
in-service performance.
B. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealant Materials: Obtain joint sealant materials from a single manufacturer
for each different product required.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materialsto Projectsite in original unopened containers orbundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product
name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for
multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent their deterioration or
damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation ofjoint sealants under the following conditions:
I. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint sealant
manufacturer.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
B. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation ofjoint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering
with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Joint Sealants 07901
0376-72-989 1 May 2004
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Providejoint scalants,joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and
with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on
testing and field experience.
B. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following:
1. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors for products of type
indicated.
2.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing elastomeric sealants that comply
with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated on each Elastomeric Joint Sealant Data Sheet at end of this
Section, including those requirements referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses.
B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, elastomeric sealants that may be incorporated in the
Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified in each Elastomeric Sealant Data Sheet.
2.3 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard one -part, nonsag, mildew -resistant, paintable latex sealant of formulation
indicated that is recommended for exposed applications on interior and protected exterior locations and that
accommodates indicated percentage change in joint width existing at time of installation without failing either
adhesively or cohesively.
B. Acrylic -Emulsion Sealant: Provide product complying with ASTM C 834 that accommodatesjoint movement of not
more than 5 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 10 percent.
C. Silicone Emulsion Sealant: Provide product complying with ASTM C 834 and, except for weight loss measured per
ASTM C 792, with ASTM C 920 that accommodates joint movement of not more than 25 percent in both extension
and compression for a total of 50 percent.
D. Application: Interiorjoints in field painted surfaces, nollow metal door frames in drywall and all other interiorjoints
not indicated otherwise.
E. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, latexjoint sealants that maybe incorporated in the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Acrylic -Emulsion Sealant:
a. "AC -20," Pecora Corp.
b. "Sonolac," Sonnebom Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc.
C. "Tremco Acrylic Latex 834," Tremco, Inc.
2. Silicone -Emulsion Sealant:
a. "Trade Mate Paintable Glazing Sealant," Dow Coming Corp.
2.4 JOINT SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates,
sealants, primers and otherjoint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on
field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining, nonwaxing, nonextruding strips of Flexible
plastic foam of material indicated below and of size, shape, and density to control sealant depth and otherwise
contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:
1. Closed -cell polyethylene foam, nonabsorbent to liquid water and gas, nonoutgassing in unruptured state.
C. Bond -Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing
sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or joint surfaces at back ofjoint where such adhesion
would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Joint Sealants 07901
0376-72-989 2 May 2004
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended byjoint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant tojoint substrates
indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealant -substrate tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing
materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming in any way joint substrates and
adjacent nonporous surfaces, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants withjoint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements forjoint
configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint sealant performance. Do not proceed with
installation ofjoint sealants until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with
recommendations ofjoint sealant manufacturer and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material ftomjoint substrates that could interfere with adhesion ofjoint sealant, including
dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and
compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water,
surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and similar porous joint substrate surfaces by
brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination ofthese methods to produce aclean,
sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining
from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing outjoints with oil -free compressed air.
3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.
4. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and other nonporous surfaces with
chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering
with adhesion ofjoint sealants.
B. Joint Priming: Primejoint substrates where indicated or where recommended byjoint sealant manufacturer based on
preconstmction joint sealant -substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant
manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas ofjoint sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration
onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise
would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears.
Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbingjoint seal.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable to products and
applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations ofASTM C 1193 for use ofjoint sealants as applicable
to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements:
1. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at position required
to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
a. Do not leave gaps between ends ofjoint fillers.
b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tearjoint fillers.
C. Remove absorbentjoint fillers that have become wet prior to sealant application and replace with dry
material.
D. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully
wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform,
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Joint Sealants 07901
0376-72-989 3 May 2004
cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Install
sealants at the same time sealant backings are installed.
E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool
sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and
adhesion of sealant with sides ofjoint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling
agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.
1. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide flush joint configuration, per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193, where indicated.
a. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints.
3. Provide recessed joint configuration, per Figure 5C in ASTM C 1193, of recess depth and at locations
indicated.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning
materials approved by manufacturers ofjoint sealants and of products in which joints occur.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage
resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of
Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or
deterioratedjoint sealants immediately so that and installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original
work.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Joint Sealants 07901
0376-72-989 4 May 2004
ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANT DATA SHEET
1.1 Elastomeric Joint Sealant Designation: Exterior
1.2 Base Polymer: Neutral -curing silicone
A. Type: S (single component)
B. Grade: NS (nonsag)
C. Class: 25.
1.3 Uses Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic) T (traffic) and NT (nontratHc)
1.4 Used Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, 0.
A. Use 0 Joint Substrates: Coated glass, color anodized aluminum, and galvanized steel.
B. Application: Exterior perimeterjoints of metal frames in exterior walls.
2.0 Available Products:
A. Dow Corning
790
B. GE
Silpruf
C. Sonnebom
Sonolastic Oraniseal
D. Tremco
Spectrem 1
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg
Joint Sealants 07901
0376-72-989
5 May 2004
ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANT DATA SHEET
1.1 Elastomeric Joint Sealant Designation: Interior
2.0 Base Polymer: Acid -curing silicone
A. Type: S (single component)
B. Grade: NS (nonsag)
C. Class: 25.
3.0 Uses Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic)
4.0 Uses Related to Joint Substrates: G, A, and, as applicable tojoint substrates indicated, 0.
A. Use 0 Joint Substrates: Color anodized aluminum, galvanized steel, ceramic tile, and wood.
4.1 Available Products:
A. Dow Coming 786 Mildew Resistant
B. Application: Interiorjoints around fixtures and countertops in toilet rooms.
END'OF SECTION 07901
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Joint Sealants 07901
0376-72-989 6 May 2004
DIVISION 8
DOORS AND WINDOWS
08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08710 DOORHARDWARE
08800 GLASS AND GLAZING
SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PARTI- GENERAL
I.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes steel doors and frames.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware and weatherstripping.
2. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass in steel doors and sidelights.
3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for spot grouting frames in gypsum board partitions.
4. Division 9 Section "Painting" for field painting primed doors and frames.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. Product Data for each type ofdoor and frame specified, including details ofconstruction, materials, dimensions, hardware
preparation, core, label compliance, sound ratings, profiles, and finishes.
C. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of steel doors and frames. Include details of each frame type,
elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements
of door and frame hardware and reinforcements, and details ofjoints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory
items.
D. Door Schedule: Submit schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those
on Contract Drawings.
1. Indicate coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide doors and frames complying with ANSI/SDI 100 "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and
Frames" and as specified.
B. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Units that comply with NFPA 80, are identical to door and frame assemblies tested for
fire -test -response characteristics per ASTM E 152, and are labeled and listed by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard -wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide
additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory -finished doors and frames.
B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items match new
work and are acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed.
C. Store doors and frames at building site undercover. Place units on minimum 4 -inch- (100 -mm-) high wood blocking.
Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If cardboard wrappers on doors
become wet, remove cartons immediately.
Melaleuca Call Center . Rexburg Steel Doors and Frames 08110
0376-72-989 1 May 2004
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following
1. Steel Doors and Frames:
a.
Amweld Building Products, Inc.
b.
Ceco Door Products.
C.
Curries Co.
d.
Fenestra Corp.
e.
Kewanee Corp.
f.
Mesker Door, Inc.
g.
Republic Builders Products.
h.
Steelcraft.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Hot -Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial -quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A 569
(ASTM A 569M).
B. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheets: Carbon steel complying with ASTM A 366 (ASTM A 366M), commercial quality, or
ASTM A 620 (ASTM A 620M), drawing quality, special killed.
C. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc -coated carbon steel complying with ASTM A 526 (ASTM A 526M), commercial quality,
or ASTM A 642 (ASTM A 642M), drawing quality, hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 525, with A 60 or G 60
(ASTM A 525M, with Z 180 or ZF 180) coating designation, mill phosphatized.
D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.0478 -inch- (1.2 -mm-) thick steel sheet; 0.0516 -inch- (1.3 -mm-)
thick galvanized steel where used with galvanized steel frames.
E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where items are to be built into exterior walls, hot -dip
galvanize complying with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable.
2.3 DOORS
A. Steel Doors: Provide 1 -3/4 -inch- (44 -mm-) thick doors of materials and ANSUSDI 100 grades and models specified
below, or as indicated on Drawings or schedules:
1. Interior Doors: Grade I, standard -duty, Model 1, full flush design, minimum 0.0359 -inch- (0.9 -mm-) thick cold-
rolled steel sheet faces.
2. Interior Doors: Grade II, heavy-duty, Model 2, seamless design, minimum 0.0478 -inch- (1.2 -mm-) thick cold-
rolled steel sheet faces.
3. Exterior Doors: Grade 11I, extra heavy-duty, Model 2, seamless design, minimum 0.0635 -inch- (1.6 -mm-) thick
galvanized steel sheet faces.
2.4 FRAMES
A. Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings, according to ANSI/SDI 100,
and of types and styles as shown on Drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate
frames of minimum 0.0478 -inch- (1.2 -mm-) thick cold -rolled steel sheet.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded comers.
2. Form exterior frames from 0.0635 -inch- (1.6 -mm-) thick galvanized steel sheet.
B. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strikejarnbs of single -door frames
and 2 silencers on heads of double -door frames.
C. Plaster Guards: Provide minimum 0.0179 -inch- (0.45 -mm-) thick steel plaster guards or mortar boxes at back of
hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior of openings.
D. Grout: When required in masonry construction, as specified in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry."
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Steel Doors and Frames 08110
0376-72-989 2 May 2004
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects, warp, or buckle. Where
practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory
assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site. Comply with ANSI/SDI 100 requirements.
1. Internal Construction: One of the following manufacturer's standard core materials according to SDI standards:
a. Rigid polyurethane conforming to ASTM C 591 at exterior doors.
b. Rigid polystyrene conforming to ASTM C 578.
2. Clearances: Not more than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at jambs and heads, except not more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm)
between non -fire -rated pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch (19 mm) at bottom.
a. Fire Doors: Provide clearances according to NFPA 80.
B. Fabricate exposed faces ofdoors and panels, including stiles and rails ofnonflush units, from only cold -rolled steel sheet.
C. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold- or hot -rolled steel
sheet.
E. Galvanized Steel Doors, Panels, and Frames: For the following locations, fabricate doors, panels, and frames from
galvanized steel sheet according to SDI 112. Close top and bottom edges of doors flush as an integral part of door
construction or by addition of minimum 0.0635 -inch- (1.6 -mm-) thick galvanized steel channels, with channel webs
placed even with top and bottom edges. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.
1. At exterior locations.
F. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts.
G. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door
hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of SDI 107 and
ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware.
H. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface -applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface -applied hardware may
be done at Project site.
I. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to the Door and Hardware Institute's
(DHI) "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
J. Glazing Stops: Minimum 0.0359 -inch- (0.9 -mm-) thick steel or 0.040 -inch- (1 -mm-) thick aluminum.
1. Provide nonremovable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors for glass, louvers,
and other panels in doors.
2. Provide screw -applied, removable, glazing beads on inside of glass, louvers, and other panels in doors.
2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes.
B. Comply with SSPC-PA I, "Paint Application Specification No. l," for steel sheet finishes.
C. Apply primers and organic finishes to doors and frames after fabrication.
2.7 GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so that surfaces are free of oil or other contaminants.
After cleaning, apply a conversion coating of the type suited to the organic coating applied over it. Clean welds,
mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint specified below to comply with
ASTM A 780.
B. Factory Priming for Field -Painted Finish: Where field painting after installation is indicated, apply air-dried primer
specified below immediately after cleaning and pretreatment.
1. Shop Primer: Zinc -dust, zinc -oxide primer paint complying with performance requirements of FS TT -P-641,
Type I1.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Steel Doors and Frames 08110
0376-72-989 3 May 2004
2.8 STEEL SHEET FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Solvent -clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1 to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other
contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel to comply with
SSPC-SP 5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) or SSPC-SP 8 (Pickling).
B. Pretreatment: Immediately after surface preparation, apply a conversion coating of type suited to organic coating applied
over it.
C. Factory Priming for Field -Painted Finish: Apply shop primer that complies with ANSI A224.1 acceptance criteria, is
compatible with finish paint systems indicated, and has capability to provide a sound foundation for field -applied
topcoats. Apply primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's data, and as specified.
B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position,
plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove
temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
1. Except for frames located in existing concrete or masonry construction, place frames before constructing
enclosing walls and ceilings.
2. At existing concrete or masonry construction, install at least 3 completed opening anchors perjamb adjacent to
hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Set frames and secure to adjacent
construction with bolts and masonry anchorage devices.
3. Install fire -rated frames according to NFPA 80.
C. Door Installation: Fit hollow -metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSUSDI 100.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Prime Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply
touchup of compatible air -drying primer.
B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames.
END OF SECTION 08110
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Steel Doors and Frames 08110
0376-72-989 4 May 2004
SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for swing, sliding,
and folding doors, except special types of unique hardware specified in the same sections as the doors and door
frames on which they are installed.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
I. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for cabinet hardware.
2. Division 8 Section "Stile and Rail Wood Doors" for factory prefitting and factory premachining of doors
for door hardware.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division I Specification sections.
B. Product data including manufacturers' technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation
instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with
requirements.
C. Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand,
function, and finish of door hardware.
1. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated, organize schedule into "hardware sets"
indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following
information:
a. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item.
b. Name and manufacturer of each item.
C. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
d. Location of each hardware set cross referenced to indications on Drawings both on floor plans
and in door and frame schedule.
e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
f. Mounting locations for hardware.
g. Door and frame sizes and materials.
2. Submittal Sequence: Submit final schedule at earliest possible date particularly where acceptance of
hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction
schedule. Include with schedule the product data, samples, shop drawings of other work affected by door
hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of schedule.
D. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door hardware.
Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door
hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type ofhardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, etc.) from a single
manufacturer.
B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities in the
Project's vicinity, that has a record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in
quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that employs an experienced architectural hardware
consultant (AHC) who is available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of
the Work, for consultation.
I. Require supplier to meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final instructions in
writing.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Door Hardware 08710
0376-72-989 1 May 2004
1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until each is
satisfied that count is correct.
B. Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly to place of installation (shop or Project site).
C. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control handling and
installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable so that completion of the Work will not be
delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation.
1.6 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as
needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Meet with Owner's representative to coordinate with and make preparations for future security system.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
L Butts and Hinges:
a. Lawrence Brothers, Inc.
b. McKinney Products Co.
C. Stanley Hardware, Div. Stanley Works.
2. Cylinders and Locks:
a. Schlage Lock, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group. (No Substitutions)
3. Overhead Closers:
a. LCN, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group.
4. Door Stripping and Seals:
a. Hager Hinge Co.
b. National Guard Products, Inc.
C. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d. Reese Enterprises, Inc.
C. Sealeze Corp.
f. Ultra Industries.
g. Zero International, Inc.
5. Thresholds:
a. Hager Hinge Co.
b. National Guard Products, Inc.
C. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d. Reese Enterprises, Inc.
C. Sealeze Corp.
f. Zero International, Inc.
6. Accessories
a. Quality
b. Glynn Johnson
C. Builders Brass Works
2.2 SCHEDULED HARDWARE
A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities ofeach type of finish hardware
are indicated in the "Hardware Schedule" at the end of this Section. Products are identified by using hardware
designation numbers of the following:
I. Manufacturer's Product Designations: The product designation and name of one manufacturer are listed
for each hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Provide either the
product designated or, where more than one manufacturer is specified under the Article
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Door Hardware 08710
0376-72-989 2 May 2004
"Manufacturers" in Part 2 for each hardware type, the comparable product of one of the other
manufacturers that complies with requirements.
2.3 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated using manufacturer's standard
metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than
specified for applicable hardware units for finish designations indicated.
B. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine
screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self -tapping sheet metal screws, except as
specifically indicated.
C. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat -head screws except as otherwise
indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, ifexposed in surfaces
of other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including "prepared for paint" surfaces to
receive painted finish.
D. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the extent no
standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where
bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless their use is the only means ofreinforcing the work
adequately to fasten the hardware securely. Where thm-bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the work, provide
sleeves for each thm-bolt or use sex screw fasteners.
2.4 HINGES, BUTTS, AND PIVOTS
A. Templates: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames,
provide only template -produced units.
I. Screws: Provide Phillips flat -head screws complying with the following requirements:
2. For wood doors install wood screws.
3. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots.
B. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows:
1. Out -Swing Corridor Doors with Locks: Nonremovable pins.
2. Interior Doors: Nonrising pins.
3. Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves.
C. Number offlinges: Provide numberof hinges indicated but not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches
or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30 inches of additional height.
2.5 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A. Review the keying system with the Owner and provide the type required (master, grandmaster or
great -grandmaster), either new or integrated with Owner's existing system.
B. Equip locks with manufacturer's standard 6 -pin tumbler cylinders.
C. Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver.
D. Comply with Owner's instructions for masterkeying and, except as otherwise indicated, provide individual change
key for each lock that is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related locks.
E. Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only.
F. Key Quantity: Fumish 3 change keys for each lock, 5 master keys for each master system, and 5 grandmaster keys
for each grandmaster system.
G. Deliver keys to Owner.
2.6 LOCKS, LATCHES, AND BOLTS
A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended
to protect frame, finished to match hardware set, unless otherwise indicated.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Door Hardware 08710
0376-72-989 3 May 2004
B. Lock Throw: Provide 5/8 -inch minimum throw of latch on pairs of doors. Comply with UL requirements for
throw of bolts and latch bolts on rated fire openings.
I. Provide 1/2 -inch minimum throw of latch for other bored and preassembled types of locks and
3/4 -inch minimum throw of latch for mortise locks. Provide 1 -inch minimum throw for all dead
bolts.
2.7 WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SEALS
A. General: Provide continuous smoke, light, or sound seals on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide
noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated.
B. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and
readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
C. Seals at Jambs and Heads: Provide bumper -type resilient insert and metal retainer strips, surface applied unless
shown as mortised or semimortised, and of following metal, finish, and resilient bumper material:
1. Extruded aluminum with color anodized finish as selected from manufacturers standard color range to
match frames, 0.062 -inch minimum thickness of main walls and flanges.
2. Solid neoprene conforming to MIL R 6855, Class II, Grade 40 for sound seals.
3. Flexible Silicon or Polyurethane hollow bulb or loop insert for weatherstrip.
2.8 THRESHOLDS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide standard metal threshold unit of type, size, and profile as shown
or scheduled.
2.9 HARDWARE FINISHES
A. Match items to the manufacturers standard color and texture finish for the latch and lock sets.
B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other
qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for
the applicable units of hardware.
C. Provide protective lacquer coating on all exposed hardware finishes of brass, bronze, and aluminum, except as
otherwise indicated. The suffix "-NL" is used with standard finish designations to indicate "no lacquer."
D. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are the industry -recognized
standard commercial finishes, except as otherwise noted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, except as specifically indicated
or required to comply with governing regulations and except as otherwise directed by Architect.
I. "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the
Door and Hardware Institute.
2. NW WDA Industry Standard I.S.1.7, "Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors."
B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Where
cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in
another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing
work specified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface -mounted items until finishes have been completed
on the substrates involved.
C. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary
for proper installation and operation.
D. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in
accordance with industry standards.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Door Hardware 08710
0376-72-989 4 May 2004
E. Weatherstripping and Seals: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to the extent
installation requirements are not otherwise indicated.
3.2 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING
A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every
unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made.
1. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space
or area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make final
check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as
necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices
to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.
3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. General: Provide hardware for each door to comply with requirements of Section "Door Hardware," hardware set
numbers indicated in door schedule, and in the following schedule of hardware sets.
1. Hardware sets indicate quantity, item, manufacturer and product designation, size, and finish or color, as
applicable.
2. Lockset Designs: Provide the lockset designs designated below:
a. Lever: Schlage AL Series "Satum" unless otherwise noted.
B. Group One -
Door No's 102.
Exit Device
Sargent
1 ea
Lockset
Schlage
AL50PD 626
Balance of hardware reuse existing including
hinges and
stop.
C. Group Two -
Door No. 104, 107, 108.
1 %2 pr
Hinges
McKinney
TA2714 4%2" x 4'/2" 626
1 ea
Lockset
Schlage
AL70PD 626
t ea
Stop
Quality
302 Series
D. Group Three - Door No. 105.
Reuse existing hardware, including hinges, lockset and stop.
E. Group Four -
192 pr
1 ea
t ea
1 ea
1 ea
1 ea
Door No. I03A and 103B
Hinges
McKinney
Exit Device
Sargent
Threshold
Pemko
Stop
Quality
Door Bottom
Pemko
Weatherstrip
Pemko
F. Group Five- Doors No. 106A, I06B.
I %2 pr Hinges McKinney
1 ea Latchset Schlage
1 ea Stop Quality
END OF SECTION 08710
TA2714 4%2" x 4Y2' 626
8813 LL x 20-057 626
171A
302 Series
315CN
303 AV
TA2714 4V2' x 4%2" 626
AL10S 626
302 Series
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Door Hardware 08710
0376-72-989 5 May 2004
SECTION 08800 - GLASS AND GLAZING
PARTI-GENERAL
L I RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division -1
Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Extent of glass and glazing work is indicated on drawings and schedules.
B. Types of work in this section include glass and glazing for:
1. Borrowed lites units.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:
A. Provide glass and glazing that has been produced, fabricated and installed to withstand normal thermal
movement, wind loading and impact loading (where applicable), without failure including loss or breakage of
glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight, deterioration of glass and glazing materials
and other defects in the work.
B. Normal thermal movement is defined as that resulting from an ambient temperature range of 120 deg. F (67 deg.
C) and from a consequent temperature range Arithing glass and glass framing members of 180 deg. F (100 deg.
C).
C. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal due to other causes than breakage which
results in intrusion ofdirt or moisture, internal condensation or fogging, deterioration ofprotected internal glass
coating, if any, resulting from seal failure, and any other visual evidence of seal failure or performance.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA) "Glazing
Manual" and "Sealant Manual" except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to those
publications for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this section or other referenced
standards.
B. Safety Glazing Standard: Where safety glass is indicated or required by authorities havingjurisdiction, provide
type of products indicated which comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for
category II materials.
C. Single Source Responsibility for Glass: To ensure consistent quality of appearance and performance, provide
materials produced by a single manufacturer or fabricator for each kind and condition of glass indicated and
composed of primary glass obtained from a single source for each type and class required.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Protect glass and glazing materials during delivery, storage and handling to comply with manufacturer's
directions and as required to prevent edge damage to glass, and damage to glass and glazing materials from
effects of moisture including condensation, of temperature changes, of direct exposure to sun, and from other
causes.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are
outside the limits permitted by glazing material manufacturer or whenjoint substrates are wet due to rain, frost,
condensation or other causes.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS:
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Glass and Glazing 08800
0376-72-989 1 May 2004
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:
B. Manufacturers of Clear and Tinted Float Glass:
I. AFG Industries, Inc.
2. Ford Glass Division.
3. Guardian Industries Corp.
4. LOF Glass, Inc.
5. PPG Industries, Inc.
C. Manufacturers of Heat Treated Glass:
L APO Industries, Inc.
2. Ford Glass Division.
3. Guardian Industries Corp.
4. LOF Glass, Inc.
5. PPG Industries, Inc.
2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL:
A. Primary Glass Standard: Provide primary glass which complies with ASTM C 1036 requirements, including
those indicated by reference to type, class, quality, and, if applicable, form, finish, mesh and pattern.
B. Sizes: Fabricate glass to sizes required for glazing openings indicated, with edge clearances and tolerances
complying with recommendations of glass manufacturer. Provide thicknesses indicated or, if not otherwise
indicated, as recommended by glass manufacturer for application indicated.
2.3 PRIMARY GLASS PRODUCTS:
A. Clear Float Glass: Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select).
2.4 HEAT-TREATED GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Uncoated Clear Heat -Treated Float Glass: Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class
I (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select); kind as indicated below:
1. Kind FT (fully tempered) where indicated.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS:
A. Compatibility: Provide materials with proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks as required for compatibility with glazing sealants, 80 to
90 Shore A durometer hardness.
D. Spacers: Neoprene, EPDM orsilicone blocks, orcominuous extrusions, asrequired for compatibility with glazing
sealant, of size, shape and hardness recommend by glass and sealant manufacturers for application indicated.
E. Edge Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks as required for compatibility with glazing sealant, of size and
hardness required to limit lateral movement (side -walking) of glass.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Require Glazier to inspect work of glass framing erector for compliance with manufacturing and installation
tolerances, including those for size, squareness, offsets at comers; for presence and functioning of weep system;
for existence of minimum required face or edge clearances; and for effective sealing joinery. Obtain Glazier's
written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of glazing work. Do not allow glazing work to
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION:
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing. Remove
coatings which are not firmly bonded to substrates. Remove lacquer from metal surfaces where elastomeric
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Glass and Glazing 08800
0376.72.989 2 May 2004
sealants are indicated for use.
3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL:
A. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation; use a rolling back in rotating glass units to
prevent damage to glass comers. Do not impact glass with metal framing. Use suction cups to shift glass units
within openings; do not raise or drift glass with a pry bar. Rotate glass with Flares or bevels along one horizontal
edge which would occur in vicinity of setting blocks so that these are located at top of opening. Remove from
project and dispose of glass units with edge damage or other imperfections of kind that, when installed, weakens
glass and impairs performance and appearance.
B. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by proconstruction
sealant -substrate testing.
3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING:
A. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon installation by use of crossed streamers attached to
framing and held away from glass. Do not apply markers to surfaces of glass. Remove nonpermanent labels and
clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations.If,despitesuch
protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove immediately by method
recommended by glass manufacturer.
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals
during construction, but not less often than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkali deposits or staining.
When examination reveals presence of these forms of residue, remove by method recommended by glass
manufacturer.
D. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways during
construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism.
E. Wash glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections intended to establish date
of substantial completion in each area of project. Wash glass by method of recommended by glass manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 08800
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Glass and Glazing 08800
0376-72.989 3 May 2004
DIVISION 9
FINISHES
09111 NON -LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING
09250 GYPSUM BOARD
09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
09660 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
09680 CARPET
09900 PAINTING
SECTION 09111 - NON -LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING
PART l - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division l
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes non -load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications:
1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, etc.).
2. Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: For fire -resistance -rated assemblies that incorporate non -load-bearing steel framing,
provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an
independent testing agency.
B. STC -Rated Assemblies: For STC -rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in
assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 NON -LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Protective Coating: manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant zinc coating, unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch unless noted otherwise.
B. Slip -Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide the following:
I. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition
framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width
to accommodate depth of studs.
a. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into
the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
I) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiTrack VTD Series.
2) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT).
C. Firestop Track: As specified in Division 7 Section "Fire -Resistive Joint Systems."
D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.
1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch.
E. Hat -Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch.
2. Depth: 7/8 inch.
Z -Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch,
minimum bare -metal thickness of 0.0179 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.
2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Non -Load -Bearing Steel Framing 09111
0376-72-989 1 May 2004
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.
I. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties
required to fasten steel members to substrates.
B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide the following:
1. Foam Gasket: Adhesive -backed, closed -cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam
displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow -metal frames, cast -in anchors, and
structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
I. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.
1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.
B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet
accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation
strip between studs and exterior wall.
B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates
above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing
around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.
I. Slip -Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to producejoints at tops
of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.
2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section
(for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to eachjamb stud, with a minimum 1/2 -inch clearance fromjamb
stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.
C. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.
3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings,
unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.
4. Fire -Resistance -Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire -resistance -rated assembly indicated and
support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.
a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire -resistance -rated assembly
indicated.
D. Direct Furring:
1. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder -driven
fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.
E. Z -Furring Members:
I. Erect insulation (specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation") verticallyand hold in place with Z -furring
members spaced 16 inches o.c.
2. Except at exterior comers, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails,
screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder -driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.
3. At exterior comers, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond comer;
on adjacent wall surface, screw -attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior
comers, space second member no more than 12 inches from comer and cut insulation to fit.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Non -Load -Bearing Steel Framing 09111
0376.72.989 2 May 2004
Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane
formed by faces of adjacent framing.
END OF SECTION 09111
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Non -Load -Bearing Steel Framing 09111
0376-72-989 3 May 2004
SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD
PARTI- GENERAL
LI RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior gypsum board.
B. Related Sections include the following:
I. Division 9 Section "Non -Load -Bearing Steel Framing" fornon-structural framing and suspension systems that
support gypsum board.
2. Division 9 painting Sections for primers applied to gypsum board surfaces.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: For fire -resistance -rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to
those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
B. STC -Rated Assemblies: For STC -rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in
assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
1.4 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct
sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written
recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged.
I. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or
irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination
and discoloration.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 PANELS, GENERAL
A. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimizejoints in each area and that correspond with
support system indicated.
2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board
indicated and whichever is more stringent.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. American Gypsum Co.
b. G -P Gypsum.
C. National Gypsum Company.
d. USG Corporation.
B. Type X:
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Gypsum Board 09250
0376-72-989 1 May 2004
I. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
C. Special Type X: Having improved fire resistance over standard Type X, and complying with requirements of
fire -resistance -rated assemblies indicated on Drawings.
1. Thickness: As required by fire -resistance -rated assembly indicated on Drawings.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
D. Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular -type gypsum board.
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum -coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper -faced galvanized steel sheet
2. Shapes:
a. Comerbead.
b. U -Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.
2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds
applied on previous or for successive coats.
I. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting -type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use
drying -type, all-purpose compound.
a. Use setting -type compound for installing paper -faced metal trim accessories.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying -type, all-purpose compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying -type, all-purpose compound.
5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying -type, all-purpose compound.
2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written
recommendations.
B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous
substrate.
1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D
(EPA Method 24).
C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.
2.6 TEXTURE FINISHES
A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer.
B. Aggregate Finish: Water-based, job -mixed, aggregated, drying -type texture finish for spray application.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Wall and Ceiling Spray Texture (Aggregated).
2. Texture: Light stipple as approved by Architect..
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Gypsum Board 09250
0376-72-989 2 May 2004
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow -metal frames and framing, for
compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in
central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/I6 inch
of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board
back -blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical
joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at comers of framed openings.
E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases
braced internally.
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be
accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut
gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8 -inch- widejoints to install sealant.
G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non -load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide
1/4- to 1/2 -inch- wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal
joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges
of stud flanges first.
3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
I. Type X: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Special Type X: Where required for specific fire -resistance -rated assembly indicated.
3. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces.
B. Single -Layer Application
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right
angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing), unless otherwise indicated or
required by fire -resistance -rated assembly, and minimize end joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels.
b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by -
fire -resistance -rated assembly.
3. On Z -furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge
joints over furring members.
4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
C. Multilayer Application:
I. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walWpartitions; apply
face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layerjoints
1 framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layerjoints, unless otherwise indicated or required
by fire -resistance -rated assembly.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing)
with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face -layer joints offset at least one stud or
Melaleuca Call Center- Rexburg Gypsum Board 09250
0376-72-989 3 May 2004
furring member with base -layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly.
Staggerjoints on opposite sides of partitions.
3. On Z -forting members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel
to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member.
Locate edgejoints of base layer over furring members.
4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.
D. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists,
furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations
and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.
3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels.
Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
L Comerbead: Use at outside comers.
2. U -Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface
defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint
compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Preftll open joints and damaged surface areas.
C. Applyjoint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below:
1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.
2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for acoustical tile.
3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections.
3.6 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes.
Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth.
B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture matching
approved mockup and free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns.
C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them
with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these
surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture -finish manufacturer's
written recommendations.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,construction, and other causes during
remainder of the construction period.
B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or
irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination
and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 09250
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Gypsum Board 09250
0376.72-989 4 May 2004
SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PARTI- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes acoustical panel ceilings installed with exposed suspension systems.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
1. Division 15 for grilles, registers, and diffusers in acoustical ceilings.
2. Division 16 for lighting fixtures in acoustical ceilings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified.
C. Samples for verification purposes of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on samples of size indicated
below and of same thickness and material indicated for final unit of Work. Where finishes involve normal color
and texture variations, include sample sets showing full range of variations expected.
1. 12 -inch -square samples of each acoustical panel type, pattern, and color.
2. Set of 12 -inch -long samples of exposed suspension system members, including moldings, for each color and
system type required.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has successfully completed acoustical ceilings similar
in material, design, and extent to those indicated for Project.
B. Fire -Performance Characteristics: Provide acoustical ceilings that are identical to those tested for the following
fire -performance characteristics, per ASTM test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting
organizations acceptable to authorities havingjurisdiction. Identify acoustical ceiling components with appropriate
markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.
1. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested per ASTM E 84 and complying with ASTM E 1264 for
Class A products.
a. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
b. Smoke Developed: 50 or less.
C. Single -Source Responsibility for Ceiling Units: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling unit from a single source with
resources to provide products ofconsistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress
of the Work.
D. Single -Source Responsibility for Suspension System: Obtain each type of suspension system from a single source
with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying
progress of the Work.
E. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical ceiling units and suspension system
components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire -suppression system components (if any), and partition system (if any).
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed
space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other
causes.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09511
0376-72-989 1 May 2004
B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.
C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Space Enclosure: Do not install interior acoustical ceilings until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet -work in
space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient conditions of temperature and
humidity will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
B. Mineral Base Panels - Water Felted, with Painted Finish and Perforated and Fissured Pattern, Non -Fire -Resistance
Rated:
I. "Minaboard Cortega," Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
2. "Hytone Baroque," Celotex Corp.
3. "Auratone Omni," USG Interiors, Inc.
C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Non -Fire -Resistance -Rated Wide -Face Double -Web Steel Suspension Systems:
a.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b.
Chicago Metallic Corporation.
C.
National Rolling Mills, Inc.
d.
USG Interiors, Inc.
2. Edge Moldings:
a.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b.
Chicago Metallic Corporation.
C.
Fry Reglet Corp.
d.
National Rolling Mills, Inc.
e.
USG Interiors, Inc.
2.2 ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS, GENERAL
A. Standard for Acoustical Ceiling Units: Provide manufacturers'standard units ofconfiguration indicated that comply
with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by reference to types, pattems, acoustical ratings, and light 4
reflectances, unless otherwise indicated. !
1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E400 (plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is ff�f
15-3/4 inches [400 mon] away from the test surface) per ASTM E 795.
B. Colors and Pattems: Provide products to match appearance characteristics indicated under each product type.
2.3 MINERAL -BASE PANELS - WATER FELTED
E
A. Type, Form, and Finish: Provide type III, Form 2 units per ASTM E 1264 with painted finish that comply with
pattern and other requirements indicated. j
B. Perforated and Fissured Pattem: Units matching pattern indicated by reference to manufacturers' standard pattern
designations, with other characteristics as follows:
L Color/Light Reflectance Coefficient: White/LR 0.80.
2. Noise Reduction Coefficient: NRC 0.55.
3. Ceiling Sound Transmission Class: CSTC 35.
4. Edge Detail: Square.
5. Size: 24 inches by 48 inches by 5/8 inch and 24 inches by 24 inches by 5/8 inch.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09511
037642-989 2 May 2004
2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A. Standard for Metal Suspension Systems: Provide manufacturer's standard metal suspension systems of types,
structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements and with
UBC Standard 25-2.
B. Finishes and Colors: Provide manufacturer's standard factory -applied finish for type of system indicated.
1. High -Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635 requirements for "Coating Classification for Severe
Environment Performance" where high -humidity finishes are indicated.
C. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class I zinc coating, soft temper.
1. Gage: Provide wire sized so that stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct -Hung),
will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106 -inch diameter (12 gage).
E. Edge Moldings and Trim: Metal or extruded aluminum of types and profiles indicated or, if not indicated,
manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit type of edge detail and suspension system
indicated.
1. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration
exactly.
2.5 NON -FIRE -RESISTANCE -RATED DIRECT -HUNG SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Wide -Face Capped Double -Web Steel Suspension System: Main and cross -runners roll -formed from prepainted
or electrolytic zinc -coated cold -rolled steel sheet, with prefinished 15/16 -inch -wide metal caps on flanges; other
characteristics as follows:
I. Structural Classification: Heavy -Duty System.
2. Cap Material and Finish: Steel or aluminum sheet as standard with manufacturer, painted white.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which ceiling system attaches or abuts, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements specified in this and other sections that affect installation and anchorage of ceiling
system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordination: Fumish layouts for preset inserts, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose installation is specified in
other sections.
I. Fumish concrete inserts and similar devices to other trades for installation well in advance of time needed
for coordination of other work.
B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each
ceiling. Avoid use of less -than -half -width units at borders, and comply with reflected ceiling plans.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install acoustical ceiling systems to comply with installation standard referenced below, per manufacturer's
instructions and CISCA "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
1. Standards for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems: Comply with ASTM C 636 and ASTM E 580 and
UBC Standard 25-2.
B. Arrange acoustical units and orient directionally patterned units in a manner shown by reflected ceiling plans.
C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structural members and as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are
not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09511
0376.72-989 3 May 2004
obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective
means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere
with the location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install
supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental
suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced
standards.
3. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire -tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eyescrews, or other
devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate
or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
4. Space hangers not more than 4'4' o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise
shown, and provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member.
D. Install edge moldings of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges
of acoustical units.
Ld Screw -attach moldings to substrate at intervals not over 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends,
leveling with ceiling suspension system to tolerance of 1/8 inch in IT -0". Miter comers accurately and
connect securely.
E. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspension system, with edges concealed by support of suspension
members. Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at borders and at penetrations.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension members. Comply
with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work that
cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION 09511
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09511
0376-72-989 4 May 2004
SECTION 09653 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PARTI-GENERAL
I.l RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Resilient wall base.
2. Resilient flooring accessories.
3. Resilient carpet accessories.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Tile Flooring."
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's standard sample sets consisting of sections of units showing the full range
of colors and patterns available for each type of product indicated.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who has specialized in installing
resilient products similar to those required for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and color ofproduct specified from one source with resources to provide products
of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened cartons and containers, each bearing names of
product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions.
B. Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained between 50 and 90deg F
(10 and 32 deg C).
C. Move products into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours before installation, unless longer conditioning
period is recommended in writing by manufacturer.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain a temperature of not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C) in spaces to receive
resilient products for at least 48 hours before installation, during installation, and for at least 48 hours after installation,
unless manufacturer's written recommendations specify longer time periods. After postinstallation period, maintain a
temperature of not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C).
B. Do not install products until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Resilient Wall Base and Accessories 09653
0376.72-989 1 May 2004
C. For resilient products installed on traffic surfaces, close spaces to traffic during installation and for time period after
installation recommended in writing by manufacturer.
D. Coordinate resilient product installation with other construction to minimize possibility of damage and soiling during
remainder ofconstruction period. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated for each designation in the
Resilient Wall Base and Accessory Schedule at the end of Part 3.
2.2 RESILIENT WALL BASE
A. Rubber Wall Base: Products shall be vulcanized rubber, type TS, complying with ASTM F-1861 and with requirements
specified in the Resilient Wall Base and Accessory Schedule.
2.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORIES
A. Rubber Accessories: Products complying with requirements specified in the Resilient Wall Base and Accessory
Schedule.
2.4 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland-cement-based formulation provided or
approved by resilient product manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions
indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of resilient products will occur, with Installer present, for
compliance with manufacturer's requirements, including those for maximum moisture content. Verify that substrates
and conditions are satisfactory for resilient product installation and comply with requirements specified. Donotproceed
with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive
resilient products.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes,
and depressions in substrates.
C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that
contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Resilient Wall Base and Accessories 09653
0376-72-989 2 May 2004
D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing resilient products. After cleaning,
examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install resilient products according to manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Apply resilient wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures
in rooms and areas where base is required.
I. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.
2. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with
horizontal and vertical substrates.
3. Do not stretch base during installation.
4. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient wall base with
manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
5. Install premolded outside comers before installing straight pieces.
6. Form inside comers on job, from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible, by cutting an inverted V-shaped
notch in toe of wall base at the point where comer is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce
a snug fit to substrate.
C. Place resilient products so they are butted to adjacent materials and bond to substrates with adhesive. Install reducer
strips at edges of flooring that would otherwise be exposed.
D. Apply resilient products to stairs as indicated and according to manufacturers written installation instructions.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing resilient products:
1. Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by resilient product manufacturers.
2. Sweep or vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly.
3. Do not wash resilient products until after time period recommended by resilient product manufacturer.
4. Damp -mop or sponge resilient products to remove marks and soil.
B. Protect resilient products against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and
placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or
recommended in writing by resilient product manufacturer.
C. Clean resilient products not more than 4 days before dates scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of
Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean products according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.5 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
A. Rubber Wall Base: Where this designation is indicated, provide rubber wall base complying with the following:
I. Products: As follows:
a. Burke Flooring Products, Burke Industries
b. Flexco Division, Textile Rubber Co.
C. Roppe Corporation
d. Thermoplastic rubber base is NOT acceptable.
2. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns produced for
rubber wall base complying with requirements indicated.
3. Style: Cove with top -set toe.
4. Minimum Thickness: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).
5. Height: 4 inches (101.6 mm).
6. Lengths: Coils in lengths standard with manufacturer, but not less than 96 feet (29.26 m).
7. Outside Comers: Premolded.
8. Inside Comers: Job formed.
9. Ends: Premolded.
10. Surface: Smooth.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Resilient Wall Base and Accessories 09653
0376-72-989 3 May 2004
B. Rubber Accessory Molding: Where required, provide rubber accessory molding complying with the following:
I. Available Products: As follows:
a. Burke
b. Flexco
C. Roppe
2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors produced for rubber accessory molding
complying with requirements indicated.
3. Product Description: Carpet edge for glue -down applications. Carpetnosing. Reducer strip for resilient flooring.
Tile and carpetjoiner.
4. Profile and Dimensions: As specified by product designation indicated above.
END OF SECTION 09653
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Resilient Wall Base and Accessories 09653
0376-72-989 4 May 2004
SECTION 09900 - PAINTING
PARTI- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division -1
Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extent of painting work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and as herein specified.
B. Work includes painting and finishing of interior and exterior exposed items and surfaces throughout project, except
as otherwise indicated.
1. Surface preparation, priming and coats of paint specified are in addition to shop -priming and surface
treatment specified under other sections of work.
C. "Paint" as used herein means all coating systems materials including primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers
and fillers,.and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats.
D. Surfaces to be Painted: Except where natural finish of material is specifically noted as a surface not to be painted,
paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designed in "schedules". Where items or surfaces are not
specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or areas. If color or finish is not designated,
Architect will select these from standard colors or finishes available.
E. Following categories of work are not included as part of field -applied finish work.
1. Pre -Finished Items: Unless otherwise indicated, do not include painting when factory -finishing or installer
finishing is specified for such items as (but not limited to) acoustic materials, architectural woodwork and
casework, and finished mechanical and electrical equipment including light fixtures and switchgear.
2. Concealed Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces such as walls or ceilings
in concealed areas and generally inaccessible areas, foundation spaces, furred areas, and pipe spaces.
3. Finished Metal Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, metal surfaces of stainless steel, and similar finished
materials will not require finish painting.
F. Following categories of work are included under other sections of these specifications.
G. Shop Priming: Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of ferrous metal items is included under various sections
for structural steel, metal fabrications, hollow metal work, and similar items.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as finish
coats. Use onlythinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits.
B. Coordination of Work: Review other sections of these specifications in which prime paints are to be provided to
ensure compatibility of total coatings system for various substrates. Upon request from other trades, famish
information or characteristics of finish materials provided for use, to ensure compatible prime coats are used.
1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE:
A. Deliver materials to job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name
and label, and following information:
I. Name or title of material.
2. Fed. Spec. number, if applicable.
3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacturer.
4. Manufacturer's name.
5. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents.
6. Thinning instructions.
7. Color name and number.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Painting 09900
0376-72-989 1 May 2004
B. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers used in storage of paint in a clean
condition, fee of foreign materials and residue.
I. Protect from freezing where necessary. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste
daily. Take all precautions to ensure that workmen and work areas are adequately protected from fire hazards
and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing and application of paints.
1.5 JOB CONDITIONS:
A. Apply water -base paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are
between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed
instructions.
B. Apply solvent -thinned paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are
between 45 deg F (7 deg C) and 95 deg F (35 deg C), unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed
instructions.
C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85%; or to damp or web surfaces;
unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions.
1. Painting may be continued during inclement weather if areas and surfaces to be painted are enclosed and
heated within temperature limits specified by paint manufacturer during application and drying periods.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:
1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Moore)
2. Ponderosa Paint Manufacturer (Ponderosa)
3. Pratt and Lambert (P & L)
4. Spectra -Tone Paint Corp. (Spectra -Tone)
5. The Sherwin-Williams Company (S -W)
6. Fuller O'Brien (Fuller)
2.2 MATERIALS:
A. Material Quality: Provide best quality grade of various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by acceptable
paint materials manufacturers. Materials not displaying manufacturer's identification as a standard, best -grade
product will not be acceptable.
B. Color Pigments: Pure, non -fading, applicable types to suit substrates and service indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Applicator must examine areas and conditions under which painting work is to be applied and notify Contractor in
writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Applicator.
B. Starting of painting work will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within any
particular area.
C. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental to
formation of a durable paint film.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION:
A. General: Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions and as
herein specified, for each particular substrate condition.
1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime as required. Notify Architect in
writing of any anticipated problems in using the specified coating systems with substrates primed by others.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Painting 09900
0376-72-989 2 May 2004
2. Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items in
place and not to be finish- painted, or provide surface -applied protection prior to surface preparation and
painting operations. Remove, if necessary, for complete painting of items and adjacent surfaces. Following
completion of painting of each space or area, reinstall removed items.
3. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil and grease prior to
mechanical cleaning. Program cleaning and painting so that contaminants from cleaning process will notfall
onto wet, newly -painted surfaces.
B. Cementitious Materials: Prepare cementitious surfaces of concrete, concrete block, cement plaster and
cement -asbestos board to be painted by removing efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and by roughening
as required to remove glaze.
t. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be painted by performing appropriate tests. If
surfaces are found to be sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of finish paint, correct this
condition before application of paint. Do not paint over surfaces where moisture content exceeds that
permitted in manufacturer's printed directions.
2. Clean concrete floor surfaces scheduled to be painted with a commercial solution of muriatic acid, or other
etching cleaner, Flush floor with clean water to neutralize acid, and allow to dry before painting.
C. Wood: Clean wood surfaces to be painted of dirt, oil, or other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and
sandpaper, as required. Sandpaper smooth those finished surfaces exposed to view, and dust off. Scrape and clean
small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer, before
application of priming coat. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic
wood -filler. Sandpaper smooth when dried.
I. Prime, stain, or seal wood required to bejob-painted immediately upon delivery to job. Prime edges, ends,
faces, undersides, and backsides of such wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, paneling.
2. When transparent finish is required, use spar varnish for backpriming.
3. Backprime paneling on interior partitions only where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs
on backside.
4. Seal tops, bottoms, and cut-outs of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or equivalent sealer
immediately upon delivery tojob.
D. Ferrous Metals: Clean ferrous surfaces, which are not galvanized or shop -coated, ofoil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale
and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning.
I. Touch-up shop -applied prime coats wherever damaged or bare, where required by other sections of these
specifications. Clean and touch-up with same type shop primer.
3.3 MATERIALS PREPARATION:
A. Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
B. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and
residue.
C. Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and stir as required during application.
Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using.
3.4 APPLICATION:
A. General: Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for
substrate and type of material being applied.
I. Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used.
2. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through final coat of paint, until
paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Give special attention to insure that surfaces, including
edges, comers, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat
surfaces.
3. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms and side edges same as exterior faces, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
5. Omit first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop- primed and touch-up painted, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first -coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated or otherwise prepared
for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.
I. Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has
dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and application
of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Painting 09900
0376.72-989 3 May 2004
C. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate, to
establish a total dry film thickness as indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by coating manufacturer.
D. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to those items exposed in
mechanical equipment rooms and in occupied spaces.
E. Prime Coats: Apply prime coat of material which is required to be painted or finished, and which has not been prime
coated by others.
I . Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat, to
assure a finish coat with no burn -through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.
F. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color,
appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness or other surface
imperfections will not be acceptable.
G. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce glass- smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a
finish free of laps, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface
imperfections.
1. Provide satin finish for final coats, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish or repaint work not
in compliance with specified requirements.
3.5 CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION:
A. Clean -Up: During progress of work, remove from site discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags at end of
each work day.
B. Upon completion of painting work, clean paint -spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper methods of
washing and scraping, using care not to scratch otherwise damage finished surfaces.
C. Protection: Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting and finishing
work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect.
1. Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly -painted finishes. Remove temporary protective
wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of painting operations.
2. At completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore all damaged or defaced surfaces.
3.6 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE:
A. All colors are to be selected by the Architect.
B. General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated.
C. Ferrous Metal:
Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not required on
shop -primed items.
1. Full -Gloss, Alkyd -Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a rust -inhibitive primer.
a. Primer: Rust -inhibitive metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer
to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm).
1)
Devoe: 13101 Mirrolac Rust Penetrating Metal Primer.
2)
Fuller: 621-04 Blox-Rust Alkyd Metal Primer.
3)
Glidden: 5205 Glid-Guard Tank & Structural Primer, Red.
4)
Moore: IronClad Retardo Rust -Inhibitive Paint #163.
5)
PPG: 6-208 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer.
6)
P & L: S 4551 Tech -Gard High Performance Rust -Inhibitor Primer.
7)
Ponderosa: 8066 Progard Dust -Inhibitive Red Oxide Primer.
8)
S -W: Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50N2/B5OW 1.
9)
Spectra -Tone: 097 Red Oxide Primer.
b. First and Second Coats: Full -gloss, exterior, alkyd enamel applied at spreading rate recommended
by
the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm).
1)
Devoe: 70XX Mirrolac Interior/Exterior Alkyd -Urethane Gloss Enamel.
2)
Fuller: 312 -XX Heavy -Duty Industrial Maintenance Enamel.
3)
Glidden: 4500 Series Glid-Guard Alkyd Industrial Enamel.
4)
Moore: Impervo Enamel #133.
5)
PPG: 6-282 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Gloss -Oil Enamel.
6)
P & L: S 4500 Series Tech -Gard Maintenance Gloss Enamel.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg
Painting 09900
0376-72-989
4 May 2004
7) Ponderosa: 3781 Tradition Oil Base.
8) S -W: Industrial Enamel B-54 Series.
3.7 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE:
A. All colors are to be selected by the Architect.
B. General: Provide following paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated.
C. Concrete and Concrete Masonry Units:
I. Gloss Latex Enamel Finish: 2 Coats over filled surface with total dry film thickness not less than 3.5 mils,
. excluding filler coat.
a. Filler Coat: Heavy Duty Latex Block Filler. Apply filler coat at a rate to ensure complete coverage
with pores filled.
l) Moore: Moorcraft Block Filler #153
2) P&L: Primafil.
3) S -W: S -W Heavy Duty Block Filler.
4) Fuller: 520-08 Block Filler.
5) Ponderosa: 5030 Acrylic Latex Block and Filler
b. First and Second Coats: Interior Latex Gloss Enamel.
1) Moore: Ironclad Latex High -Gloss Enamel #308
2) P&L: Aqua -Satin Enamel.
3) S -W: S -W Pro -Mar 200 Latex Gloss Enamel/
4) Fuller: 214 -XX Semi Gloss Latex
5) Ponderosa: 2781 Pearl Gln New Generation Acrylic
D. Gypsum Drywall and Plaster Systems:
I. Semi -Gloss Latex Enamel Finish: 3 coats with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils.
a. First Coat: Interior Latex Base Primer Coat.
l) Moore: Latex Quick -Dry Prime Seal Latex #201.
2) P & L: Pro -Hide Plus Latex Primer.
3) Spectra -Tone 074 PVA Sealer.
4) S -W: ProMar 200 Latex Wall Primer.
5) Fuller: 220.20 Pro -Tech
6) Ponderosa: 5010 Lati-Seal Primer
b. Second and Third Coats: Interior Semi -Gloss Latex Enamel.
1) Moore: Regal Aquaglo 333
2) P & L: Pro -Hide Plus Latex Semi -Gloss.
3) Spectra -Tone 997 Semi -Gloss Latex Enamel.
4) S -W: ProMar 200 Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel.
5) Fuller: 214 -XX Laytex Semi -Gloss.
6) Ponderosa: 2781 Pearl Gln New Generation Acrylic
E. Painted Wood and Metal
1. Gloss Enamel Finish: 3 Coats.
a. First Coat: Interior Enamel Undercoat.
I) Moore: Alkyd Enamel Underbody #345.
2) P & L: Interior Trim Primer.
3) S -W: ProMar 200 Alkyd Undercoater.
4) Spectra-Tone:082 Combo Primer,
5) Fuller: 220-07 Alkyd Undercoater.
6) Ponderosa: 5025 Wundercoat Acrylic Enamel Undercoat.
b. Second and Third Coats: Interior Gloss Enamel.
I) Moore: Ironclad Latex High -Gloss Enamel #308.
2) P & L: Aqua -Satin Enamel.
3) S -W: S -W Pro -Mar 200 Latex Gloss Enamel.
4) Spectra-Tone:3527 Acrylic Enamel.
5) Fuller: 213 -XX Latex Gloss Enamel
6) Ponderosa: 2981 Super Glo New Generation Acrylic
F. Stained Woodwork:
I. Stained - Polyurethane Finish: 2 Finish Coats over stain.
a. Stain Coat: Interior Oil Stain
1) Moore: 241 Penetrating Stain
2) P&L: S -Series Tonetic Wood Stain
3) S -W: S -W Oil Stain A-48 Series
4) Fuller: 640 -XX Penchrome Stain
Melateuca Call Center - Rexburg Painting 09900
0376-72.989 5 May 2004
5) Ponderosa: Minwax Oil Stain
b. Second and Third Coats: Polyurethane Varnish
I) S -W: S -W Polyurethane Varnish Satin
2) Spectra -Tone: 892 Polyurethane Dull Stain Finish
3) Fuller: 652-01 Polyurethane
4) Ponderosa: Minwax Satin Polyurethane
END OF SECTION 09900
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Painting 09900
0376-72-989 6 May 2004
DIVISION 10
SPECIALITIES
10520 FIRE -PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
10655 ACCORDION FOLDING PARTITIONS
5) Ponderosa: Minwax Oil Stain
b. Second and Third Coats: Polyurethane Varnish
1) S -W: S -W Polyurethane Varnish Satin
2) Spectra -Tone: 892 Polyurethane Dull Stain Finish
3) Fuller: 652-01 Polyurethane
4) Ponderosa: Minwax Satin Polyurethane
END OF SECTION 09900
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Painting 09900
0376-72-989 6 May 2004
SECTION 10520 - FIRE -PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PARTI- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
I. Portable fire extinguishers.
2. Fire -protection cabinets for the following:
a. Portable fire extinguishers.
3. Fire -protection accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. ProductData: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions ofindividual components and profiles, and
finishes for fire -protection specialties.
1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification.
2. Cabinets: Include roughing -in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to
surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range
of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of cabinet finish indicated.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed cabinet finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below
and of same thickness and material indicated for the Work. If finishes involve normal color and texture variations,
include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected.
I. Size: 6 -by -6 -inch- (150 -by -150 -mm-) square Samples.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and cabinets through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Standard for Portable Fire
Extinguishers."
C. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size of cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated and provided are
accommodated.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
I. Portable Fire Extinguishers:
a. Amerex Corporation.
b. Ansul Incorporated.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Fire -Protection Specialties 10520
0376.72-989 1 May 2004
C. J.L. Industries, Inc.
d. Kidde: Walter Kidde, The Fire Extinguisher Co.
C. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
f. Potter -Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc.
2. Fire -Protection Cabinets:
a. J.L. Industries, Inc.
b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
C. Potter -Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheet: Carbon steel, complying with ASTM A 366/A 366M, commercial quality, stretcher leveled,
temper rolled.
B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated, and as follows:
I. Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
C. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666/A 666M, Type 302 or Type 304 alloy.
2.3 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each cabinet and other locations indicated.
B, Multipurpose Dry -Chemical Type: UL -rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10 -lb (4.5 -kg) nominal capacity, in enameled -steel container.
2.4 FIRE -PROTECTION CABINETS
A. Cabinet Construction: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet
type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.
t. Cabinet Metal: Enameled -steel sheet.
2. Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet.
B. Cabinet Type: Suitable for the following:
1. Fire extinguisher.
C. Cabinet Mounting: Suitable for the following mounting conditions:
1. Semirecessed: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of shallow depth to suit style of trim indicated.
D. Cabinet Trim Style: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with comers mitered, welded, and ground smooth.
Exposed Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeterdoor frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with
exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).
a. Rolled -Edge Trim: 2 -1/2 -inch (64 -mm) backbend depth.
E. Cabinet Trim Material: Manufacturer's standard, as follows:
1. Same metal and finish as door.
F. Door Material: Manufacturer's standard, as follows:
I. Steel sheet.
G. Door Glazing: Manufacturer's standard, as follows:
I. Break Glass: Clear float glass, ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class I, Quality q3, 1.5 nun, single strength.
H. Door Style: Manufacturers standard design, as follows:
I. Break glass panel.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Fire -Protection Specialties 10520
0376-72-989 2 May 2004
I. Door Construction: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, of materials indicated, and coordinated with
cabinet types and trim styles selected.
1. Provide minimum 1/2 -inch- (13 -mm-) thick door frames, fabricated with tubular stiles and rails, and
hollow -metal design.
2. Provide inside latch and lock for break -glass panels.
J. Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard door -operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style,
and door material and style indicated. Provide either lever handle with cam -action latch, or exposed or concealed door
pull and friction latch. Provide concealed or continuous -type hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturers standard steel, designed to secure extinguisher, of sizes required for types and
capacities of extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked -enamel finish.
1. Provide brackets for extinguishers not located in cabinets.
B. Door Locks: Provide cylinder lock, with all cabinets keyed alike.
C. Identification: Provide lettering to comply with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, color, size, spacing, and
location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
L Identify bracket -mounted extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to
wall surface.
2. Identify fire extinguisher in cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" applied to door.
a. Application Process: Silk-screened.
b. .Lettering Color: Red.
C. Orientation: Vertical.
2.6 COLORS AND TEXTURES
A. Colors and Textures: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for these characteristics.
2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for
applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering
before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within
one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in
appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or
installed to minimize contrast.
D. Cabinet and Door Finishes: Provide manufacturer's standard baked -enamel paint for the following:
1. Exterior of cabinets and doors, except for those surfaces indicated to receive another finish.
2. Interior of cabinets and doors.
2.8 STEEL FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, grease, mill scale, rust, and other contaminants that could impair paint
bond using manufacturer's standard methods.
B. Baked -Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two -coat,
baked -enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's written
instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm).
I. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Fire -Protection Specialties 10520
0376-72-989 3 May 2004
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing -in for hose valves, hose racks, and cabinets to verify actual locations of piping connections before
cabinet installation.
B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed and semirecessed cabinets are to
be installed.
C. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.
I. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing fire -protection specialties.
B. Install in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Prepare recesses for cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.
2. Fasten mounting brackets to structure and cabinets, square and plumb.
3. Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
A. Adjust cabinet doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B. Refinish or replace cabinets and doors damaged during installation.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that cabinets and doors are without damage or deterioration
at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 10520
Melaleuca Call Center- Rexburg Fire -Protection Specialties 10520
0376.72-989 4 May 2004
SECTION 10655 - ACCORDION FOLDING PARTITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Manually operated, accordion folding partitions.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. NIC: Noise Isolation Class.
B. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.
C. NVLAP: National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program.
D. STC: Sound Transmission Class.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Acoustical Performance: Provide accordion folding partitions tested by a qualified testing agency for the following
acoustical properties according to test methods indicated:
1. Sound Transmission Requirements: Accordion folding partition assembly tested in a laboratory for sound
transmission loss performance according to ASTM E 90, determined by ASTM E 413, and rated for not less than
the STC indicated.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed
by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
2. Indicate storage and operating clearances. Indicate location and installation requirements for hardware and track,
blocking, and direction of travel.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated
with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:
I. Suspended ceiling components.
2. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached.
3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
4. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:
a. Lighting fixtures.
b. Air outlets and inlets.
C. Speakers.
d. Sprinklers.
e. Access panels.
D. Setting Drawings: For embedded items and cutouts required in other work.
E. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish, covering, or facing indicated.
1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection.
2. Fabric: Full width by not less than 36 -inch- long section of fabric from dye lot to be used for the Work, with
specified treatments applied. Show complete pattern repeat.
3. Facing Material: Manufacturer's standard -size unit, not less than 3 inches square.
4. Edge Material: Not less than full width by 3 inches long.
5. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard exposed door -operating device.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Accordion Folding Partitions 10655
0376-72-989 1 May 2004
Maintenance Data: For accordion folding partitions to include in maintenance manuals.
1. Finish facings and finishes for exposed trim and accessories. Include precautions for cleaning materials and
methods that could be detrimental to finishes and performance.
2. Seals, hardware, track, carriers, and other operating components.
G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify accordion folding partition openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturers standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of
accordion folding partitions that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Faulty operation of accordion folding partitions.
b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal wear.
2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Modemfold, Inc.; Audio Wall Model ISM.
2. Won -Door Corporation;Durasound.
2.2 ACCORDION FOLDING PARTITIONS
A. Construction: Provide pantograph or hinged -section, accordion folding frame supporting acoustical core and decorative
facing/cover, supported by overhead suspension system, designed for horizontal extension and retraction, and reinforced
for hardware attachment. Securely attach sound -insulating core and facing/cover to frame. Fabricate partitions rigid;
level; plumb; aligned, with tight joints and uniform appearance; and free of deformation and surface and finish
irregularities.
1. STC: Not less than 36.
B. Dimensions: Fabricate accordion folding partitions, from manufacturer's standard sizes, to form an assembled system
of dimensions indicated on Drawings and verified by field measurements.
1. Stacking Depth: 13/4 inch per lineal foot of full extended partition maximum, not includingjamb and lead post.
C. Trim: Manufacturer's standard trim with decorative, protective finish.
D. Tiebacks: As required to maintain accordion folding partitions in stacked position.
2.3 SEALS AND POSTS
A. General: Provide types of acoustical seals and posts indicated that produce accordion folding partitions complying with
acoustical performance requirements and the following:
I. Seals and posts made from materials and in profiles that minimize sound leakage.
2. Seals and posts fitting tight at contact surfaces and sealing continuously between adjacent accordion folding
partitions and between partition perimeter and adjacent surfaces, when accordion folding partition is extended
and closed.
B. Perimeter Seals and Closures: Manufacturer's standard vinyl or neoprene vertical seals, horizontal top and bottom seals,
and closures for lead posts and jambs.
C. Posts and Jambs: Steel or aluminum; formed with deep -nesting and interlocking interfaces and air -release vents and
fabricated to ensure rigidity for accordion folding partition.
I. Lead Posts: For single partition, one post, latching at leading edge.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Accordion Folding Partitions 10655
0376-72-989 2 May 2004
2.4 HARDWARE
A. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard manually operated pulls and latches as required to operate accordion folding
partitions and as follows; with decorative, protective finish:
1. Latch: Operable from both sides of closed partitions.
2.5 FINISH FACING
A. General: Provide finish facings that comply with indicated fire -test -response characteristics; factory attached or applied
to accordion folding partitions over acoustical core with appropriate backing, using concealed fasteners; designed to be
field replaceable.
1. Apply facings free of air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects, with no gaps or overlaps. Horizontal
seams are not permitted. Tightly secure and conceal raw and selvage edges of facing for finished appearance.
2. Where facings with directional, repeating, or matching grain are indicated, mark facing top and attach facing in
same direction.
3. Color/Pattem: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
B. Vinyl Film: Manufacturer's standard.
2.6 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Suspension Tracks: Steel or aluminum with adjustable steel hanger rods for overhead support, designed for type of
operation,size, and weight of accordion folding partition indicated. Size track to support partition operation and storage
without damage to suspension system, accordion folding partitions, or adjacent construction. Limit track deflection,
independent of structural support, to no more than 80 percent of bottom clearance. Provide a continuous system of track
sections and accessories to accommodate configuration and layout indicated for partition operation and storage.
1. Track: Recessed parallel tracks.
a. Head Closure Trim: Integral with track for protecting overhead surfaces; with factory -applied,
decorative, protective finish.
b. Head Closure Trim and Track Channel Pocket: For protecting overhead surfaces and enclosing overhead
track opening; with factory -applied, decorative, protective finish.
B. Carriers: Trolley system as required for size and weight of partition and for easy, quiet operation; with manufacturer's
standard ball-bearing carriers at lead post and manufacturers standard ball-bearing carriers at intermediate panel supports.
1. Wheels: Manufacturer's standard.
C. Track Switches and Accessories: As required for type of operation, storage, track configuration, and layout indicated
for accordion folding partition, and compatible with partition assembly specified. Fabricate track switches from steel
or aluminum.
1. Center carrier stop.
D. Aluminum Finish: Mill finish or manufacturer's standard, factory -applied, decorative finish, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Steel Finish: Factory -applied, corrosion -resistant, protective coating, unless otherwise indicated.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine flooring, structural support, and opening, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of accordion folding partitions. - -- --- -
I. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with accordion folding partition manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Install accordion folding partitions and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust accordion folding partitions to operate smoothly, without warping or binding. Lubricate hardware and other
moving parts.
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Accordion Folding Partitions 10655
0376-72-989 3 May 2004
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean soiled surfaces of accordion folding partitions, to remove dust, loose fibers, fingerprints, adhesives, and other
foreign materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and
maintain accordion folding partitions.
END OF SECTION 10655
Melaleuca Call Center - Rexburg Accordion Folding Partitions 10655
0376-72-989 4 May 2004
DIVISION 11
(NOT USED)
DIVISION 12
FURNISHINGS
(NOT USED)
DIVISIONS 13, 14
(NOT USED)
DIVISION 15
MECHANICAL
15055 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
15200 DEMOLITION AND REPAIR
15301 WET PIPE FIRE SPRINKLER PROTECTION SYSTEM
15412 SOIL, WASTE, & VENT PIPING SYSTEMS
15489 NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS
15617 GAS FIRED UNIT HEATERS
15647 ELECTRIC RADIANT WALL HEATERS
15801 ROOFTOP HEATING -COOLING UNIT
15891 LOW-PRESSURE STEEL DUCTWORK
15892 FLEX DUCT
15896 DUCT LINING
15940 AIR OUTLETS & INLETS
15997 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL
SECTION 15055 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART1-GENERAL
Ll RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Furnish labor, materials, and equipment necessary for completion of work as described in Contract Documents.
B. It is the intent of these specifications that the systems specified herein are to be complete and operational before being
turned over to the owner. During the bidding process, the contractor is to ask questions or call to the engineer's attention
any items that are not shown or may be required to make the system complete and operational. Once the project is bid
and the contractor has accepted the contract, it is his responsibility to famish and install all equipment and parts necessary
to provide a complete and operational system without additional cost to the owner.
C. Furnish and install fire stopping materials to seal penetrations through fire rated structures and draft stops.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Substitutions: By specific designation and description, standards are established for specialties and equipment. Other
makes of specialties and equipment of equal quality will be considered provided such proposed substitutions are
submitted to the Architect for his approval, complete with specification data showing how it meets the specifications,
at least 5 working days prior to bid opening. A list of approved substitutions will be published as an addendum.
I. Submit a single copy of Manufacturer's catalog data including Manufacturer's complete specification for each
proposed substitution.
2. The Architect or Engineer is to be the solejudge as to the quality of any material offered m an equal.
B. Product Data, Shop Drawings: Within 30 days after award of contract, submit 10 sets of Manufacturers catalog data
for each manufactured item.
L Literature shall include enough information to show complete compliance with Contract Document
requirements.
2. Mark literature to indicate specific item with applicable data underlined.
3. Information shall include but not be limited to capacities, ratings, type of material used, guarantee, and such
dimensions as are necessary to check space requirements.
4. When accepted, submittal shall be an addition to Contract Documents and shall be in equal force. No variation
shall be permitted.
S. Even though the submittals have been accepted by the Engineer, it does not relieve the contractor from meeting
all of the requirements of the plans and specifications and providing a complete and operational system.
C. Drawings ofRecord: One complete sets of blue line mechanical drawings shall be provided for the purpose of showing
a complete picture of the work as actually installed.
1. These drawings shall serve as work progress report sheets. Contractor shall make notations neat and legible
therein daily as the work proceeds.
2. The drawings shall be kept at thejob at a location designated by the Mechanical Engineer.
3. At completion of the project these "as -built" drawings shall be signed by the Contractor, dated, and returned to
the Architect.
D. Operating Instructions and Service Manual: The Mechanical Contractor shall prepare 2 copies of an Operation and
Maintenance Manual for all mechanical systems and equipment used in this project. Manuals shall be bound in
hard -backed binders and the front cover and spine of each binder shall indicate the name and location of the project. Use
plastic tab indexes for all sections. Provide a section for each different type of equipment item. The following items
shall be included in the manual, together with any other pertinent data. This list is not complete and is to be used as a
guide.
I. Provide a master index at the beginning of the manual showing all items included.
2. The first section of the manual shall contain:
a. Names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Mechanical Engineer, Electrical Engineer,
General Contractor, Plumbi ng Contractor, Sheet Metal Contractor, and Temperature Control Contractor.
b. List of Suppliers which shall include a complete list of each piece of equipment used with the name,
address, and telephone number of vendor.
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 15055
0376-72.989 1 Basic Mechanical Requirements
C. General Description of Systems including -
1) Location of all major equipment
2) Description of the various mechanical systems
3) Description of operation and control of the mechanical systems
4) Suggested maintenance schedule
d. Copy of contractor's written warranty
3. Provide a copy of approved submittal literature for each piece of equipment.
4. Provide maintenance and operation literature published by the manufacturer for each piece of equipment which
includes: oiling, lubrication and greasing data; belt sizes, types and lengths; wiring diagrams; step-by-step
procedure to follow in putting each piece of mechanical equipment in operation.
5. Include parts numbers of all replaceable items.
6. Provide control diagram and operation sequence, along with labeling of control piping and instruments to match
diagram.
7. Include a valve chart indicating valve locations.
8. Include air balance and/or water balance reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
1. Perform work in accordance with applicable provisions of local and state Plumbing Code, Gas Ordinances, and
adoptions thereof. Provide materials and labor necessary to comply with rules, regulations, and ordinances.
2. In case of differences between building codes, state laws, local ordinances, utility company regulations, and
Contract Documents, the most stringent shall govern. Promptly notify Architect in writing of such differences.
B. Applicable Specifications: Referenced specifications, standards, and publications shall be of the issues in effect on date
of Advertisement for Bid.
I. "Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Guide' published by the American Society of Heating and Air
Conditioning Engineers.
2. "Engineering Standards" published by the Heating, Piping, and Air Conditioning Contractors National
Association.
3. "International Building Code", "International Mechanical Code', and "International Fire Code" as published by
the International Conference of Building Officials.
4. Uniform Plumbing Code as published by the International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials.
5. "National Electrical Code" as published by the National Fire Protection Association.
C. Identification: Motor and equipment nameplates as well as applicable UL and AGA labels shall be in place when Project
is fumed over to Owner.
1.5 INSPECTIONS AND PERMITS
A. Pay for permits, fees, or charges for inspection or other services. Local and state codes and ordinances must be properly
executed without expense to Owner and are considered as minimum requirements. Local and state codes and ordinances
do not relieve the Contractor from work shown that exceeds minimum requirements.
1.6 ADDITIONAL WORK:
A. Design is based on equipment as described in the drawing equipment schedule. Any change in foundation bases,
electrical wiring, conduit connections, piping, controls and openings required by alternate equipment submitted and
approved shall be paid for by this division. All work shall be in accordance with the requirements of the applicable
sections.
PART 2 - NOT USED
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Site Inspection:
I. Examinepremises and understand theconditions which may affect performanceof work of this Division before
submitting proposals for this work.
2. No subsequent allowance for time or money will beconsidered for any consequence related to failure to examine
site conditions.
B. Drawings:
1. Mechanical drawings show general arrangement of piping,ductwork,equipment, etc, and do not attempt to show
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 15055
0376-72-989 2 Basic Mechanical Requirements
complete details of building construction which affect installation. This Contractor shall refer toarchitectural,
structural, and electrical drawings for additional building detail which affect installation of his work.
a. Follow mechanical drawings as closely as actual building construction and work of other trades will
permit.
b. No extra payments will be allowed where piping and/or ductwork must be offset to avoid other work or
where minor changes are necessary to facilitate installation.
C. Everything shown on the mechanical drawings shall be the responsibility of Mechanical Contractor
unless specifically noted otherwise.
2. Consider architectural and structural drawings part of this work insofar as these drawings furnish information
relating to design and construction of building. These drawings take precedence over mechanical drawings.
3. Because of small scale of mechanical drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and accessories
which may be required. Investigate structural and finish conditions affecting this work and arrange work
accordingly, providing such fittings, valves, and accessories required to meet conditions. Do not scale drawings
for locations of equipment or piping. Refer to large scale dimensioned drawings for exact locations.
C. Insure that items to be furnished fit space available. Make necessary field measurements to ascertain space requirements
including those for connections and furnish and install equipment of size and shape so final installation shall suit true
intent and meaning of Contract Documents.
1. If approval is received to use other than specified items, responsibility for specified capacities and insuring that
items to be furnished will fit space available lies with this Division.
2. If non-specified equipment is used and it will not fitjob site conditions, this Contractor assumes responsibility
for replacement with items named in Contract Documents.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Cut carefully to minimize necessity for repairs to existing work. Do not cut beams, columns, or trusses.
1. Patch and repair walls, floors, ceilings, and roofs with materials of same quality and appearance as adjacent
surfaces unless otherwise shown. Surface finishes shall exactly match existing finishes of same materials.
2. Each Section of this Division shall bear expense of cutting, patching, repairing, and replacing of work of other
Sections required because of its fault, error, tardiness, or because of damage done by it.
3. Cutting,patching, repairing, and replacing pavements,sidewalks,roads, and curbs to permit installation of work
of this Division is responsibility of Section installing work.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Arrange pipes, ducts, andequipmentto permit ready access to valves, unions, traps, starters, motors, control components,
and to clear openings of doors and access panels.
3.4 STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF MATERIALS:
A. Provide storage space for storage of materials and assume complete responsibility forlosses dueto any cause whatsoever.
Storage shall not interfere with traffic conditions in any public thoroughfare.
B. Protect completed work, work underway, and materials against loss or damage.
C. Close pipe openings with caps or plugs during installation. Cover fixtures and equipment and protect against dirt, or
injury caused by water, chemical, or mechanical accident.
3.5 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
A. Perform necessary excavation of whatever substance encountered for proper laying of all pipes and underground ducts.
1. Excavated materials not required for fill shall be removed from site as directed by Engineer.
2. Excavation shall be carred low enough to allow a minimum coverage over underground piping of 5'-0" or to
be below local frost level.
3. Excess excavation below required level shall be backfilled at Contractor's expense with earth, sand, or gravel
as directed by Engineer. Tamp ground thoroughly.
4. Ground adjacent to all excavations shall be graded to prevent water running into excavated areas.
B. Backfill pipe trenches and allow for settlement.
1. Backfill shall be mechanically compacted to same density as surrounding undisturbed earth.
2. Cinders shall not be used in backfilling where steel or iron pipe is used.
3. No backfilling shall be done until installation has been approved by the Engineer.
3.6 COOPERATION
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 15055
0376-72-989 3 Basic Mechanical Requirements
A. Cooperate with other crafts in coordination of work. Promptly respond when notified that construction is ready for
installation of work under Division 15000. Contractor will be held responsible for any delays which might be caused
by his negligence or failure to cooperate with the other Contractors or crafts.
3.7 SUPERVISION
A. Provide a competent superintendent in charge of the work at all times. Anyone found incompetent shall be removed at
once and replaced by someone satisfactory, when requested by the Architect.
3.8 INSTALLATION CHECK:
A. An experienced, competent, and authorized representative of the manufacturer or supplier of each item of equipment
indicated in the equipment schedule shall visit the project to inspect, check, adjust if necessary, and approve the
equipment installation. In each case, the equipment suppliers representative shall be present when the equipment is
placed in operation. The equipment suppliers representative shall revisit the project as often as necessary until all trouble
is corrected and the equipment installation and operation is satisfactory to the Engineer.
B. Each equipment suppliers representative shall famish to the Owner, through the Engineer, a written report certifying
the following:
1. Equipment has been properly installed and lubricated.
2. Equipment is in accurate alignment.
3. Equipment is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts.
4. Equipment has been operated under full load conditions.
5. Equipment operated satisfactorily.
C. All costs for this installation check shall be included in the prices quoted by equipment suppliers.
3.9 CLEANING EQUIPMENT AND PREMISES
A. Properly lubricate equipment before Owner's acceptance.
B. Clean exposed piping, ductwork, equipment, and fixtures. Repair damaged finishes and leave everything in working
order.
C. Remove stickers from fixtures and adjust flush valves.
D. At date of Substantial Completion, air filters shall be new, clean, and approved by Owners representative.
E. Trap elements shall be removed during cleaning and flushing period. Replace trap elements and adjust after cleaning
and flushing period.
3.10 TESTS
A. No piping work, fixtures, or equipment shall be concealed or covered until they have been inspected and approved by
the inspector. Notify inspector when the work is ready for inspection.
B. All work shall be completely installed, tested as required by Contract Documents and the city and county ordinances and
shall be leak -tight before the inspection is requested.
C. Tests shall be repeated to the satisfaction of those making the inspections.
D. Water piping shall be flushed out, tested at 100 psi and left under pressure of supply main or a minimum of 40 psi for
the balance of the construction period.
3.11 WARRANTEE
A. Contractor shall guarantee work under Division 15 to be free from inherent defects for a period of one year from
acceptance.
I. Contractorshall repair, revise or replace any and all such leaks, failure or inoperativeness due to defective work,
materials, or parts free of charge for a period of one year from final acceptance, provided such defect is not due
to carelessness in operation or maintenance.
2. In addition, the Contractor shall furnish all refrigeration emergency repairs, emergency service and all refrigerant
required due to defective workmanship, materials, or parts for a period of one year from final acceptance at no
cost to the Owner, provided such repairs, service and refrigerant are not caused by lack of proper operation and
maintenance.
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 15055
0376-72-989 4 Basic Mechanical Requirements
B. In addition to warrantee specified in General Conditions, heating, cooling, and plumbing systems are to be free from
noise in operation that may develop from failure to construct system in accordance with Contract Documents.
3.12 SYSTEM START-UP, OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Off -Season Start-up
I. If Substantial Completion inspection occurs during heating season, schedule spring start-up of cooling systems.
If inspection occurs during cooling season, schedule autumn start-up for heating systems.
2. Notify Owner 7 days minimum before scheduled start-up.
3. Time will be allowed to completely service, test, check, and off-season start systems. During allowed time, train
Owner's representatives in operation and maintenance of system.
4. At end of off-season start-up, furnish Owner with letter confirming that above work has been satisfactorily
completed.
B. Owner's Instructions
1. Instruct building maintenance personnel and Owner Representative in operation and maintenance of mechanical
systems utilizing Operation & Maintenance Manual when so doing.
2. Minimum instruction periods shall be as follows -
a. Mechanical - Four hours.
b. Temperature Control - Two hours.
C. Fire Protection - Two hours.
3. Instruction periods shall occur after Substantial Completion inspection when systems are properly working and
before final payment is made.
4. None of these instructional periods shall overlap another.
3.13 PROTECTION
A. Do not run heat pump, air handling units, fan coil units, or otherpieces ofequipment used for moving supply air without
proper air filters installed properly in system.
B. The mechanical systems are not designed to be used for temporary construction heat. See Division 01500 for temporary
heat. If any equipment is to be started prior to testing and substantial completion, such equipment will be returned to
new condition with full one year warranties, from date of substantial completion after any construction use. This
includes, but is not necessarily limited to : Equipment, filters, ductwork, fixtures, etc.
END OF SECTION 15055
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 15055
0376-72-989 5 Basic Mechanical Requirements
SECTION 15200 - DEMOLITION AND REPAIR
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I
Specification Sections, and Section 15055 apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Under this section remove obsolete piping and mechanical equipment and relocate, reconnect or replace existing piping
affected bydemolition ornewconstruction. Remove concealed piping abandoned due to demolition or new construction,
or cap piping Flush with existing surfaces.
1.3 DRAWINGS AND EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. All relocations, reconnections and removals are not necessarily indicated on the drawings. As such, the Contractor shall
make adequate allowance in his proposal for this work as no extra charges will be allowed for these items.
PART 2 - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 , TEMPORARY CONNECTIONS
A. Where existing piping must remain in service to supply occupied areas during construction, provide temporary piping,
connections, and equipment to maintain service to such areas. All shall be performed in a neat and safe manner to
prevent injury to the building or its occupants.
3.2 EXISTING TO BE ABANDONED
A. All Required drilling, cutting, block-outs and demolition work required for the removal and/or installation of the
mechanical system is the responsibility of this Contractor.
B. No joists, beams, girders, trusses or columns shall be cut by any Contractor without written permission from the
Architect.
C. The patching,repair, and finishing to existing or new surfaces is the responsibility of this Contractor, unless specifically
called for under sections of specifications covering these materials.
D. Disconnect all equipment that is to be removed or relocated. Relocate any existing equipment that obstructs new
construction.
3.3 EXISTING TO REMAIN IN USE
A. Where affected by demolition or new construction, relocate, replace, extend, or repair piping and equipment to allow
continued use of same. Use methods and materials as specified for new construction.
3.4 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT REMOVED
A. All obsolete materials, piping, and equipment shall become the property of the Contractor and be removed from the site
promptly.
END OF SECTION 15200
Mclaleuca Call Center June 2004 15200
0376-72-989 1 Demolition and Repair
SECTION 15301 - WET PIPE FIRE SPRINKLER PROTECTION SYSTEM
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1
Specification Sections, and Section 15055 apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install a wet pipe automatic fire sprinkler protection system as described in Contract Documents.
L System shall be installed beginning with connection to theexisting service main located as shown and work shall
include but not necessarily be limited to the following areas:
a. Remodeled existing construction
2. It is mandatory that a site visit be made to inspect existing conditions before submitting bid.
1.3 APPLICABLE CODES AND ORDINANCES
A. The following form a part of this specification:
1. National Fire Protection Association Pamphlets: Standards of the National Fire Protection Association for the
Installation of Sprinkler and Fire Protection Equipment.
a. Pamphlet No. 13, 13D, 13R, 14, and applicable standards.
b. Pamphlet No. 231, 231C and applicable standards.
C. And as approved over this geographical area
2. International Building Code
3. International Fire Code
4. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. Publications: List of Inspected Fire Protection Equipment and Materials.
5. Applicable state and local codes and ordinances pertaining to fire protection systems and equipment.
6. Requirements of State Fire Marshal.
7. Requirements of Local Fire Marshal.
S. Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators.
9. Life Safety Code,
B. Work in Idaho must be done by an Idaho licensed sprinkler contractor and plans submitted to and approved by the office
of the Idaho State Fire Marshal.
C. The contractor shall notify the Idaho State Fire Marshall and the Local Fire Department to witness the test of the fire
sprinkler system.
1.4 VERIFICATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire Sprinkler Contractor shall verify adequacy of the water service to the building.
B. Fire Sprinkler Contractor shall also check with the Local City Fire Marshal, the State Fire Marshal and the Fire Rating
Bureau to determine requirements for the following:
I. Fire hydrants
2. Fire department connections
3. Test connections
4. Exterior and interior piping
5. Water storage and supply
6. Spacing of heads
7. Need for pumps
8. Secondary power source
9. Need for dry pipe system
10. Rating of building
1.5 FEES AND PERMITS
A. Fees or permits required to furnish and install the fire protection system shall be included as part of this Section of the
Contract Documents.
1.6 PIPE SIZING
A. Fire Sprinkler Contractor shall be required to size all piping for this project in accordance with requirements of Chapter
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 15301
0376-72-989 1 Wet Pipe Fire Sprinkler Protection System
7 of National Fire Protection Association Pamphlet No. 13 for Hydraulically Designed Sprinkler Systems.
1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Shop drawings shall be submitted as required by the Mechanical General Conditions.
B. Fire Sprinkler Contractor shall submit complete layouts to underwriters having jurisdiction and the State Fire Marshal
for approval prior to submission to Architect.
1. Particular attention shall be paid in layout to coordination of sprinkler piping and structural system of beams.
Notations shall be made on shop drawings where pipes are required to pass thru beams.
2. Wall sprinkler shall be used in ramp areas where headroom is at a minimum and shall be arranged so as not to
conflict with egress and door swings.
3. Careful coordination shall be given to avoid changing ceiling lighting systems as shown on drawings.
4. Sprinklers must be spaced equally with lights and ceiling diffusers.
5. No fabrication of piping shall bedone until piping drawings are accepted by Mechanical Engineer and State Fire
Marshal.
C. The Fire Protection Sprinkler Contractor shall submit drawings that have been prepared and overseen by a NICET
Certified Engineering Technician in fire protection with a minimum, Level 3 rating, orby a Professional Engineer in fire
protection. This person shall be employed and be a staff member of the Fire Protection Contractor and shall be required
to certify that the drawings are in accordance with the specifications and all regulatory requirements. All drawings shall
be signed by the CET or stamped and signed by the Professional Engineer.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A. Sprinkler Heads:
1. Sprinkler head orifice sizes shall be in accordance with National Fire Protection Association.
2. Any change in spacing must be in straight rows with lights and walls.
3. Sprinkler heads shall be automatic and conventional (spray) type approved by a nationally recognized testing
laboratory.
4. Each head shall have an orifice of nominal 1/2" diameter.
5. Sprinkler heads shall be pendant type where installed above a hung ceiling.
6. Any sprinkler heads in non -conditioned areas or exterior areas shall be protected with antifreeze loop or freeze
proof sprinkler heads as required.
7. Heads injail cell areas or other designated security areas shall be security type heads especially designed for that
use.
B. Protective Guards:
I. Heavy wireprotective guard shall be provided for sprinkler heads located in heavy use areas where damage may
result including, but not limited to:
a. Gyms
b. Locker rooms
C. Multi-purpose rooms
d. Shops
C. Equipment rooms
C. Control Valves:
1. Approved by a nationally recognized testing laboratory.
2. Necessary appurtenances shall be provided at each control valve.
D. Backflow Valves:
1. Furnish and install in each fire sprinkler system, a line size double check valve backflow prevention device to
meet the performance specifications of AW WA, UL, ASSE, Land IAMPO.
2. Installation shall include valves and test ports.
E. Each control valve and alarm check shall have alarm contacts wired to fire alarm panel. Conduit and wire for this
function are specified under the electrical division of Contract Documents. Provide water flow alarm on exterior of
building close to control valve location.
F. Interior Piping, Valves and Fittings:
I. Sprinkler and stand pipe shall meet the requirements of NFPA 13, and have a corrosion resistant ratio greater
than one (1). No threadable thinwall pipe is acceptable.
2. Fittings shall be cast iron, black, screwed, except where flange fittings are required.
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 15301
0376-72-989 2 Wet Pipe Fire Sprinkler Protection System
3. Flanged fittings shall be 150 pound class American Standard.
4. Exposed sprinkler piping shall be thoroughly cleaned and given one shop coat of prime coat paint by Fire
Sprinkler Contractor.
5. Alarm check valves, OS&Y gate valves, indicator gate valves, ordinary check valves, ball drips, vacuum
breakers, pressure relief valves, pressure gauges, angle valves and all other miscellaneous appurtenances required
shall be provided and shall be approved for sprinkler service by a nationally recognized testing laboratory.
6. All pipe hangers and hanger spacings shall be in strict accordance with National Fire Protection Association.
G. Valve Signs:
I. Properly lettered approved metal signs shall be attached to each control valve.
H. Sleeves and Floor, Wall and Ceiling Escutcheon Plates:
I . Provide approved type one-piece or split -type escutcheon plates for sprinkler and standpipe piping passing thm
floors, walls, and ceilings. Plates shall be securely anchored in place with set screws or other approved positive
means.
Areas Subject to Freezing Temperatures:
I. Branches serving these areas may contain a cold weather valve and anti -freeze loop.
2. If an air compressor is used this contractor is responsible for the compressor and all related piping and electrical
conduit, wire and electrical devices to power the compressor.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Work shall be executed and inspected in accord with laws, ordinances, rules and regulations of local authorities having
jurisdiction over such work. Should any change in the drawings or specifications be required to conform to these
ordinances, Fire Sprinkler Contractor shall notify the Architect -Engineer at time of submitting his bid. After entering
into the contract, Fire Sprinkler Contractor shall be held to complete all necessary work to meet local requirements
without expense to Owner.
B. Sprinkler system shall be installed such that spacing of sprinkler heads in relation to ceiling shall not exceed that
permitted for type of ceiling construction involved.
C. General Contractor is required under contract stipulations to leave chases and openings in walls, floors, ceilings,
partitions and beams, etc., provided Fire Sprinkler Contractor shall tumish to General Contractor full information as to
locations, dimensions, etc., of such chases and openings including the provision and proper setting of all sleeves and
other equipment in advance of construction of work so as to cause no delay in work.
D. Should any cutting of walls, floors, ceilings, partitions, etc., be required for proper installation of the work or apparatus
of Fire Sprinkler Contractor due to his failure in giving the General Contractor proper information at time required, such
cutting shall be done at his own expense and in a manner acceptable to Architect -Engineer. All drilling and patching
for anchor bolts, hangers, and other supports shall be subject to approval of Architect -Engineer.
E. Siamese connections and watermains to sprinkler room shall be provided by Fire Sprinkler Contractor and connections
to sprinkler system shall be by Fire Sprinkler Contractor.
F. Conduits and wiring for alarm contacts, power wiring from starter to motor, and starter shall be provided and wired
complete by Electrical Contractor for testing by Fire Sprinkler Contractor. Control wiring from starter to control and
safety devices shall be provided and wired by Fire Sprinkler Contractor.
3.2 FIELD TESTING
A. All portions of the system shall be hydrostatically tested.
B. Flushing of underground piping shall be done in accord with National Fire Protection Association.
C. On completion of the work, system shall be tested by full flow.
I. Each control valve for each sprinkler system shall be tested by use of an inspector's test valve or the application
of heat to sprinkler head most remote from the valve.
2. All alarms and other devices shall be tested.
3. All appliances and equipment for testing shall be furnished by Fire Sprinkler Contractor.
4. Expenses, except for water and electricity used in connection with the tests, shall be defrayed by Fire Sprinkler
Contractor.
5. On completion of tests by Fire Sprinkler Contractor, any defects detected shall be corrected by Fire Sprinkler
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 15301
0376-72-989 3 Wet Pipe Fire Sprinkler Protection System
Contractor at his own expense and additional tests made until systems are proved satisfactory.
6. Fire Sprinkler Contractor shall submit to Architect -Engineer a certificate covering materials and tests, similar
to that specified by National Fire Protection Association, with a request for formal inspection at least two
working days prior to date of inspection. The State and Local Fire Marshalls shall also be notified to witness
this test. At such inspection any or all of required tests shall be repeated as directed by the Architect -Engineer.
D. Final inspection: The Sprinkler Contractor CET or PE responsible foroverseeing this project shall make a complete and
final inspection of the installation, checking out all alarms, valves, piping, seismic bracing, hangers, etc., conduct a final
main drain test on the system, and provide documentation of this final inspection.
END OF SECTION 15301
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 15301
0376-72-959 4 Wet Pipe Fire Sprinkler Protection System
SECTION 15412 - SOIL, WASTE, & VENT PIPING SYSTEMS
PARTI-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I
Specification Sections, and Section 15055 apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install soil, waste, and vent piping systems within building.
B. Perform excavation and backfill required by work of this Section.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 BURIED LINES
A. Service weight, single -hub type cast iron soil pipe and fittings meeting requirements ofASTM A 74-87, "Specification
for Cast Iron Soil Pipe & Fittings".
1. Joint Material:
a. Rubber gaskets meeting requirements of ASTM C 564-88, "Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast
Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings".
b. No hub stainless steel clamps with neoprene gasket.
B. ABS -DW V or PVC -DW V plastic waste pipe and fittings as permitted by state and local plumbing code.
2.2 ABOVE GRADE PIPING & VENT LINES
A. Same as specified for buried lines except no -hub pipe may be used.
B. Vent lines 2-1/2 inches or smaller may be Schedule 40 galvanized steel.
C. Joint Material:
1. Bell & Spigot Pipe - rubber gaskets meeting requirements of ASTM C 564-88, "Specification for Rubber
Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings".
2. No -Hub Pipe - Neoprene gaskets with stainless steel cinch bands.
3. Galvanized Pipe - Screwed Durham tarred drainage fittings, or Victaulic.
4. ABS-DWV solvent weld fittings
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Do not caulk threaded work.
B. Slope horizontal pipe at 1/4 in/ft.
C. Cleanouts:
I. Provide and set full size cleanouts at foot of each riser, and ends of branches from toilets, at points where a
change of direction occurs, on exposed and accessible traps, at points where required to remove rust
accumulation or other obstructions and as shown on plans. Set screw cap in cleanout with graphite paste.
Cleanouts in walls shall be flush and covered with a chrome plated cleanout cover screwed into the cleanout
plug. Cleanouts in floors shall be flush using Zum, Josam, or Wade floor level cleanout fittings. Location of
all cleanouts subject to approval of inspector.
D. Each fixture and appliance discharging water into sanitary sewerorbuilding sewer lines shall haveseal trap in connection
with complete venting system so gasses pass freely to atmosphere with no pressure or syphon condition on water seal.
E. Vent entire waste system to atmosphere. Discharge 14 inches above roof. Join lines together in fewest practicable
number before projecting above roof. Set back vent lines so they will not pierce roof near edge or valley.
F. Use torque wrench to obtain proper tension in cinch bands when using hubless cast iron pipe. Butt ends of pipe against
centering flange of coupling.
Mclaleuca Call Center June 2004 15412
0376-72-989 1 Soil, Waste, & Vent Piping Systems
G. Flash pipes passing through roof with 16 oz sheet copper flashing fitted snugly around pipes and calk between flashing
and pipe with flexible waterproof compound. Flashing base shall be at least 24 inches square.
I. Flashing may be 416 per sq ft lead flashing fitted around pipes and turned down into pipe 1/2 inch with turned
edge hammered against pipe wall.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Before piping is covered, conduct tests for leaks and defective work. Notify Architect prior to testing. Correctleaksand
defective work. Fill waste and vent system to roof level with water, 10 feet minimum, and show no leaks for two hours.
END OF SECTION 15412
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 15412
0376-72-989 2 Soil, Waste, & Vent Piping Systems
SECTION 15489 - NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I
Specification Sections, and Section 15055 apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install gas piping and fittings within building including connection to meter.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
I. Welders shall be certified and bear evidence of certification 30 days prior to commencing work on project. If
there is doubt as to proficiency of welder, Owner's Representative may require welder to take another test. This
shall be done at no cost to Owner. Certification shall be by Pittsburgh Testing Laboratories or other approved
authority.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE
A. Meet requirements of ASTM A 53-89a, "Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black & Hot -Dipped Zinc -Coated Welded &
Seamless".
B. Carbon steel, butt welded, Schedule 40 black steel pipe.
2.2 FITTINGS
A. Black Pipe:
I. Welded forged steel fittings meeting requirements of ASTM A 234-89a, "Specification for Piping Fittings of
Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures", or standard weight malleable
iron screwed.
2.3 VALVES
A. 125 psi bronze body ball valve, UL listed
B. Approved Manufacturers & Models:
I. ConBraCo - "Apollo" series 80-100
2. Jenkins - FIG -30-A
3. Junior - Model T-204
4. McDonald - 3410
5. PGL Corp - "Red Cap" gas ball valve
6. Watts - Model B -6000 -UL
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Pipe installed underground, through air plenums, in walls, and pipes 2.1/2 inches and larger shall have welded fittings
and joints. Other pipe may have screwed or welded fittings.
B. Wrap and lay underground pipe in accordance with local gas utility company regulations and specifications.
C. Install gas cocks on lines serving boilers, furnaces, duct heaters, and water heaters adjacent to boiler, furnace, or heater
on outside of boiler, furnace, or heater cabinet and easily accessible.
D. Do not use flexible pipe connections to boilers, furnaces, duct heaters, or hot water heaters.
E. Install dirt leg with pipe cap, 6 inches long minimum, on each vertical gas drop to heating equipment.
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 15489
0376-72-989 1 Natural Gas Systems
F. Use fittings for changes of direction in pipe and for branch runouts.
G. Paint exterior exposed gas piping with grey paint to match gas meter.
END OF SECTION 15489
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 15489
0376-72-989 2 Natural Gas Systems
SECTION 15617 - GAS FIRED UNIT HEATERS
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I
Specification Sections, and Section 15055 apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install gas fired unit heaters as described in Contract Documents.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Units shall be AGA approved and suitable for natural gas.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Heat exchangers and draft hoods shall be guaranteed by manufacturer for a period of ten years under normal operating
conditions.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 . MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Unit heaters shall have capacities shown on drawings.
B. Heat exchangers shall be 18 gauge aluminized steel with 16 gauge aluminized steel header plates. Seams shall be
electrically welded.
C. Burners:
1. Stainless steel ribbon inserts
2. Fire directly into the heat exchanger tubes
3. Easily opened access panel in the bottom of each heater for removal of individual burners and pilot assembly.
D. Unit heaters (unless connected to ductwork) shall have four-way adjustable louvers for proper air diffusion.
E. Each heater shall be equipped with:
I. 24 volt automatic gas valve
2. Automatic pilot with 100% safety shutoff
3. Snap -acting high limit switch
4. Gas pressure regulator
5. Manual gas cock
F. Blower models shall be equipped with 115/24 volt transformer and fan control.
G. Heaters shall be controlled by a Honeywell T87F room thermostat.
H. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Lennox
2, Reznor
3. Modine
4. Trane
END OF SECTION 15617
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 15617
0376-72-989 1 Gas Fired Unit Heaters
SECTION 15647 - ELECTRIC RADIANT WALL HEATERS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1
Specification Sections, and Section 15055 apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Famish and install wall heaters as described in Contract Documents.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Units shall be UL listed and comply with NEC.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Fan type for recess mounting in wall.
B. 20 gauge minimum sheet metal casing.
C. Heating element shall be encased in steel finned casting and protected by thermal switch.
D. Fan motor shall be heavy duty enclosed and permanently lubricated.
E. Fan shall be precision balanced and fan -motor assembly mounted to be vibration free.
F. Units shall be controlled automatically by integral thermostat when heater is in "ON" position.
G. Heater shall have built-in fan delay.
H. Finish - Baked -on enamel.
1. Approved Manufacturers:
I. Q' Mark AWH-4000 or equal by
2. Berko
3. Thermador
4. Markel
END OF SECTION 15647
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 15647
0376-72-939 1 Electric Radiant Wall Heaters
SECTION 15801 - ROOFTOP HEATING -COOLING UNIT
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I
Specification Sections, and Section 15055 apply to this Section.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Unit shall be AGA certified.
1.3 WARRANTY
A. Provide five-year warranty on compressors.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Unit shall be one piece combination air-to-air DX mechanical cooling system andgas fired heating system complete with
automatic controls.
B; Equipment shall be shipped completely assembled, pre -charged, piped and wired internally ready for field connections.
C. Roof mounting frame shall be furnished and installed. Frame shall be steel and mate to bottom perimeter of equipment.
When flashed into roof, it shall make a unit mounting curb and provide weather-proof duct connection and entry into
conditioning area.
D. Power Saver: (Fresh Air Dampers)
1. Provide complete with all controls and air mixing damper assembly, including fresh air, recirculated air, and
exhaust air dampers.
2. Fresh air section shall be equipped with air filters.
3. Mixing box sections shall contain low leakage dampers with edge seals and inflatable blade seals.
4. Canfab to match existing
E. Cooling System
I. Coils shall be non-ferrous construction with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubes.
2. Condenser coil shall have sub -cooling rows.
3. Compressorshall beresiliently mounted, havebuilt-in 3 -mode crankshaft lubrication, crankcasebeater, discharge
temperature limiter, current and temperature sensing motor overloads.
4. Cooling system shall be protected by high and low pressure switches and compressor timed off contol.
5. Provide with hail guard over condenser coil.
F. Heating System
I. Automatic controls furnished to give 50150 2 -stage operation.
2. Cylindrical tube and drum exchanger constructed of Duraglas coated steel or stainless steel.
3. Stainless steel burner listed for operation at low outdoor air temperatures.
4. Visual inspection of burner flame possible through observation port at rear of heat exchanger.
5. Power vented.
G. Air Movers:
I. Twin centrifugal conditioned air blowers with permanently lubricated ball bearings, adjustable belt drive or
direct drive as shown on drawings.
2. Condenser fans shall be direct driven.
3. Motors shall have inherent protection devices.
H. Frame and Casing
I. Frame shall be welded construction.
2. Casing shall be galvanized panels with baked -on outdoor enamel finish.
3. Entire cabinet shall be insulated with I" thick fiberglass.
4. Provide coil guards on exposed condenser coils.
1. Furnish two sets of 2" throw away filters.
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 15801
0376-72.989 1 Rooftop Heating -Cooling Unit
Provide with 7 -day programmable thermostat equal to Honeywell 7300-2000.
K. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Bryant - to match existing.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide manufacturer's startup and warranty.
END OF SECTION 15801
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 15801
0376-72-989 2 Rooftop Heating -Cooling Unit
SECTION 15891 - LOW-PRESSURE STEEL DUCTWORK
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1
Specification Sections, and Section 15055 apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install above -grade ductwork and related items as described in Contract Documents.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 DUCTS
A. Fabricate of zinc -coated lockfonning quality steel sheets meeting requirements of ASTM 653A/653M, "Specification
for Sheet Steel Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Lock Forming Quality", with G 60 coating.
B. Use of aluminum, non-metallic, or round ducts is not permitted. [Specification writer: Use of aluminum ducts in areas
with high chlorine content (eg.: ventilation for pools, spas, etc.) should be considered on a perjob basis.]
2.2 DUCT JOINTS
A. Ducts with sides up to and including 36 inches shall be as detailed in the SMACNA manual.
B. Duct sizes over 36 inches shall be fabricated using SMACNA T-24 flangejoints or pre -fabricated systems as follows:
I. Ducts with sides over 36 inches to 48 inches:
a. Transverse duct joint system by Ductmate/25, Nexus, Ward, or WDCI (Lite) (SMACNA "E" or "G"
Type connection).
2. Ducts 48 inches & larger:
a. Ductmate/35, Nexus, or W DCI (Heavy) (SMACNA "J" Type connection).
3. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Ductmate Industries Inc, 10760 Bay Meadows Drive, Sandy, UT 84092 (801) 571-5308
Lodi, CA (800) 344-3720
Pittsburgh, PA (800) 245-3188
b. Nexus, Exanno Corp, P 0 Box 729, Buffalo, NY 14206 (716) 849-0545
C. Ward Industries Inc, 1661 Lebanon Church Road, Pittsburg, PA 15236 (800) 466-9374
d. WDCI, P 0 Box 10868, Pittsburg, PA 15236 (800) 245-3188
2.3 ACCESS DOORS IN DUCTS
A. At each manual outside air damper and at each motorized damper, install factory built insulated access door with hinges
and sash locks. Locate doors within 6 inches of installed dampers. Construction shall be galvanized sheet metal, 24 ga
minimum.
B. Fire and smoke damper access doors shall have a minimum clear opening of 12" x 12" or as specified on Drawings to
easily service fire or smoke damper. Doors shall be within 6 inches of fire and smoke dampers and in Mechanical Room
if possible.
C. Identify each door with 1/2" high letters reading "smoke damper" or "fire damper'.
D. Approved Manufacturers:
I. AirBalance - Fire/Seal #FSA 100
2. Air Control Products - HAD -10
3. Cesco-Advanced Air - HAD -10
4. Elgen - Model 85 A
S. Kees Inc - ADH -D.
6. Louvers & Dampers - #SMD -G -F
7. Nailor-Hart Industries Inc - Series 0831
8. National Controlled Air Inc - Model AD -FL -1
2.4 FLEXIBLE EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 15891
0376.72-989 1 Low-pressure Steel Ductwork
A. 30 oz closely woven UL approved glass fabric, double coated with neoprene.
B. Fire retardant, waterproof, air -tight, resistant to acids and grease, and withstand constant temperatures of 250 deg F.
C. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Cain - N-100
2. Duro Dyne - MFN
3. Elgen - ZLN
4. Ventfabrics - Ventglas
2.5 VOLUME DAMPERS
A. In Main Ducts:
1. 16 gauge galvanized steel, opposed blade type with 3/8 inch pins and end bearings. Blades shall have I/8 inch
clearance all around.
2. Damper shall operate within acoustical duct liner.
3. Provide channel spacer equal to thickness of duct liner.
4. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Air Balance - Model AC -2
b. Air Control Products - CD -OB
C. American Warming - VC -2 -AA
d. Greenheck - VCD-1100
e. NCA, Safe Air
f Vent Products - 5100
6. In Sheet Metal Branch Ducts
I. Extruded aluminum, opposed blade type. When in open position, shall not extend beyond damper frame.
2. Maximum blade length 12 inches.
3. Damper Regulator shall be concealed type with operation from bottom orwith 90 deg miter gear assembly from
side.
4. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Air Control Products - TCD -OB
b. Air Guide - OB
C. Arrow - OBDAF-207
d. CESCO - CDA
C. Reliable Metals - OBD-RO
I. Tuttle & Bailey - A7RDDM
g. Safe Air
h. Young - 820 -AC
C. Dampers above removable ceiling and in Mechanical Rooms shall have locking quadrant on bottom or side of duct.
Otherwise, provide concealed ceiling damper regulator and cover plate.
2.6 DUCT HANGERS
A. l" x 18 gauge galvanized steel straps or steel rods as shown on Drawings, and spaced not more than 8 feet apart. Do not
use wire hangers.
B. Attaching screws at trusses shall be 1-1/2 inch No. 10 round head wood screws. Nails not allowed.
2.7 DUCT SEALER
A. Cain - Duct Butter or Butter Tak
B. Design Polymerics - DP 1010
C. DSC - Stretch Coat
D. Duro Dyne - S2
E. Hardcast - #601 Iron -Grip or Peel -N -Seal Tape
F. Kingco - 15-325
G. Mon -Eco - 44-41
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 15891
0376-72-989 2 Low-pressure Steel Ductwork
H. Trans -Continental Equipment Co - Multipurpose Duct Sealant
1. United - Sheet Metal duct -sealer
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Ducts:
1. Straight and smooth on inside with joints neatly finished unless otherwise directed.
2. Duct panels through 48 inch dimension having acoustic duct liner need not be crossbroken or beaded.
3. Crossbreak unlined ducts and duct panels larger than 48 inch or bead 12 inches on center.
4. Securely anchor ducts to building structure with specified duct hangers attached with screws. Donothangmore
than one duct from a duct hanger.
5. Brace and install ducts so they shall be free of vibration under all conditions of operation.
6. Ducts shall not bear on top of structural members.
7. Make duct take -offs to branches, registers, grilles, and diffusers as detailed on Drawings.
8. Ducts shall be large enough to accommodate inside acoustic duct liner. Dimensions shown on Drawings are net
clear inside dimensions after duct liner has been installed.
9. Properly flash where ducts protrude above roof.
10. Install internal ends of slipjoints in direction of flow. Make joints air tight using specified duct sealer.
It. Cover horizontal and longitudinal joints on exterior ducts with two layers of Hardcast tape installed with
Hardcast HC -20 adhesive according to Manufacturer's recommendations.
12. Paint ductwork visible through registers, grilles, and diffusers flat black.
B. Install flexible inlet and outlet duct connections to each furnace, fan, fan coil unit, and air handling unit.
C. Provide each take -off with an adjustable volume damper to balance that branch.
I. Anchor dampers securely to duct.
2. Install dampers in main ducts within insulation.
3. Dampers in branch ducts shall fit against sheet metal walls, bottom and top of duct, and be securely fastened.
Cut duct liner to allow damper to fit against sheet metal.
4. Where concealed ceiling damper regulators are installed, provide a cover plate.
D. Install grilles, registers, and diffusers. Level floor registers and anchor securely into floor.
E. Air Tums:
I. Permanently installed, consisting of single thickness curved metal blades with one inch straight trailing edge to
permit air to make abrupt turn without appreciable turbulence, in 90 degree elbows of above ground supply and
return ductwork.
2. 4-1/2 inch wide minimum vane rail. Do not usejunior vane rails.
3. Double thickness vanes not acceptable.
4. Quiet and free from vibration when system is in operation. See SMACNA Manual
END OF SECTION 15891
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 15891
0376-72.989 3 Low-pressure Steel Ductwork
SECTION 15892 - FLEX DUCT
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division I
Specification Sections, and Section 15055 apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install supply air branch duct runouts to diffusers as described in Contract Documents.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 DUCTS
A. Formable, flexible, circular duct which shall retain its cross-section, shape, rigidity, and shall not restrict air flow after
bending.
B. Nominal 1-1/2 inches thick, 3/4 Ib/cu ft density fiberglass insulation with air -tight, polyehtylene or polyester core,
sheathed in seamless vapor barrier jacket factory installed over flexible assembly.
C. Assembly, including insulation and vapor barrier, shall meet Class I requirement of NFPA 90A and be UL 181 rated,
with flame spread of 25 or less and smoke developed rating of 50 or under.
I
D. Length of flexible ductwork shall not exceed 8'-0". 1
i
2.2 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. ANCO-FLEX - 4625 f
B. Flex -Aire - PF/UPC #090
C. Hart & Cooley - F114
D. Thermaflex - G -KM 4
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
i
A. Install duct in fully extended condition free of sags and kinks.
B. Make duct connections by coating exterior of duct collar for 3 inches with duct sealer and securing duct in place over
sheet metal collar with 1/2 inch wide metal cinch bands and sheet metal screws.
END OF SECTION 15892
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 15892
0376-72-989 1 Flex Duct
SECTION 15896 - DUCT LINING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division l
Specification Sections, and Section 15055 apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Fumishand install acousticlining in following above ground metal ductwork as described in Contract Documents unless
detailed otherwise:
1. Outside air
2. Supply air
3. Return air
4. Mixed air
5. Transfer air
6. Relief air
7. Elbows, fittings, and diffuser drops greater than 12 inches in length.
B. Fumish and install lining in concrete underfloor boxes.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Duct dimensions shown on Drawings are for free area inside insulation. Allowance must be made for insulation, where
applicable.
1.4 RATINGS:
A. Material shall have maximum air friction correction factor of 1.10 at 1000 FPM velocity and have a minimum sound
absorption coefficient NRC of .60.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 DUCT LINER
A. One inch thick, 1-I/2 Ib density fiberglass, factory edge coated.
B. Duct lining materials are to meet the requirements of UL 181 for mold, humidity, and erosion resistance.
C. Approved Manufacturers:
L Certainteed Ultralite 150 Certa Edge Coat
2. Knauf - Type M
3. Manville - Lina-Coustic
4. Owen Coming Fiberglas - Aeroflex
2.2 ADHESIVE
A. Water Base Type
I.
Cain - Hydrotak
2.
Duro Dyne - WSA
3.
Kingco - I0-568
4.
Miracle - PF -101
5.
Mon -Eco - 22-67
6.
Techno Adhesive - 133
B. Solvent Base (non-flammable) Type:
I. Cain - Safetak
2. Duro Dyne - FPG
3. Kingco - 15-137
4. Miracle - PF -91
5. Mon -Eco - 22-24
6. Techno Adhesive - 'Non-Flam' 106
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 15896
0376-72-989 1 Duct Lining
C. Solvent Base (flammable) Type:
I. Cain - HV200
2. Dura Dyne - MPG
3. Kingco - 15-146
4. Miracle - PF -96
5. Mon -Eco - 22-22
6. Techno Adhesive - 'Flammable' 106
2.3 FASTENERS
A. Adhesively secured fasteners not allowed.
B. Approved Manufacturers:
1. AGM Industries Inc - "DynaPoint" Series DD -9 pin
2. Cain
3. Duro Dyne
4. Omark dished head "Insul-Pins"
S. Grip nails may be used if each nail is installed by "Grip Nail Air Hammer" or by "Automatic Fastener
Equipment" in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A, Install mat finish surface on air stream side. Secure insulation to cleaned sheet metal duct with continuous 100% coat
of adhesive and with 314 inch long mechanical fasteners 12 inches on center maximum unless detailed otherwise on
Drawings. Pin all duct liner.
B. Accurately cut liner and thoroughly coat ends with adhesive. Buttjoints tightly. Top and bottom sections of insulation
shall overlap sides. If liner is all one piece, folded comers shall be tight against metal. Ends shall butt tightly together.
C. In casings and plenums further contain insulation with wire mesh.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. If insulation is installed without longitudinal and end joints butted together, installation will be rejected and work
removed and replaced with work that conforms to this Specification.
B. Insulation shall be installed in accordance with Duct Liner Application Standard SMACNA Manual 15.
3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING
A. Keep duct liner clean and free from dust. At completion of project, vacuum duct liner if it is dirty or dusty.
END OF SECTION 15896
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 15896
0376-72-989 2 Duct Lining
SECTION 15940 - AIR OUTLETS & INLETS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1
Specification Sections, and Section 15055 apply to this Section. f
1.2 SUMMARY
I
I
A. Furnish and install wall supply registers, transfer grilles, return air grilles, soffit grilles, ceiling diffusers, louvers
connected to ductwork, and registers as described in Contract Documents. j
PART2-PRODUCTS j
I
2.1 GRILLES & REGISTERS
A. Approved Manufacturers: �
1. Price
2. Anemostat
3. Krueger j
4. Titus
2.2 LOUVERS
i
A. Extruded aluminum, with blades welded or screwed into frames and 1/2 inch mesh 16 gauge aluminum bird screen.
B. Frames shall have mitered comers.
C. Louvers shall be recessed, flanged, stationary, or removable as noted on Drawings. i
D. Approved Manufacturers:
I. Airolite
2. American Warming
3. Arrow
4. Industrial Louvers
5. Ruskin
& Vent Products
i
2.3 SPIN -IN FITTINGS
A. Low pressure round take -offs to diffusers shall be made with spin -in fittings. They shall incorporate a manual balancing
damper. The damper shall be spring loaded and a positive locking wing nut shall secure the damper position.!i
B. Approved Manufacturers:
I. Sheet metal fittings: Genfiex DB -I DEL, Hercules
PART 3 -EXECUTION
i
3.1 INSTALLATION -
A. Anchor securely into openings.
B. Install with screws to match color and finish of grilles and registers.
C. Touch-up any scratched finish surfaces.
END OF SECTION 15940
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 15940
0376-72-989 1 Air Outlets & Inlets
15997 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Division 15 - Basic Mechanical Requirements and Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Sections apply to work of
this section.
1.2 SUMMARY SCOPE
A. This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following:
I. Air Systems.
a. Rooftop HVAC units.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Agency Data:
1. Submit proof that the proposed testing, adjusting, andbalancing agency meets the qualifications specified below.
The firm or individuals performing the work herein specified may not be the installing firth.
B. Engineer and Technicians Data:
1. Submit proof that the Test and Balance Engineer assigned to supervise the procedures, and the technicians
proposed to perform the procedures meet the qualifications specified below.
C. Procedures and Agenda: Submit a synopsis of the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures and agenda proposed to
be used for this project.
D. Sample Forms: Submit sample forms, if other than those standard forms prepared by the AABC or NEBB areproposed.
E. Certified Reports: Submit testing,adjusting, and balancing reports bearing the seal and signature of the Test and Balance
Engineer. The reports shall be certified proof that the systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced in accordance
with the referenced standards; are an accurate representation of how the systems have been installed; are a true
representation of how the systems are operating at the completion of the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures;
and are an accurate record of all final quantities measured, to establish normal operating values of the systems. Follow
the procedures and format specified below.
I. Draft Reports: Upon completion of testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures, prepare draft reports on the
approved forms. Draft reports may be hand written, but must be complete, factual, accurate, and legible.
Organize and format draft reports in the same manner specified for the final reports. Submit 2 complete sets of
draft reports. Only I complete set of draft reports will be returned.
2. Final Report: Upon verification and approval of draft reports, prepare final reports, type written, and organized
and formatted as specified below. Submit 4 complete sets of final reports.
3. Report Format: Report forms shall be those standard forms prepared by the referenced standard for each
respective item and system to be tested, adjusted, and balanced. Bind report forms complete with schematic
systems diagrams and other data. Divide the contents of the binder into the below listed divisions, separated by
divider tabs:
a. General Information and Summary
b. Air Systems
C. Temperature Control System Verification.
F. Report Contents: Provide the following minimum information, forms, and data:
I. General information and Summary: Inside cover sheet to identify testing, adjusting, balancing agency,
Contractor, Owner, Engineer, and Project. include addresses and contact names and telephone numbers. Also
include a certification sheet containing the seal and name, address, telephone number, and signature of the
Certified Test and Balance Engineer. Include in this division a listing of the instrumentation used for the
procedures along with the instrument calibration sheet.
2. The remainder of the report shall contain the appropriate forms containing as a minimum, the information
indicated on the standard report fonns prepared by the AABC or NEBB, for each respective item and system.
Prepare a schematic diagram for each item of equipment and system to accompany each respective report form.
The report shall contain the following information, and all other data resulting from the testing, adjusting, and
balancing work:
a. All nameplate and specification data for all air handling equipment and motors.
b. Actual metered running amperage for each phase of each motor on all pmnps and air handling
equipment.
C. Actual metered voltage at air handling equipment (phase -to -phase for all phases).
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 15997
0376-72.989 1 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
d. Fan RPM for each piece of air handling equipment.
e. Total actual CFM being handled by each piece of air handling equipment.
F. Actual CFM of systems by rooms.
3. Certify that all smoke and fire dampers operate properly and can be reset under actual system operating
conditions.
G. Calibration Reports:
1. Submit proof that all required instrumentation has been calibrated to tolerances specified in the referenced
standards, within a period of six months prior to starting the project.
1.4 CERTIFICATION
A. Agency Qualifications:
I. Employ the services of a certified testing, adjusting, and balancing agency meeting the qualifications specified
below, to be the single source of responsibility to test, adjust, and balance the building mechanical systems
identified above, to produce the design objectives. Services shall include checking installations for conformity
to design, measurement, and establishment of the fluid quantities of the mechanical systems as required to meet
design specifications, recording and reporting the results, and operation of all systems to demonstrate satisfactory
performance to the owner.
2. The testing, adjusting, and balancing agency certified by National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) or
Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) in those testing and balancing disciplines required for this project, and
having at least one person certified by NEBB or AABC as a Test and Balance supervisor, and a registered
professional mechanical engineer, licensed in the state where the work will be performed.
B. Codes and Standard:
1. NEBB: "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems."
2. AABC: "National Standards for Total System Balance."
3. ASHRAE: ASHRAE Handbook, 1984 Systems Volume, Chapter 37, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Systems Operation: Systems shall be fully operation and clean prior to beginning procedures.
1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Test,adjust, and balance the air systems before hydronic, steam, and refrigerant systems within +l0%to-5%ofcontract
requirements.
B. The report shall be approved by the Engineer. Test and balance shall be performed prior to substantial completion.
PART 2 - NOT USED
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES FOR AIR SYSTEM BALANCING
A. Before operating the system, perform these steps
1. Obtain design drawings and specifications and become thoroughly acquainted with the design intent.
2. Obtain copies of approved shop drawings of all air handling equipment, outlets (supply, return, and exhaust) and
temperature control diagrams.
3. Compare design to installed equipment and field installations.
4. Walk the system from the system air handling equipment to terminal units to determine variations of installation
from design.
5. Check filters for cleanliness and to determine if they are the type specified.
6. Check dampers (both volume and fire) for correct and locked position. Check automatic operating and safety
controls and devices to determine that they are properly connected, functioning, and at proper operating setpoint.
7. Prepare report test sheets for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended
procedures for testing. Prepare a summation of required outlet volumes to permit a cross-check with required
fan volumes.
8. Determine best locations in main and branch ductwork for most accurate duct traverses.
9. Place outlet dampers in the full open position.
10. Prepare schematic diagrams of system "As -Built" ductwork and piping layouts to facilitate reporting.
if. Lubricate all motors and bearings.
12. Check fan belt tension.
13. Check fan rotation.
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 15997
0376-72-989 2 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
3.2 MEASUREMENTS
A. Provide all required instrumentation to obtain proper measurements, calibrated to the tolerances specified in the
referenced standards. Instruments shall be properly maintained and protected against damage.
B. Provide instruments meeting the specifications of the referenced standards.
C. Use only those instruments which have the maximum field measuring accuracy and arebest suited to the function being
measured.
D. Apply instrument as recommended by the manufacturer.
E. Use instruments with minimum scale and maximum subdivisions and with scale ranges proper for the value being
measured.
F. When averaging values, take a sufficient quantity of readings which will result in a repeatability error of less than 5%.
When measuring a single point, repeat readings until 2 consecutive identical values are obtained.
G. Take all readings with the eye at the level of the indicated value to prevent parallax.
H. Use pulsation dampeners where necessary to eliminate error involved in estimating average of rapidly fluctuation
readings.
1., Take measurements in the system where best suited to the task.
3.3 PERFORMING TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system identified, in accordancewith the detailed procedures outlined
in the referenced standards. Balancing of the air systems and hydronic systems shall be achieved by adjusting the
automatic controls, balancing valves, dampers, air terminal devices, and the fan/motor drives within each system.
B. Cut insulation, ductwork, and piping for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate
performance of procedures.
C. Patch insulation, ductwork, and housings, using materials identical to those removed.
D. Seal ducts and piping, and test for and repair leaks.
E. Seal insulation to re-establish integrity of the vapor barrier.
F. Adjust timing relays of environmental equipment motor reduced voltage starters to the optimum time period for the
motor to come up to the maximum reduced voltage speed and then transition to the full voltage speed to prevent damage
to motor, and to limit starting current spike to the lowest possible and practical.
G. Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, valve indicators, fan speed control levers, and similar
controls and devices, to show final settings. Mark with paint or other suitable, permanent identification materials.
H. Retest, adjust, and balance systems subsequent to significant system modifications, and resubmit test results. i
3.4 RECORD AND REPORT DATA -
A. Record all data obtained during testing, adjusting, and balancing in accordance with, and on the forms recommended
by the referenced standards, and as approved on the sample report forms.
B. Prepare report of recommendations for correcting unsatisfactory mechanical performances when system cannot be
successfully balanced.
C. Report shall be certified and stamped by a registered professional mechanical engineer employed by the agency and
licensed in the state where the work will be performed.
D. Engineer is to provide a floor plan and test and balance contractor to include the plan in test and balance report and
identity actual cftn on drawing or number the diffusers to match report.
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 15997
0376.72-989 3 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. If requested, testing, adjusting, and balancing agency shall conduct any or all of the field tests in the presence of the
engineer.
B. Agency shall include a maximum of one (I) call back to the project within the one year warranty period to make
additional adjustments if requested by the engineer.
END OF SECTION 15997
END OF DIVISION 15
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 15997
0376-72.989 4 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL
16055 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
16060 MOUNTING HEIGHTS
16061 DEMOLITION
16111 CONDUIT
16114 CABLE TRAY
16120 WIRE AND CABLE
16130 BOXES
16140 WIRING DEVICES
16170 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS
16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES
16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16450 GROUNDING AND BONDING
16470 PANELBOARDS
16515 INTERIOR LUMINARIES
16530 EXTERIOR LUMINARIES
16535 EMERGENCY LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
16921 TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM
SECTION 16055 - GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary for completion of work of this Division as described in Contract
Documents.
B. Furnish and install firestopping material at penetrations through fire rated structures and draft stops.
C. Provide a complete working installation with all equipment called for in proper operating condition. Documents do
not undertake to show or list every item to be provided. When an item not shown or listed is clearly necessary for
proper operation of equipment which is shown or listed, provide the item which will allow the system to function
properly at no increase in Contract Sum.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
Submit shop drawings on following equipment:
a. Panelboards
b. Disconnect switches
C. Wiring devices
d. Lighting fixtures
e. Emergency lighting packs
2. Do not purchase equipment before completion of shop drawing review.
B. Project Record Drawings:
I. Provide complete set as required by Contract General and Supplementary Conditions.
C. Operations & Maintenance Manual Data:
Provide following information for each item of equipment:
a. Catalog Sheets.
b. Assembly details or dimension drawings.
C. Installation, operating, and maintenance instructions.
d. Manufacturer's name and catalog number
e. Name of local supplier.
2. Furnish such information for following equipment:
a. Section 16140 - Wiring Devices.
b. Section 16170 - Disconnect Switches.
C. Section 16470 - Panelboards.
d. Sections 16515 & 16530 - Lighting Fixtures.
e. Section 16632 - Emergency lighting packs
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
I. NEC and local ordinances and regulations shall govern unless more stringent requirements are specified.
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 16055
0376-72-989 1 General Electrical Requirements
2. Material and equipment provided shall be new, meet standards of NEMA or UL, and bear their label
wherever standards have been established and label service is available.
1.5 GUARANTEE
A. All work under this section shall be guaranteed in writing to be free of defective work, materials, or parts for a period
of one year, except lamps which shall be guaranteed for thirty days after acceptance of the contract. Repair, revision
or replacement of any and all such defects, failure or inoperativeness shall be done by this section at no cost to the
Owner. Under this section, submit a letter, including this paragraph, and with blanks for date of acceptance and
dates of expiration of guarantee, as part of the final inspection packet.
1.6 OWNER'S PERSONNEL INSTRUCTIONS
A. Prior to final inspection, the contractor shall conduct an on-site instructional tour of the entire project. The personnel
designated by the Owner shall be instructed in: operation of all electrical systems, elementary trouble shooting
procedures, preventive maintenance procedures, uses of operation and maintenance manuals, relamping and cleaning
of lighting fixtures. A letter from the contractor acknowledging such has been done shall be submitted to the
Architect with the final inspection packet. -
PART 2 -EXECUTION
2.1 EXAMINATION
A. Confirm dimensions, ratings, and specifications of equipment to be installed and coordinate these with site
dimensions and with other Sections.
2.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test systems and demonstrate equipment as working and operating properly. Notify Architect prior to test. Rectify
defects at no additional cost to Owner.
END OF SECTION 16055
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 16055
0376-72-989 2 General Electrical Requirements
SECTION 16060 -MOUNTING HEIGHTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 16055
apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Mounting heights of electrical equipment and components.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1 INSTALLATION
A. Unless otherwise indicated, mount center of outlets or boxes at following heights above finish floor:
I. Other Motor Disconnects - 5'0"
2. Distribution Panels - 6'0" to top
3. Receptacles - 14 inches; ADA - 18"
4. Remote Sensor Outlet - 5'0" to top
5. Switches - 4'0" to top; ADA - 3'6"
6. Thermostats - 5'0"
7. Wall -Mounted Exit Lights - TV
B. Refer special conditions to Architect and locate outlet under his direction.
END OF SECTION 16060
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 16060
0376-72-989 1 Mounting Heights
SECTION 16061 - DEMOLITION
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Electrical demolition.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 16055 - General Electrical Requirements.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual Sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on Drawings.
B. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities.
C. Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents. Report discrepancies to
Architect/Engineer before disturbing existing installation.
D. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal.
B. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work
must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations.
C. Existing Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service.
Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer at least 24
hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to
maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.
3.3 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK
A. Demolish and extend existing electrical work under provisions of this Section.
B. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.
C. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply.
D. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit
Flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.
E. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is
abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets which are not removed.
F. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment.
G. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed.
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 16061
0376-72-989 1 Demolition
H. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other accessories.
1. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work.
J. Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel
as appropriate.
K. Extend existing installations using materials and methods as specified.
3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIR
A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused.
B. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged circuit
breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting
arrangement.
C. Luminaires: Use mild detergent to clean all exterior and interior surfaces; rinse with clean water and wipe dry.
Replace lamps and broken electrical parts.
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. Install relocated materials and equipment under the provisions of this Section.
END OF SECTION 16061
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 16061
0376-72-939 2 Demolition
SECTION 16111 - CONDUIT
PART1-GENERAL
LI SECTION INCLUDES
A. Metal conduit.
B. Liquid -tight flexible metal conduit.
C. Electrical metallic tubing.
D. Nonmetallic conduit.
E. Fittings and conduit bodies.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 16130 - Boxes.
B. Section 16450 - Grounding.
1.3 REFERENCES
A.. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated.
B. ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated.
C. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies.
D. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).
E. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Conduit Size: NEC.
1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Accurately record actual routing of conduits larger than 2 inches.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose
specified and shown.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage.
B. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering.
C. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verity that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 16111
0376-72-989 1 Conduit
B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough -in.
C. Conduit routing is shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to complete
wiring system.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Size: 1/2 inch unless otherwise specified.
B. Underground Installations
1. More than Five Feet from Foundation Wall: Use rigid steel conduit.
2. Within Five Feet from Foundation Wall: Use thickwall nonmetallic conduit.
3. In or Under Slab on Grade: Use thickwall nonmetallic conduit.
C. Outdoor Locations, Above Grade:
1. Use rigid steel conduit.
D. In Slab Above Grade:
1. Use rigid steel conduit and thickwall nonmetallic conduit.
2. Minimum Size Conduit in Slab: 3/4 inch.
E. Wet and Damp Locations:
1. Use rigid steel and thickwall nonmetallic conduit.
F. Dry Locations:
1. Concealed: Use rigid steed conduit, electrical metallic tubing and thickwall monmetallic conduit.
2. Exposed: Use rigid steel conduit.
2.2 METAL CONDUIT
A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSUNEMA FB 1; material to match conduit.
C. This shall be the basic raceway for all conductors, except other types may be used where noted in the following
paragraphs. Rigid steel conduit only shall be used in structural concrete walls, floors, ceilings and outside.
2.3 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket.
B. Fittings: ANSUNEMA FB 1.
C. Use in outdoor final connections to mechanical equipment, not to exceed 36 inches.
2.4 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel , compression or set screw type.
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 16111
0376-72-989 2 Conduit
C. Use only in the following installations at the option of the Contractor:
I. Furred ceilings.
2. In wood frame construction.
3. In interior concrete block, masonry, or brick walls (not exterior cavity walls).
4. Exposed in dry areas.
5. Exposed where not subject to moisture or physical injury.
2.5 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT
A. Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.
C. Use in the following locations at the option of the Contractor:
1. In the earth.
2. In fill under floor slabs.
3. In concrete floor slabs on grade, not structural slabs.
4. In concrete block, masonry, or brick walls.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation."
B. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.
D. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay -in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers.
E. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel; provide space on each for 25
percent additional conduits.
F. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section 16190.
G. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports.
H. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires.
I. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.
J. Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls.
K. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.
L. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point.
M. Do not cross conduits in slab.
N. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping.
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004
0376-72-989 3
16111
Conduit
O. Maintain 12 inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F.
P. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de -burr cut ends.
Q. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
R. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic conduit dry and clean
beforejoining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allowjoint to cure for 20 minutes,
minimum.
S. Use conduit hubs or sealing lockouts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet locations and to cast boxes.
T. Install no more than equivalent of three 90 -degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in
direction, as around beams. Use factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size.
U. Avoid moisture naps; providejunction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system.
V. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses expansion joints.
W. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples.
X. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
Y. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 16450.
Z. Identify conduit under provisions of Section 16195.
3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements.
B. Routeconduit through roof openings forpiping and ductwork orthrough suitable roofjack with pitch pocket. Coordinate
location with rooting installation. Provide fire caulking at all fire rated penetrations.
END OF SECTION 16111
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 16111
0376-72-989 4 Conduit
SECTION 16114 - CABLE TRAY
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Cable trays and accessories.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 16120 - Wire and Cable.
B. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).
B. ASTM A 123 - Specification for Zinc (Hot -Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and
Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip.
C. NEMA VE 1 - Metallic Cable Tray Systems.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate tray type, dimensions, support points, and finishes.
B. Product Data: Provide data for fittings and accessories.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency
specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,
preparation, installation, and starting of Product.
1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Record actual routing of cable tray and locations of supports.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NEC.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose
specified and shown.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 LADDER -TYPE CABLE TRAY
A. Description: NEMA VE I, Class 12B ladder type tray. ;
B. Material: Steel.
C. Finish: ASTM A 123, hot dipped galvanized after fabrication.
D. Inside Width: 12 inches.
E. Inside Depth: 3 inches.
F. Straight Section Rung Spacing: 6 inches on center.
G. Inside Radius of Fittings: As indicated.
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 16114
0376-72-989 1 Cable Trays
H. Provide manufacturer's standard clamps, hangers, brackets, splice plates, reducer plates, blind ends, barrier strips,
connectors, and grounding straps.
2.2 WARNING SIGNS
A. Engraved Nameplates: 1/2 inch high black letters on yellow laminated plastic nameplate, engraved with the following
wording:
WARNING! DO NOT USE CABLE TRAY AS WALKWAY, LADDER, OR SUPPORT. USE
ONLY AS MECHANICAL SUPPORT FOR CABLES AND TUBING!
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install metallic cable tray in accordance with NEMA VE 1.
C. Support trays in accordance with Section 16190. Provide supports at each connection point, at the end of each run, and
at other points to maintain spacing between supports of 6 ft maximum.
D. Use expansion connectors where required.
E. Ground and bond cable tray under provisions of Section 16450.
1. Provide continuity between tray components.
2. Use anti -oxidant compound to prepare aluminum contact surfaces before assembly.
3. Provide 2 AWG bare copper equipment grounding conductor through entire length of tray; bond to each
component.
4. Connections to tray may be made using mechanical or exothermic connectors.
END OF SECTION 16114
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 16114
0376-72-989 2 Cable Trays
SECTION 16120 - WIRE AND CABLE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and Section 16055 apply
to this Section.
B. Section 16741 - Telephone Systems.
C. Cables for auxiliary systems specified on Drawings.
D. See Sections specifying auxiliary systems for additional requirements.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS
A. Copper.
B. Minimum size shall be No. 12 except where specified otherwise.
C. Conductor size No. 8 and larger shall be stranded.
2.2 INSULATION
A. Conductor size No. 10 and smaller - 600V type THWN or THHN (90 deg C)
B. Conductor Size No. 8 and larger - 600V Type THW, THWN, or XHHW (75 deg Q.
C. Higher temperature insulation as required by NEC or local codes.
D. Any wiring or cable not in an enclosed raceway shall be plenum rated.
2.3 CORD SETS FOR RANGES
A. Four conductor, 50 ampere, 4 feet long minimum.
2.4 CONNECTORS
A. Steel spring wire connectors or pressure type terminal lugs as specified.
B. Use terminal blocks for tapping conductors for condensing unit disconnect switches. Terminals shall be suitable for use
with 75 deg C copper conductors.
I. Approved Manufacturers & Models:
a. Square -D LBA363106
b. Bussman 16323
PARTS -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install conductors in raceway unless indicated otherwise.
B. Pulling Conductors:
I. Do not pull conductors into conduit until raceway system is complete and cabinets and outlet boxes are free of
foreign matter and moisture.
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 16120
0376-72-989 1 Wire and Cables
2. Do not use heavy mechanical means for pulling conductors.
3. Only wire pulling lubricant may be used.
C. Conductors shall be continuous from outlet to outlet.
D. Make splices for conductors No. 8 and smaller with steelspring wire connections. Splice larger conductors with pressure
type terminal lugs.
E. Route circuits at own discretion, however, grouping of circuits in homeruns to panels shall be as shown on Drawings.
F. Where common neutral is run for two or three home run circuits, connect phase conductors to breakers in panel which
are attached to separate phase legs in order that neutral conductors will carry only unbalanced current. Neutral
conductors shall be of same size as phase conductors unless specifically noted otherwise.
G. Run conductors of different voltage systems in separate conduits.
H. Conductors size #10 and smaller shall be colored throughout. Color code conductors as follows:
1. Black - Phase A
2. Red - Phase B
3. Blue - Phase C
4. Green - Ground
S. White - Neutral
END OF SECTION 16120
.W
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 16120
0376-72.989 2 Wire and Cables
SECTION 16130 - BOXES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 16055 apply
to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install outlet boxes as described in Contract Documents.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 OUTLET BOXES
A. Galvanized steel of correct size and shape.
B. Provide metal supports and other accessories for installation of each box.
C. Equip ceiling and bracket fixture boxes with fixture studs where required.
D. Equip outlets with extensions as required to bring box flush with finish surface.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Boxes shall be accessible and installed with approved cover.
B. Sectional boxes shall not be used in concrete.
C. Locate boxes so outlets are not obstructed by pipes, ducts, or other items.
D. Install outlets flush or 1/4 inch maximum behind finished surface and level and plumb.
E. Boxes for switches shall generally be located within 6 inches of doorjamb.
F. Properly center single outlets in each room. Where two or more outlets occur, space them uniformly and in straight lines
with each other.
END OF SECTION 16130'
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 16130
0376-72-989 1 Boxes
SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 16055 apply
to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY -
A. Furnish and install wiring devices complete with plates as described in Contract Documents.
B. Furnish and install cover plates for sound system devices.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Faces shall be nylon where available.
B. Devices of single type shall be of same Manufacturer.
C. Devices are listed as Ivory. Use Ivory devices on light colored walls and brown on dark walls unless directed otherwise
by Architect.
2.2 SWITCHES
Contractor shall match existing style. Field verify prior to bidding.
A. Rectangular face designer style.
L Approved Manufacturers & Models:
a. 20 amp, single pole
1) Hubbell - 21211
2) Leviton - 5621+1
3) Pass & Seymour - 26021-I
4) Bryant - 990 1 -1
b. Two Pole:
1) Hubbell - 21221
2) Leviton - 5622+1
3) Pass & Seymour - 26022-1
4) Bryant - 9902-1
C. Three Way:
1) Hubbell - 21231
2) Leviton - 5623+1
3) Pass & Seymour - 26023-1
4) Bryant - 9903.1
d. Four Way:
1) Hubbell - 21241
2) Leviton - 5624+1 --
3) Pass & Seymour - 26024-1
4) Bryant - 9904-1
e. Pilot Switch:
1) Hubbell - 2121PL
2) Leviton - 5628-2+1
3) Pass & Seymour - 26029-I
4) Bryant - 9901-PLI120
f. Lighted Toggle Switch:
I) Single Pole:
a) Hubbell - 21211L j
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 16140
0376-72-989 1 Wiring Devices
b)
Leviton - 5631-2+I
C)
Pass & Seymour - 26025-I
d)
Bryant- 9901 -GLI
2) Three Way:
a)
Hubbell - 2123IL
b)
Leviton - 5633-2+1
c)
Pass & Seymour - 26026-I
d)
Bryant - 9903 -GLI
B. Standard Style:
Verified by UL to meet Fed Spec WS -896E.
Approved Manufacturers & Models:
a. 20 amp, single pole
1)
Hubbell - 1221-I
2)
Pass & Seymour - 20AC1-I
3)
Leviton - 1221-2I
4)
Bryant - 4901-I
b. Two
Pole:
1)
Hubbell - 1222-I
2)
Pass & Seymour - 20AC2-1
3)
Leviton - 1222-2I
4)
Bryant - 4902-I
C. Three Way:
I)
Hubbell - 1223-1
2)
Pass & Seymour - 20AC3-I
3)
Leviton - 1223-2I
4)
Bryant - 4903-I
d. Four
Way:
1)
Hubbell - 1224-I
2)
Pass & Seymour - 20AC4-1
3)
Leviton - 1224.21
4)
Bryant - 4904-I
e. Pilot
Switch:
1)
Hubbell - 1224 -PL
2)
Pass & Seymour - 20AC1-RPL
3)
Leviton - 1221 -PLR
4)
Bryant - 4901 -PLR 120
f. Lighted
Toggle Switch:
1)
Single Pole:
a) Hubbell - 1221 -IL
b) Pass & Seymour - 20AC1-ICL
C) Leviton - 1221-LHI
d) Bryant -4901 -GLI
2)
Three Way:
a) Hubbell - 1223 -IL
b) Pass & Seymour - 20AC3-ICL
C) Leviton - 1223 -LHC
d) Bryant - 4903 -GLI
C. Timer Switches:
Approved Manufacturers & Models:
a. Exhaust Fans, Rest Rooms:
1) 0-15 minute, no hold position.
2) Intermatic FD ISM
3) Tork A515M
b. Exhaust Fans, Serving Area:
1) 0-60 minute, no hold position.
2) Intermatic FD60M
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 16140
0376-72-989 2 Wiring Devices
3) Tork A560M
C. Electric Wall Heater Timer Switches:
1) Intermatic FF46H
2) Tork 506H
D. Dimmer Switches:
1. Vertical slide control with faceplate.
2. Preset, ON-OFF switch, IOOOVA
3. Approved Manufacturers & Models:
a. Leviton - 81000-I
b. Lightolier - MP1000-I
C. Lutron - NTV-10001
d. Pass & Seymour - 91180-1
2.3 RECEPTACLES
Contractor shall match existing style. Field verify prior to bidding.
A. Rectangular face designer style.
I. 20 amp, specification grade, Back & side wired, self grounding.
2. Approved Manufacturers & Models:
a. Hubbell - 2162-I
b. Leviton - 16362-I
C. Pass & Seymour - 26352-1
d. Bryant - 9352-I
B. Standard Style:
1. 20 amp, specification grade, Back and side wired, self grounding.
2. Verified by UL to meet Fed Spec WC -596F.
3. Approved Manufacturers & Models:
a. Hubbell - 5262-I
b. Leviton - 5362-I
C. Pass & Seymour - BR20-I
d. Bryant - CBR20-I
C. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter:
I. 20 amp, specification grade, Back and side wired, self grounding
2. Approved Manufacturers & Models:
a. Hubbell - GF5262-I
b. Leviton - 6899-I
C. Pass & Seymour - 2091-5-1
d. Bryant - GFR53FT-I
2.4 PLATES
A. Standard Cover Plates:
I. Nylon or high impact resistant thermoplastic.
2. Color shall match wiring device.
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 16140
0376-72-989 3 Wiring Devices
3. Ganged switches shall have gang plates.
4. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Hubbell
b. Leviton
C. Pass & Seymour
d. Bryant
B. Weatherproof Receptacle Covers:
1. Complete with corrosion resistant plate, spring lid cover, and weatherproof mats.
2. Cast metal or stainless steel.
3. Compatible with GFCI receptacles.
4. Approved Manufacturers & Models:
Indoor use:
a. Hubbell - CWP26H, horizontal; WP26, vertical
b. Leviton - 4990, horizontal; 4992, vertical
C. Pass & Seymour - CA26-H, horizontal; CA26-v, vertical
Outdoor use:
d. Intermatic:
I) WP 101 OHMIC, horizontal
2) WP 101 OMC, vertical
e. Arlington:
1) DBAHI, horizontal
2) DBAV I, vertical
f. Hubbell:
I) WP26MH, horizontal
2) WP26M, vertical
g. Taymac - MX3200, vertical
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install devices flush with walls, straight, and solid to box.
END OF SECTION 16140
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 16140
0376-72-989 4 Wiring Devices
SECTION 16170 - CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 16055 apply
to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install disconnects as described in Contract Documents.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
i
w
2.1 DISCONNECTS j
A. Heavy duty quick -make, quick -break type, fused unless indicated otherwise.
B. Fuses
1. Fuse fused disconnects with dual -element time delay fuses and equip with rejection type fuse holders.
E
2. Fuses on Project shall be from single manufacturer. i
3. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Bussmann t
b. Gould/Shawmut
C. Littelfuse
4. Verify fuse type and size requirements with actual equipment served before ordering.
C. Provide interlock to prevent opening of door when switch is in ON position.
D. Provide means to lock switch in OFF position with padlock.
E. Disconnects for motor circuits shall be horsepower rated.
F. Disconnects for furnace fans shall be manual starter with thermal overload relay. Provide overload relay to match motor
full load amps.
G. Supply and install thermal overload switches for all fractional horsepower motors as indicated on the Drawings.
I. Surface mounted: Square -D Class 2510, FG -1 P with neon pilot light.
2. Recess mounted: Square -D Class 2510, FO -1 mounted in two -gang box with Arrow No. 1720 pilot light, cover
plate to match wall switch and engraved to indicate motor controlled.
3. Thermal overload devices: rated at 115% of motor full load current.
H. Enclosures:
I. NEMA Type 1 or, where required to be weatherproof, NEMA Type 3R.
1. Approved Manufacturers:
I. Same as manufacturer of Project's main panelboard.
END OF SECTION 16170
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 16170
0376-72-989 1 Circuit and Motor Disconnects
SECTION 16190 -SUPPORTING DEVICES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Conduit and equipment supports.
B. Anchors and fasteners.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association.
B. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog data for fastening systems.
B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency
specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,
preparation, installation, and starting of Product.
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NEC.
B: Furnish products listed and classified by testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose
specified and shown.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A. Materials and Finishes: Provide adequate corrosion resistance.
B. Provide materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry the loads of equipment and conduit.
Consider weight of wire in conduit when selecting products.
C. Anchors and Fasteners:
I. Concrete Structural Elements: Use expansion anchors and powder actuated anchors.
2. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps.
3. Concrete Surfaces: Use expansion anchors.
4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use hollow wall fasteners.
5. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors.
6. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.
7. Wood Elements: Use wood screws.
2.2 STEEL CHANNEL
A. Manufacturer:
L Unistrut.
2. B -Line.
B. Description: Galvanized steel.
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 16190
0376-72-989 1 Supporting Devices
2.3 SPRING STEEL CLIPS
A. Manufacturer: j
I. Caddy.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation". ;
C. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, and conduit.
D. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members.
E. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon head bolts to present
neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts. _
F. Install surface -mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.
G. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards one inch off wall.
H. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions.
END OF SECTION 16190
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 16190
0376-72-989 2 Supporting Devices
SECTION 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION ,
PART1-GENERAL -
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Nameplates and labels.
B. Wire and cable markers. �
t
C. Conduit markers. e
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide catalog data for nameplates, labels, and markers.
B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency -
specified underregulatory requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation
and installation of Product.
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NEC. `
B, Furnish products listed and classified by testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose '
specified and shown.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
A. Nameplates: Engraved three -layer laminated plastic, black letters on white background.
B. Locations:
I. Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure.
2. Communication cabinets.
C. Letter Size:
1. Use 1/8 inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads.
2. Use 1/4 inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.
D. Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16 inch white letters on black background.
2.2 WIRE MARKERS
A. Manufacturers:
I. Brandy.
2. Panduit.
3. 3M
B. Locations: Each conductor at panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes and each load connection.
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 16195
0376-72-989 1 Electrical Identification
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels.
3.2 APPLICATION
A. Install nameplate and label parallel to equipment lines.
B. Secure nameplate to equipment front using adhesive.
C. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on panelboard that is recessed in finished locations.
END OF SECTION 16195
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 16195
0376-72-989 2 Electrical Identification
SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 16055 apply
to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install grounding for entire electrical installation as specified below and described in Contract Documents.
I. Conduits and other conductor enclosures.
2. Power and lighting panelboards.
3. Non -current -carrying metal parts of fixed equipment such as motors, starter and controller cabinets, instrument
cases, and lighting fixtures.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPONENTS
i
A. Size materials as shown on Drawings and in accordance with applicable codes. j
B. Ground Conductors - Copper with green insulation or bare. j
i
PART 3 -EXECUTION iG
3.1 INSTALLATION i
A. Pull ground conductors in non-metallic raceways, in flexible steel conduit exceeding 6 feet long, and in liquid tight
flexible conduit. Use same size ground as phase conductors up through#10 AWG. Use NEC Table 250-95 for all others
unless noted otherwise on Drawings.
i
END OF SECTION 16450
i
t
I
I
i
i
i
i
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 16450
0376-72-989 1 Grounding
SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 16055 apply
to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Famish and install panelboards as described in Contract Documents.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 LIGHTING & DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Minimum integrated equipment short circuit rating of 10,000 amperes.
B. Bolt -on breakers. Multi -pole breakers shall be common trip.
C. Cabinets shall be locking type with no exposed latches or screws when door is closed. Key panels alike and provide
minimum of three keys.
D. Minimum dimensions of 20 inches wide by 5-3/4 inches deep.
E. Use equipment from same manufacturer as main panelboard.
F. Approved Models:
I. NQOD by Square D
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Identify panelboards and each breaker in main panelboard with laminated plastic name plates with engraved letters.
Attach with screws.
B. Provide typewritten circuit schedules in lighting and distribution panelboards to identify panelboard and each branch
breaker.
END OF SECTION 16470
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 16470
0376-72-989 1 Panelboards
SECTION 16515 - INTERIOR LUMINAIRES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 16055 apply
to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Famish and install lighting system as described in Contract Documents complete with lamps.
1.3 SEQUENCING & SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate with General Contractor to obtain symmetrical arrangement of fixtures in acoustic tile ceiling.
B. Coordinate with Section General Contractor to ensure that light coves are properly painted before installation of light
fixtures.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. See Fixture Schedule on Drawings.
2.2 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS
A, Electronic solid state for 265 mA, T8 Lamps.
I. UL listed and labeled.
2. Minimum power factor of 90 percent.
3. Maximum total harmonic distortion of 20 percent.
4. Audible noise level lower than quietest CBM certified ballast for same application.
S. Transient protection in accordance with ANSI 62.41-984.
6. Comply with FCC Rules Part 18, 15J.
7. Maximum crest factor of 1.7.
8. Five year full replacement warranty including labor allowance for replacement.
9. Ballast voltage to match system voltage.
10. Approved Manufacturers -
a. Advance
b. MagnetekiTriad
c. Motorola
2.3 LAMPS
A. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Osram Sylvania
2. General Electric
3. North American Philips
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 16515
0376-72-989 1 Interior Luminaires
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Do not locate incandescent fixtures in closet or storage areas within 18 inches and fluorescent fixtures within 6 inches
of shelves.
B. Securely fasten fixtures in place in accordance with NEC 410-15(a) & (b). Secure pendant fixtures to structural
members.
C. Where recessed lighting fixtures are to be installed, provide openings, plaster rings, etc, of exact dimensions for such
fixtures to be inserted in openings. Terminate circuits for recessed fixtures in an extension outlet box near fixture and
connect with specified conduit in accordance with Contract Documents.
D. Where fluorescent units are shown installed end to end, provide suitable connectors or collars to connect adjoining units
to appear as a continuous unit.
E. Do not install light fixtures in light coves until coves are properly painted.
END OF SECTION 16515
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 16515
0376-72-989 2 Interior Luminaires
SECTION 16530 - EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 16055 apply
to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install exterior lighting system as described in Contract Documents except forconcrete bases forlight poles.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PARKING AREA FIXTURES & POLES
A. As indicated on Fixture Schedule.
2.2 CONDUIT
A. As specified in Section 16110.
B. Do not use direct burial cable.
2.3 EXTERIOR LIGHTING CONTROL
A. Time Switch:
I. Standard 24 hour dial time switch, 120 volts
2. Approved Manufacturers & Models:
a. Intermatic - TIOOL
b. Tork - 1100-FLI
C. Paragon 4001-00
B. Photo Cell:
1. 120 volts.
2. Approved Manufacturers & Models:
a. Intermatic - K4121
b. Tork - 2101
C. Paragon CW201-00
C. Lighting Contractor
I. 120 volt, 20 amps, 2 pole, NEMA 1 enclosure.
2. Shall be same manufacturer as main panelboard.
3. Approved Manufacturers & Models:
a. Challenger - 4104CA 1201
b. Cutler Hammer - CN35BG2
C. General Electric - CR260L-21CA22
d. ITE/Siemens - CLHIB4212A803
e. Square D - Class 8903, Type LG -20
f Westinghouse - A202SIBA
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 16530
0376-72-989 1 Exterior Luminaires
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install time switch and contactor inside building to control area lighting.
B. Locate photo cell outside building under soffit and away from any light source and direct sunlight.
C. Wire photo cell and time switch in series to control lighting contactor for photo cell ON, Time switch OFF operation.
END OF SECTION 16530
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 16530
0376-72-989 2 Exterior Luminaires
SECTION 16535 - EMERGENCY LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Incandescent emergency lighting units.
B. Emergency exit signs.
1.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to local building code for installation requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide product data on emergency lighting units, exit signs, and emergency fluorescent lamp power supply units.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - INCANDESCENT EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS
A. Lithonia.
B. Sure-Lites.
2.2 INCANDESCENT EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS
A, Emergency Lighting Unit: Self-contained unit with rechargeable storage batteries, charger, and lamps.
2.3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - SELF-CONTAINED EMERGENCY POWER EXIT SIGNS
A. Lithonia.
B. Sure-Lites.
2.4 SELF-CONTAINED EMERGENCY POWER EXIT SIGNS
A. Type: Exit signs with integral battery-operated emergency power supply, including power failure relay, test switch, AC
ON pilot light, battery, and fully -automatic two -rate charger.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install units plumb and level.
B. Aim directional lampheads as directed.
END OF SECTION 16535
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 16535
0376-72-989 1 Emergency Lighting Equipment
SECTION 16921 - TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Section 16055 apply
to this Section.
B. Division l5 -Temperature control system components,conductors,wiring, some exposed conduit in Mechanical Rooms,
and installation.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Furnish and install raceway for automatic temperature control (ATC) system as described in Contract
Documents.
1.3 DESCRIPTION
A. Generally, this Section furnishes and installs conduit up to electrical box serving items of ATC equipment and Division
15 furnishes and installs conduit from electrical box to individual pieces of ATC equipment. The exact separation of
responsibility is shown on Drawings.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPONENTS
A. 4 inch square ATCjunction boxes in Mechanical Rooms, concealed conduit forATC system, and singlerecessed device
boxes for thermostat outlets to meet requirements specified in Section 16130.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Conduit may be exposed in Mechanical Rooms. Mount all other conduit concealed.
B. Mount remote sensor outlet boxes with long dimension vertical.
C. Mount thermostat outlet boxes with long dimension horizontal.
END OF SECTION 16921
END OF DIVISION 16
Melaleuca Call Center June 2004 16921
0376-72-989 1 Temperature Control System